EIA NMDC Pellet Plant

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
FOR
THE PROPOSED EXPANSION OF NMDC INTEGRATED IRON &

STEEL PLANT WITH ADDITION OF 2.0 MTPA PELLET PLANT AT KASTURI
AND CHOWKAWADA VILLAGE NEAR NAGARNAR, JAGDALPUR,
BASTAR DISTRICT, CHHATTISGARH
FINAL REPORT
Sponsor :
NMDC Limited
Hyderabad
Prepared by :
Vimta Labs Limited

142, IDA, Phase-II, Cherlapally
Hyderabad500 051, Telangana State
env@vimta.com, www.vimta.com
(QCI / NABET Accreditated EIA Consultant & NABL Accredited
and ISO 17025 Certified Laboratory, Recognized by MoEF, New Delhi)
August, 2015
PREFACE
NMDC Limited
Hyderabad
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

FOR
THE PROPOSED EXPANSION OF NMDC INTEGRATED IRON &

STEEL PLANT WITH ADDITION OF 2.0 MTPA PELLET PLANT AT KASTURI
AND CHOWKAWADA VILLAGE NEAR NAGARNAR, JAGDALPUR,
BASTAR DISTRICT, CHHATTISGARH
For and on behalf of VIMTA Labs Limited

Approved by : M. Janardhan
Signed
Position
: Head & Vice President (Env)
Date
: 20th August, 2015
The report has been prepared inline with the prescribed TORs issued vide letter
J-11011/300/2013-IA.II(I), dated 11th November, 2014 of Ministry of Environment,
Forests and Climate Change, New Delhi.
This report has been prepared by Vimta Labs Limited with all reasonable skill,
care and diligence within the terms of the contract with the client, incorporating
our General Terms and Conditions of Business and taking account of the resources
devoted to it by agreement with the client.
Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron

& Steel Plant (3.0 MTPA) with addition of 2.0 MTPA Pellet Plant at Kasturi and
Chowkawada Village near Nagarnar, Jagdalpur, Bastar District, Chhattisgarh
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter
Title
Table of Contents
List of Figures
List of Tables
Page
TC-I
TC-IV
TC-V
Executive Summary
1.0
Introduction
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.0
Introduction
Type of the Project
Need of the Project
Project Location and Layout
Project Requirement
Project Schedule for Approval and Implementation
Process Technology
Pellet Plant Facilities
Service Facilities
Electrics, Automation & Illumination
Fuel Oil Storage and Handling System
Sources of Pollutants
Control Measures
C2-1
C2-1
C2-1
C2-2
C2-2
C2-10
C2-10
C2-17
C2-25
C2-27
C2-28
C2-29
C2-30
Baseline Environmental Status

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
4.0
C1-1
C1-2
C1-3
C1-10
C1-10
Project Description
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
3.0
Purpose of the Report

Identification of Project and Project Proponent
Brief Description of Project
Scope of the Study
Methodology of the Study
Introduction
Geology and Hydrogeology
Land Use Studies
Meteorology
Ambient Air Quality
Water Quality
Noise Level Survey
Soil Characteristics
Ecology and Biodiversity
Demography and Socio-economics
Traffic Density Survey
C3-1
C3-1
C3-9
C3-16
C3-27
C3-35
C3-43
C3-47
C3-51
C3-72
C3-76
Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures

4.1
4.2
Identification of Impacts and Mitigation Measures

Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Construction
VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad
C4-1
C4-1
TC-I

Table of Contents
Table of Contents (Contd.)

Chapter
4.3
5.0
C5-1
C5-1
General
Monitoring Schedule
Process Monitoring and Reporting Arrangements
Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures
Infrastructure for Environmental Protection
Cost Provision for Environmental Measures
Greenbelt Development
C6-1
C6-4
C6-8
C6-8
C6-8
C6-11
C6-11
Public Consultation
Risk Assessment
Approach to Study
Fuel Storage at the Plant
Hazard Identification
Hazard Assessment and Evaluation
Disaster Management Plan
Emergencies
Emergency Organization
Industrial Safety and Fire Fighting
Off-Site Emergency Preparedness Plan
Occupational Health and Safety
R & R Policy
C7-1
C7-1
C7-1
C7-2
C7-2
C7-5
C7-10
C7-11
C7-12
C7-15
C7-17
C7-21
C7-26
Project Benefits
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
9.0
Analysis of Alternative Sites

Analysis of Process Technology
Additional Studies
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
8.0
C4-6
Environmental Monitoring Program

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
7.0
Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Operation
Page
Analysis of Alternatives for Technology and Site

5.1
5.2
6.0
Title
Improvement in Physical Infrastructure

Improvement in Social Infrastructure
Employment Potential
Community Development Plan and CSR Activities
Proposed CSR Activities
C8-1
C8-1
C8-1
C8-2
C8-8
Administrative Aspects
9.1
9.2
9.3
Organization Policy
Corporate Environmental Policy
Institutional Arrangements for Environment Protection
And Conservation
C9-1
C9-2
C9-2
TC-II

Table of Contents
Table of Contents (Contd.)

Chapter
10.0
Title
Summary and Conclusions
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
11.0
Page
Introduction
Nature of the Project
Baseline Environment
Summary of Anticipated Environmental Impacts
and Mitigation Measures
Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan
Budget Requirement for Environment Protection
CSR activities
Conclusions
C10-1
C10-1
C10-2
C10-3
C10-7
C10-7
C10-8
C10-8
Disclosure of Consultants
11.1
11.2
Introduction
Vimta Lab Limited Environment Consultant
C11-1
C11-1
List of Annexures
Annexure-I
TOR Letter and its Compliance
Annexure-II EC Letter and Certified Compliance Report
Annexure-III Six Months Compliance Report
Annexure-IV CTE Letter and Recent Monitoring Report
Annexure-V Applicable Environnent Standards
Annexure-VI Methodology for Sampling and Analysis
Annexure-VII Land Procurement Letter
Annexure-VIII Water Allocation Letter
Annexure-IX Hydrogeology Report
Annexure-X Land Use Details
Annexure-XI SODAR Study
Annexure-XII Ambient Air Quality Levels
Annexure-XIII Demographic Details
Annexure-XIV Emission Calculation
Annexure-XV R&R Policy
AI-1
AII-1
AIII-1
AIV-1
AV-1
AVI-1
AVII-1
AVIII-1
AIX-1
AX-1
AXI-1
AXII-1
AXIII-1
AIV-1
AXV-1
Questionnaire
TC-III

Table of Contents
List of Figures
Figure
Title
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.5.1
3.6.1
3.7.1
3.8.1
3.9.1
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
6.1
7.1
9.1
9.2
Index Map
Study Area Map
Google Image
Photographs showing the Existing Plant Site
Photographs showing the Proposed Pellet Plant Site
Layout of the Proposed Pellet Plant
Water Balance Diagram
Mass Balance Flow Sheet of the Proposed Pellet Plant
Energy Balance Flow Sheet of the Proposed Pellet Plant
Equipment Flow Sheet of the Proposed Pellet Plant
Drainage Map of the Study Area
Geology of the Study Area
Satellite Imagery of the Study Area
Land Use Pattern Based on Satellite Data
Digital Elevation Model
Seasonal Windrose of Pre Monsoon & Monsoon IMD Jagdalpur
Seasonal Windrose of Post Monsoon & Winter IMD Jagdalpur
Annual Windrose IMD Jagdalpur
Site Specific Windrose
Average Mixing Height
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations
Water Sampling Locations
Noise Monitoring Locations
Soil Sampling Locations
Ecological Sampling Locations
Short Term 24 hourly Incremental GLCs of PM
Short Term 24 hourly Incremental GLCs of SO2
Short Term 24 hourly Incremental GLCs of NOx
Cumulative Short Term 24 hourly Incremental GLCs of PM
Cumulative Short Term 24 hourly Incremental GLCs of SO2
Cumulative Short Term 24 hourly Incremental GLCs of NOx
Isopleths showing Incremental Concentrations for CO
Isopleths showing Incremental Concentrations for NOx
Schematic Diagram of Proposed MBR based STP
Noise Dispersion Contours
Greenbelt Development Plan
Action Plan for Handling Off Site Emergency
Corporate Environmental Policy of NMDC
Organization Structure of Environmental Control Department
Page
C1-5
C1-6
C1-7
C1-8
C1-9
C2-3
C2-7
C2-15
C2-16
C2-24
C3-3
C3-8
C3-13
C3-14
C3-15
C3-22
C3-23
C3-24
C3-25
C3-26
C3-30
C3-37
C3-46
C3-49
C3-61
C4-10
C4-11
C4-12
C4-15
C4-16
C4-17
C4-25
C4-26
C4-29
C4-33
C6-14
C7-19
C9-3
C9-5
TC-IV

Table of Contents
List of Tables
Tables
1.1
1.2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
3.2.1
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.9.1
3.9.2
3.9.3
3.9.4
3.9.5
3.9.6
3.9.7
3.9.8
3.9.9
3.9.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.10.4
Title
Environmental Setting of Expansion Project
Environmental Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring
Classification of Land Breakup
Land Use Breakup
Raw Material Requirement
Details of Raw Material Transportation
Breakup of Recirculation Water and Process Consumption
Water Balance Details
Man Power Requirement
Chemical Analysis of Raw Materials
Material Balance
Hourly Energy Balance
Quality of Pellets
Regional Stratigraphic Succession
Land Use pattern in the Study Area
Land Use/Land Cover Classification System
Land Use Break Up of the Study Area
Sensitivity of Meteorology Monitoring Equipment
Climatological Data Generated at IMD Jagdalpur
Summary of Wind Pattern IMD Jagdalpur
Summary of the Meteorological Data Generated at Site
Summary of Wind Pattern at the Study Area
Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations
Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results
Summary of Chemical Characterization of RSPM
Details of Water Sampling Locations
Surface Water Quality
Ground Water Quality
Details of Noise Monitoring Locations
Noise Levels in the Study Area
Details of Soil Sampling Locations
Soil Analysis Results
Standard Soil Classification
Flora in the Core Area
Flora in the Buffer Area
Details of Terrestrial Ecological Sampling Locations
Forest Blocks in the Study Area
Fauna in the Core Area
Fauna in the Buffer Area
Details of Aquatic Sampling Locations
Plankton Abundance
Aquatic Fauna from Study Area
List of Observed Planktonic Flora and Fauna
Distribution of Population
Distribution of Population by Social Structure
Distribution of Literate and Literacy Rates
Occupational Structure
Page
C1-4
C1-11
C2-2
C2-2
C2-4
C2-5
C2-6
C2-7
C2-10
C2-13
C2-14
C2-14
C2-14
C3-5
C3-9
C3-10
C3-12
C3-16
C3-18
C3-19
C3-19
C3-20
C3-28
C3-31
C3-33
C3-36
C3-38
C3-40
C3-43
C3-45
C3-47
C3-48
C3-50
C3-53
C3-54
C3-60
C3-62
C3-63
C3-64
C3-67
C3-70
C3-71
C3-72
C3-73
C3-74
C3-74
C3-76
TC-V

Table of Contents
List of Tables (contd..)

Tables
3.11.1
3.11.2
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
5.1
5.2
5.3
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
8.1
8.2
10.1
10.2
Title
Traffic Density
Composition of Existing Traffic Volume
Model Setup
Details of Stack Emission from the Proposed Pellet Plant
Predicted Short Term Modeling Results (24 hourly)
Resultant Ground Level Concentration (24 hourly)
Cumulative Stack Emissions from the Existing plant and
Proposed Pellet Plant
Cumulative Predicted 24-Hourly Short Term Incremental
Concentrations
Cumulative Resultant Ground Level Concentrations
Proposed Facilities for Control of Air Pollution
Control Measures on the Roads
Emission Norms for Air Pollution Control Measures
Input to the Model
Predicted Peak Hourly Air Pollution due to Additional Traffic
Wastewater Treatment
Noise Levels from the Proposed Expansion Plant
Solid Waste Generation and Disposal
Hazardous Waste Generation and Its Disposal
Comparison between Drum and Disc Pelletiser
Comparison of Travelling Grate and Grate Kiln Process
Status of Major Pellet Plant Installed in India
Environmental Monitoring during Project Construction Stage
Environmental Monitoring during Operational Stage
Implementation Schedule
Environment Monitoring and Frequency
List of Species Showing High Air Pollution Tolerance Index
Year Wise Greenbelt Development
Category Wise Schedule of Storage Tanks
Hazardous Materials stored, Transported and Handled
Properties of Fuels used at the NMDC Pellet Plant
Applicability of GOI Rules to Fuel/Chemical Storage
Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index
Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index for Storage Facilities
Preliminary Hazard Analysis for Process and Storage Areas
Damage due to Incident Radiation Intensities
Radiation exposure and Lethality
Damage Due to Peak Over Pressure
CSR Expenditure of NMDC during Past 4 Years
CSR Expenditure NISP
Page
C3-77
C3-77
C4-8
C4-9
C4-9
C4-9
C4-13
C4-14
C4-14
C4-18
C4-21
C4-21
C4-22
C4-23
C4-28
C4-32
C4-35
C4-36
C5-3
C5-5
C5-6
C6-4
C6-6
C6-8
C6-9
C6-11
C6-12
C6-13
C7-3
C7-3
C7-3
C7-3
C7-4
C7-5
C7-6
C7-7
C7-8
C7-9
C8-7
C8-8
C10-1
C10-8
TC-VI
Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron &
Steel Plant (3.0 MTPA) with addition of 2.0 MTPA Pellet Plant at Kasturi and
Executive Summary
1.0
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.1
Introduction
M/s. NMDC Limited, intends to set up 2.0 MTPA Pellet Plant as an extension to
their upcoming 3.0 MTPA Integrated Iron and Steel Plant at Nagarnar, Bastar
District, Jagdalpur, Chhattisgarh.
Now a day in Iron and Steel industry, pelletization is the call of the day, as due to
the inherent nature of the pellets; the productivity of steel plants is increasing,
thus reducing the cost of steel making per ton. Further pellet making helps in
utilizing the unused iron rich slimes which after beneficiation are converted into
pellet feed concentrate suitable for pellet making. Due to this reason, slimes
which are lying as waste till date will also get used for steel making. So, the
proposed expansion is the right direction for effective utilization of fines and
slimes. The proposed plant will also have positive impact on socio-economic
development of local people. Total project cost is estimated to be about Rs. 818
crores and EMP cost is about 15.32 crores.
The proposed project can be classified as 3(a) type activity under the category A
as per EIA notification dated 14th September 2006.
As per New Environment Impact Assessment Notification dated 14th September
2006 and as per TOR conditions issued by MoEF&CC, the public hearing for the
existing 3.0 MTPA NMDC Integrated Steel Plant was conducted on 27th February
2009. Hence, exemption of public consultation for this proposal under 7 (ii) of EIA
notification 2006 was requested to MoEF&CC. As per the request, the committee
had exempted the proposed project for installation of pellet plant from public
hearing under Clause 7 (ii) of EIA Notification 2006.
1.2
Environmental Setting
The study area map of 10 km radius around the proposed expansion site is given
in Figure-1. The environmental setting of the proposed expansion project is as
follows:
The proposed pellet plant falls at the intersection of Latitude 1904'52.19 N

to 1905'17.0 N and Longitude 8211'8.67 E to 8211'55.41 E and at an
elevation of about 545 m to 550 m above mean sea level (MSL);
The project site is located at about 15 km (aerial) from Jagdalpur in W

direction. indravathi river is flowing at a distance of 3.4 km in ENE direction
from the project site;
There are no ecological sensitive locations, archaeological monuments, places of

tourist interests and defence installations within 10 km radius;
Four reserve forest block exists within 10 km radius;
Nearest village from the project site is Kasturi which is located at about 0.2 km
in northwest direction;
Executive Summary
Nearest railway station from the plant is Amaguda at about 4.2 km in WSW
direction; and
Proposed expansion site does not fall in any critically polluted areas as per the
CPCB/MoEF&CC circular dated January 2010.
Executive Summary
FIGURE-1
STUDY AREA MAP (10 KM RADIUS)
Executive Summary
2.0
PROCESS DESCRIPTION
The proposed pellet plant processes are as follow:
Raw materials receipt, storage and proportioning
Iron ore concentrate {() 325 mesh, 80 % minimum} shall be pumped to the
pellet plant in the form of slurry at 68% solids concentration by weight. The
slurry will be received in slurry storage tank of pellet plant complex and
subsequently pumped to the filtration unit for dewatering upto the requisite level
using pressure filters. The filter cake is then stored in two (2) nos of storage bins,
each having an effective volume of 600 m3. Individual covered storage has been
envisaged for unloading limestone/Dolomite, coke breeze and bentonite.
Limestone, coke breeze and bentonite will be unloaded by self tripled
dumper/truck inside the covered storage building. Adequate payloader has also
been provided for loading the materials to underground hopper. Below the
underground hoppers, 1 no. belt conveyor will be there for onward transportation
of materials to additive crushing building.
Coarse additive grinding
The additives, as received, in pellet plant will not be fine enough for green pellet
formation; therefore, the particle size of these materials shall have to be reduced
to (200 mesh, 80 %) by suitable grinding in this unit. Additives shall be stored in
three separate bins of 160m3 effective volume. Coke breeze shall be fed from the
storage bin to one vertical roller mill by means of belt weigh feeder & feed
hopper. Limestone & bentonite shall be fed from the respective storage bins to
another vertical roller mill by means of belt weigh feeders & feed hopper on time
sharing basis for grinding. Ground material from this unit shall be carried to
respective ground material storage bins in balling unit by pneumatic conveying.
Mixing of filter cake and ground additives
Filter cake and the ground additive materials from the respective storage bins will
be fed to a high intensity mixer, at a preset ratio. Bulk of water will be added to
the mixer for thorough mixing. The mixed material will be transported to the
balling unit by a series of belt conveyors.
Balling
The mixed material from the mixer shall be stored in mixed material surge
hoppers installed above the balling discs. The mixed material will be continually
discharged from the hoppers and fed to balling discs by means of belt feeders.
Controlled quantity of water shall be added to adjust the final moisture content of
the green pellets. The green pellets from balling discs will be conveyed to the
indurating machine.
Induration
Green pellets will be fed to the indurating machine having minimum reaction area
Executive Summary
312 m2 area (3.0 m wide and 118 m long) through a reciprocating conveyor
which feeds the green pellets uniformly across a wide belt conveyor discharging
the green pellets onto a double deck roller screen to separate oversize (+16mm)
and undersize (9mm) green pellets for recirculation/ dumping. The +9 to 16 mm
fraction of green pellets will be fed to indurating machine. Green pellets on the
indurating machine will pass through several thermal zones for proper treatment
and heat hardening. Pellets discharged from the indurating machine will be
transported to the pellet screening unit for separation of hearth & side layer and
finished product. The finished pellets will be stored in finished pellet stockpile with
the help of trippers and reclaimed by scrapper reclaimers, whenever necessary.
2.1
Infrastructural Facilities and Raw Material Requirement

Land Requirement
About 74.19 Ha (183.32 acres) of acre of land is in possession of NMDC at Kasturi
and Chowkawada village. About 33% of the area will be reserved for green belt.
The area includes road side plantation, plantation near infrastructure, etc.
The Raw materials requirement for 2.0 MTPA pellet plant are given below:
Iron ore Concentrate (Filter cake)
Limestone/Dolomite
Coke Breeze
Bentonite
- 20.06 LTPA
- 0.40 LTPA
- 0.36 LTPA
- 0.14 LTPA
Water Requirement
The water requirement for the proposed pellet plant is mostly for cooling of plant
and equipment with a small part of the requirement being for direct process
needs and drinking & other needs such as dust suppression. With a view to
conserve upon the fresh water requirement the major water consumption for the
pellet plant has been envisaged to be met from the slurry filtrate. Suitable water
recirculation/treatment facilities/circuits will be adopted to meet the various
cooling water needs.
The clarified filtrate water received directly from slurry filtration plant will be
treated stored and supplied to various units of pellet plant. Fresh industrial
makeup water and drinking water will be received from makeup & drinking
water system of 3 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant Project, NMDC, Nagarnar for
further distribution as per requirement.
Manpower
The requirement of manpower for operation and maintenance of the proposed
pellet plant including the general administration personnel has been estimated at
150. Apart from operational and maintenance (mechanical and electrical), the
proposed manpower also includes preventive maintenance and shut down
requirements.
Executive Summary
Power requirement
The estimated power requirement of the proposed plant as follows:
o
o
Maximum Demand
: 20.58 (MVA)
Annual energy consumption : 96.98 (106 kWH)
The most feasible option for meeting the power requirement for proposed pellet
plant of NMDC may be taken from the source of 33kV switchboard of 220/33kV
MRS located at NISP, Nagarnar, which is 3 km away from the source. Source of
the power supply for slurry pumping station (PS3) at Nagarnar shall be made
available from proposed HT switchboard of Pellet plant at 6.6kV level. A suitable
rating of DG set shall be envisaged to take care emergency load in case of failure
of normal power supply.
3.0
BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

The study area generally represents mostly flat and vacant land with winds blowing
predominantly from southwest. The nearest IMD station is at Jagdalpur at a distance
of about 15 km from the project site.
The baseline environment quality has been monitored during pre-monsoon season
(summer) 2015. With regard to the air quality in the study area, the concentrations
of particulate matter (PM10 and PM2.5), sulphur dioxide (SO2) and oxides of
nitrogen (NOx) and other pollutants levels are within the stipulated standards as per
16th November, 2009 Notification. The contributors to the air quality in the region
are predominantly rural, residential activities, domestic coal burning, traffic and
unpaved open surfaces in the region. There are no major operating industries in the
study area except NMDC steel plant.
The water quality in the area covering surface and ground water sources in the
region is in compliance with the stipulated standards of IS:10500. The baseline
water quality does not reflect any major industrial contamination in the region.
The soil in the project site is predominantly clayey and the NPK values are in
sufficient quantity as compared to soil classification given by Indian Council of
Agricultural Research, New Delhi. The soil quality does not appear to have any
visible contamination. However, the surfaces in the region appear to be dusty due to
traffic and windblown dust.
Ambient noise levels were measured at eight locations around the project site. The
day time and night time noise levels in all the rural/residential locations were
observed to be within the permissible limits.
The study area (10 km radius) has a total population of 100027 persons as per
2011 census data. Total male population is about 49.73% and total female
population is around 50.27%. The total literacy rate is 49.18% in the region.
Terrestrial ecology:
From the primary and secondary survey it can be concluded that there are quite
good number of endangered and protected animals in the study area. All the major
Executive Summary
wildlife are observed or recorded by locals and field records of forest department are
only Kanger reserve forest area.
The following mitigation measures will be taken for protection of fauna in the study
area:
o
o
o
o
o
Educate the local people to develop awareness to protect the animals;

Formulate wildlife protection committees in nearby villages to check the
poaching and hunting;
Protect and regulate the herbivorous animals in the forest area near to plant
area;
Wild life patrolling committee would be formed to monitor the wild animals
movement; and
Develop thick green belt around the plant site with fruit bearing tree which
will attract the avi-fauna in the study area and increase the aesthetic value
of the area.
Aquatic Ecology
Basillariophycean, Chlorophyceaen, Myxophyceaen, Rotifers and Cladocerans are
predominant in the studied water bodies. Plankton diversity Index for phytoplankton
and zooplankton varies from 2.50 to 3.06 and 1.64 to 1.81. Physico-chemical,
biological parameters and diversity index reveals that the studied water bodies are
oligotrophic to slightly mesotrophic in nature.
Thus, the monitoring of environmental attributes like ambient air, water quality, soil
characteristics, noise levels, terrestrial and aquatic ecology etc. indicates that the
pollution concentrations are within the permissible limits. Based on the baseline
environmental data of the area, the proposed project is environmentally feasible as
it has sufficient buffer assimilative capacity.
4.0
IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATION MEASURES

The summary of anticipated adverse environmental impacts due to the proposed
project during operation and mitigation measures are given below:
Air Environment
The air pollution control system proposed in the proposed expansion is given
below:
During the design phase, all efforts have been made to adopt latest state of art
technology and to install adequate pollution control measures for different
processes and de-dusting stacks and for different fugitive emission sources.
During the construction phase, the following mitigation measures will be
employed to reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits:
Proper and prior planning, appropriate sequencing and scheduling of all major
construction activities will be done, and timely availability of infrastructure
Executive Summary
supports needed for construction will be ensured to shorten the construction

period vis--vis to reduce pollution;
The construction sites will be adequately camouflaged from outside areas so that
pollution can be confined to the construction site only;
Construction materials will be stored in covered go down or enclosed spaces to
prevent the windblown fugitive emissions;
Stringent construction material handling / overhauling procedures will be
followed;
Truck carrying soil, sand, stone dust, stone will be duly covered to avoid spilling
and fugitive emissions;
Adequate dust suppression measures such as regular water sprinkling at
vulnerable areas of construction sites will be undertaken to control fugitive dust
during material handling and hauling activities in dry seasons;
The construction material delivering vehicles will be covered in order to reduce
spills;
Low emission construction equipment, vehicles and generator sets will be used;
It will be ensured that all construction equipment and vehicles are in good
working condition, properly tuned and maintained to keep emission within the
permissible limits and engines turned off when not in use to reduce pollution;
Vehicles and machineries would be regularly maintained so that emissions
confirm to standards of central pollution control board (CPCB);
Monitoring of air quality at regular intervals will be conducted during construction
phase; and
Construction workers will be provided with masks to protect them from inhaling
dust.
The following mitigation measures will be employed during operation period to
reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Dry fog type DS system for material handling junction points;

Dedusting system in lime & dolo plant;
Stack monitoring to ensure proper functioning of different major stacks;
Air monitoring in the work-zone to ensure proper functioning of fugitive
emission control facilities;
Adequate plantation in and around different units;
confirm to the applicable standards;
Monitoring of ambient air quality through online AAQ monitoring system at
four locations; and
Workers will be provided with adequate protective measures to protect
them from inhaling dust.
Water Environment
Water for the proposed expansion project is sourced from the clarified filtrate
water received directly from slurry filtration plant will be treated stored and
supplied to various units of pellet plant. Fresh industrial makeup water and
drinking water will be received from makeup & drinking water system of 3 MTPA
Executive Summary
Integrated Steel Plant Project, NMDC, Nagarnar for further distribution as per
requirement.
Water pollution may be caused due to discharge of polluted water / waste water
and by contaminated leachate from land disposal / dumping of solid waste. In
Pellet Plant, industrial water is generally used for purposes like:
o
o
o
o
o
Directly in process;
Material conditioning and transportation i.e. for slurring, quenching, mill
scale removal, rinsing, etc;
Air pollution control, i.e., for wet scrubbing of air pollutants;
Heat transfer, i.e., water used for protecting the equipment by cooling
refractory and shell of equipment; and
Water pollution from the industry mainly comprises inorganic solids, either
in suspension or in solution, like oil, grease, etc.
The measures envisaged in the existing process for water pollution are expected
to contain the water pollution within tolerance limit as specified in CPCB and other
related statutory norms. The following measures will be employed during
operation phase to reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits.
o
o
o
o
o
o
Recirculating water in the process whereby the discharge volume is

brought to minimum;
Clarifier and sludge pond for removal of suspended solids;
Neutralization of acidic water by lime;
Removal of oil and grease from the contaminated water by means of oil
traps and skimming devices;
Effluent quality monitoring at inlet & outlet of different effluent treatment
plants to ensure proper functioning of different effluent facilities; and
Use of treated waste water in different shops, dust suppression and for
plantation development as far as practicable.
Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

Pellet plant generates solid wastes, maximum of which are non-hazardous. These
waste materials will be reused / re-utilized in the plant process.
Used Oil/cotton wastes are the hazardous waste produced from the proposed
expansion project which will be disposed-off to registered recyclers.
Noise Environment
The major sources of noise during the construction phase are vehicular traffic,
construction equipment like dozers, scrapers, concrete mixers, cranes, pumps,
compressors, pneumatic tools, saws, vibrators etc. The operation of these
equipment will generate noise ranging between 85-90 dB (A) near the source at
1-m distance. These noises will be generated within the plant boundary and will
be transient in nature.
Equipments will be maintained appropriately to keep the noise level within 85 dB
(A). Wherever possible, equipment will be provided with silencers and mufflers.
Executive Summary
Highly noise intensive construction activities will be restricted to day time only.
Greenbelt will be developed from construction stage. Further, workers working in
high noise areas will be provided with necessary protective devices e.g. ear plug,
ear-muffs etc.
Biological Environment & Greenbelt Development
During construction vegetation will be disturbed. However, precautions have to be
taken to disturb only to the minimum extent possible. Greenbelt will be developed
phase wise during construction to improve the aesthetic value in the area and to
screen out the fugitive dust generated during construction.
The removal of vegetation from the soil and loosening of the topsoil generally
causes soil erosion. However, such impacts will be confined to the project site and
will be minimized through paving and water sprinkling. There are not many
existing matured trees in the site. However, greenbelt will be developed
surrounding the plant facilities in the open areas. The existing trees will be
preserved to the extent possible.
The tree species selected for green belt include the native species, which will be
planted in several rows with adequate width around the plant boundary and
maintained as per CPCB guidelines. The inter-spaces will be planted with grasses,
bushes and hedges. Greenbelt is thus a set of rows of trees planted in such a way
that they form an effective barrier between the plant and the surroundings so
that community noise impact and air pollution will be reduced to a great extent.
Socio - Economics
The proposal implementation will generate employment both directly and also due
to development of ancillary industries. During the construction period, the project
is going to create substantial employment and income. A large portion of these is
likely to trickle down to the local people. Besides this, many persons from the
study area will get employment on permanent basis for actual operation of the
plant in the form of skilled or semiskilled or unskilled labour. Thus, substantial
amount of employment and income are expected to be generated for the local
people. Hence, it can be ascertained that the project is going to have significant
employment and income effects. The estimated manpower requirement at the
operational stage of the pellet plant is 150.
In the case of indirect employment, the effect is quite strong and widespread.
Besides direct employment, the project is expected to generate substantial
indirect employment in other sectors. So far as indirect employment is concerned,
the effect is very strong and widespread specifically, in ancillary industries,
services and transport sectors. In view of the above, it can be justifiably
concluded that the proposed of integrated steel plant will have tremendous
positive employment and income effects. Overall assessment of the employment
and income effects indicates that the creation of additional capacity will have
strong positive direct as well as indirect impact on employment and income
generation.
10
Executive Summary
5.0
RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

A detailed risk assessment and consequence analysis has been carried for all the
plant operations in the proposed expansion. A suitable disaster management plan
has been recommended. A qualified and experienced safety officer will be
appointed. The responsibilities of the safety officers include identification of the
hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and advice on corrective actions,
conduct safety audit, organize training programs and provide professional expert
advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health. He is also
responsible to ensure compliance of works safety rules/statutory provisions.
All the potential occupational hazardous work places will be monitored regularly.
The health of employees will be monitored once in a year for early detection of
any ailment due to exposure to noise, respirable dust and hazardous chemicals.
The audiometry and lung function tests will be included in this surveillance
program.
6.0
PROJECT BENEFITS
The growth of the industry significantly contributes to economic growth of a
nation as it generates employment both directly and also due to development of
ancillary industries. Peripheral development takes place due to need of
infrastructure facilities and due to more influx of money through the area, overall
importance of the area increases and overall the infrastructure and the living
conditions will improve.
NMDC is coming up with educational complex comprising of primary and
secondary school with boys & girls hostel, ITI College, Polytechnic College, Staff
quarters, Community hall and shops for meeting the requirement of employees of
NMDC Iron and Steel Plant & Pellet plant and local population. NMDC is already
implementing CSR works in the areas of education, health, housing, transport,
civic utilities in nearby areas for meeting the social infrastructure demand.
7.0
ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAMME

The environment monitoring for the proposed pellet plant complex operations
shall be conducted as follows:
Air quality;
Water and wastewater quality;
Noise levels;
Soil quality; and
Greenbelt development.
A centralized environment monitoring cell will be established for pellet plant.
Monitoring of important and crucial environment parameters is of immense
importance to assess the status of environment during operation of pellet plant.
With the knowledge of baseline conditions, the monitoring program can serve as
an indicator for any deterioration in environment conditions due to operation of
the plant and suitable mitigatory steps could be taken in time to safeguard the
environment.
11
Executive Summary
8.0
CONCLUSION
The proposed expansion project has certain level of adverse impacts on the local
environment. However, with the judicious implementation of the proposed
pollution control and environment management measures, even the adverse
impacts anticipated due to construction and operation of the proposed pellet plant
will be mitigated. Further, development of this project has certain major
beneficial impact/effects in terms of bridging the raw material demand for steel
plants and supply gap and providing employment opportunities that will be
created during the course of its setting up and as well as during the operational
phase of the project.
Thus, in view of considerable benefits from the project with containable adverse
environmental impacts, the proposed expansion project will be most
advantageous to the region as well as to the nation.
12

Chapter-1
Introduction
1.0
INTRODUCTION
M/s. NMDC Limited, intends to set up 2.0 MTPA pellet plant as a extension to
their upcoming 3.0 MTPA integrated iron and steel plant at Nagarnar village,
Jagdalpur tehsil, Bastar District, Chhattisgarh.
This chapter describes the purpose of the present Environmental Impact
Assessment (EIA) report, identification of the project and project proponent, brief
description, nature, size, location of the project and importance to the country,
region. The chapter also includes the details of regulatory scoping carried out as
per Terms of Reference (ToR) issued by the Ministry of Environment Forests and
Climate Change (MoEF & CC), Government of India (GoI), New Delhi.
1.1
Purpose of the Report

As per the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification dated 14th
September 2006, the proposed expansion project falls under Category A of
project type 3(a) and requires Environmental Clearance (EC) to be obtained from
MoEF&CC before the commencement of construction activity.
In line with new EIA Notification 2006, proposed expansion project was
considered by the reconstituted Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry) in its 14th
meeting held during 19th-20th December 2013, for prescribing TORs for
undertaking detailed EIA/EMP study and TOR was issued vide letter no. F. No. J11011/300/2013-IA-II (I) dated 5th January 2014. However, project proponent
intents to shift the location of pellet plant from Mandpal village to Kasturi and
Chowkawada village, where the land is already in possession of NMDC. A fresh
application for TOR has been submitted on 6th May 2014 and was considered in
the Expert Appraisal Committee meeting held on 18 th-19th September 2014. The
committee decided that since there is only change of the location of site and the
land is already under possession, the same TOR granted earlier was valid for this
revised TOR.
This EIA report has been prepared, covering all the TOR conditions prescribed by
MoEF&CC vide letter no. F. No. J-11011/300/2013-IA-II(I) dated 11th November
2014. A copy of TOR letter along with its compliance to the conditions are
enclosed as Annexure-I. The report cover the primary data collected during 1st
March-2015 to 31st May-2015 representing pre monsoon season.
The EC letter for the existing 3.0 MTPA NMDC Integrated Iron & Steel plant along
with the extension of validity of EC letter and the certified compliance report are
enclosed as Annexure-II. The six monthly progress report to the conditions
stipulated in Integrated Steel Plant of NMDC at Nagarnar is being submitted
regularly to MoEF&CC, RO, Bhopal. A copy of the same for the period October
2014 to March 2015 is enclosed as Annexure-III. Consent to establish and the
certified monitoring report from Regional Office, Chhattisgarh Environment
Conservation Board for the upcoming 3.0 MTPA integrated iron and steel plant are
enclosed as Annexure-IV.
As per New Environment Impact Assessment Notification dated 14 th September
C1-1

Chapter-1
Introduction
notification 2006 was requested to MoEF&CC. As per the request, the committee
had exempted the proposed project for installation of pellet plant from public
hearing under Clause 7 (ii) of EIA Notification 2006.
1.2
Identification of Project and Project Proponent
1.2.1 Identification of the Project

NMDC intends to install a 2.0 MTPA Pellet Plant adjacent to NMDCs upcoming
integrated steel plant (NISP) at Nagarnar, Bastar District, Chhattisgarh by
utilizing the ore concentrate from Bailadila iron ore mines, South Bastar
Dantewada District, Chhattisgarh.
The proposed pellet plant at NMDC, Nagarnar is intended to produce Blast
Furnace (BF) grade iron ore pellets for use in blast furnace in iron making.
Beneficiated iron ore concentrate shall be obtained from the proposed
beneficiation plants of NMDC at Bacheli in the form of slurry through pipelines.
1.2.2 Identification of the Project Proponent
NMDC is a Government of India enterprise, Incorporated in 1958 as a
Government of India fully owned public enterprise. NMDC is under the
administrative control of the Ministry of Steel, Government of India. Since
inception involved in the exploration of wide range of minerals including iron ore,
copper, rock phosphate, lime stone, dolomite, gypsum, bentonite, magnesite,
diamond, tin, tungsten, graphite, beach sands etc.
NMDC is India's single largest iron ore producer, presently producing about 30
million tonnes of iron ore from 3 fully mechanized mines viz., Bailadila Deposit14/11C, Bailadila Deposit-5, 10/11A (Chhattisgarh State) and Donimalai Iron Ore
Mines (Karnataka State). NMDC is presently producing about 20 million tonnes of
iron ore from its Bailadila sector mines and 10 million tonnes from Donimalai
sector mines.
NMDC has made valuable and substantial contribution to the National efforts in
the mineral sector during the last five decades and has been accorded the status
of schedule-A Public Sector Company. In recognition to the Company's growing
status and consistent excellent performance, the Company has been categorized
by the Department of Public Enterprises as "NAVRATNA" Public Sector Enterprise
in 2008.
1.2.3 Justification of the Project
The demand for steel in India is projected to grow in the years to come and this in
turn would call for increased demand for iron ore. NMDC is gearing itself to meet
the expected increase in demand by enhancing production capabilities of existing
iron ore mines and by opening up new mines and by setting up of 3 MTPA
integrated iron and steel plant. The production level of iron ore is envisaged to be
augmented to 51 MTPA consisting of 20.9 MTPA of lumps / CLO and 30.1 MTPA of
fines, including slimes.
C1-2

Chapter-1
Introduction
The Bailadila sector is served by KK railway line of East Coast Railways which can
cater to a maximum of 25 MTPA and will not be in a position to evacuate the total
produce from the Bailadila sector in the present state. In these circumstances, to
reduce dependence on railways, NMDC intends to develop slurry pipeline
transportation system as an alternate mode of transport for transportation of
fines in slurry form subsequent to their conversion to iron ore concentrate suitable
to making pellet feed concentrate.
Pelletization plant has to be set up to convert the pellet feed concentrate into
pellets. NMDC intends to set up 2 MTPA pellet plant at Nagarnar which will
produce pellets for use as raw material in iron making in blast furnace in NMDCs
upcoming steel plant to the maximum extent possible thereby meeting portion of
the raw material requirement of the steel plant.
which are lying as waste till date will also get used for steel making. So, the
proposed expansion is the right direction for effective utilization of fines and
slimes.
1.2.4 Cost of the Project
The cost estimated for the proposed 2 MTPA Pellet Plant including utilities, offsite,
auxiliary services etc., is about Rs. 818 Crores.
1.3
Brief Description of the Project
1.3.1

The nature of the Project is a pyro metallurgical industry involving making of iron
ore Pellets utilizing iron ore concentrate received through Slurry Pipeline. The iron
ore concentrate shall be obtained from the Beneficiation plants which will be set
up by NMDC. The process of pelletisation essentially involves the following steps:
Filtration of iron ore concentrate to produce filter cake which is in fine powder
of particle size of 40 microns;
This filter cake along with additives are fed to Disc pelletiser for producing
green pellets; and
The green pellets are then indurated @1200C producing hardened pellets.
1.3.2
Location of the Project

The proposed site for pellet plant is located near Kasturi & Chowkawada Village in
Jagdalpur tehsil, Bastar district of Chhattisgarh and is about 16 km in NorthEast
direction from Jagdalpur town. The proposed pellet plant site is located on the
eastern side of the proposed 3MTPA Integrated Steel Plant (NISP), Nagarnar,
NMDC. The proposed plant site is located at the coordinates Latitude
1904'52.19 N to 1905'17.0 N and Longitude 8211'8.67 E to 8211'55.41 E.
The SOI topo sheet number for the proposed pellet plant is 65 I/4.
C1-3

Chapter-1
Introduction
The index map of the project area, study area map of proposed expansion project
site (10 km radius), google image and photographs of the existing and proposed
expansion project site are given in Figure-1.1 to Figure-1.5.
1.3.3 Environmental Setting of the Proposed Expansion Project
The environmental setting of the proposed expansion project is presented in
Table-1.1.
TABLE-1.1
ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING OF EXPANSION PROJECT (10 KM RADIUS)
Sr. No.
1
Particulars
Project area
Project site coordinates
3
4
Elevation above MSL

Climatic conditions (Based on
IMD Jagdalpur-15 km, W)
5
6
7
Nearest highway
Nearest railway station
Nearest airport
Nearby villages
9
10
Nearest town
Reserve forest/ protected forest
11
Notified Historical/
Archaeological/ Tourist Places
Ecological Sensitive areas
Water Bodies
12
13
14
15
16
17
Defense and other related

Establishment
State/National Boundaries
Nearby Major Industries
Seismic Zone
Details
Kasturi & Chowkawada village, near Nagarnar,
Jagdalpur, Bastar District, Chhattisgarh.
Corner
Latitude
Longitude
Point
A
1905'9.63 N
8211'9.23 E
B
1905'17.0 N
8211'23.46 E
C
1905'6.94 N
8211'55.41 E
D
1904'52.19 N
8211'46.64 E
E
1904'54.95 N
8211'12.37 E
F
1905'1.89 N
8211'8.67 E
545 m to 550 m
Annual mean max temp: 42.3 oC
Annual mean min temp: 7.1 oC
Annual total rainfall: 1532.90 mm
Predominant wind direction : SW
NH - 43 (adjacent, S)
Amaguda railway station (4.2 km, WSW)
Raipur Airport (300 km by road, NNW)
Jagdalpur Air strip, non-commercial (15 km, W)
Kasturi village (0.2 km, NW);
Chowkawada village (0.5 km, S); and
Nagarnar village (1.6 km, NNW)
Jagdalpur Town (15 km, W)
Kanger RF (2.5 km, S);
Kakadapasar RF (5.3 km, WNW);
Ulnav RF (8.7 km, NW); and
Malcherma RF (9.5 km, SE).
Nil
Nil
Indravathi River (3.4 km, ENE);
Jaura River (3.9 km, ENE); and
Bhaskel River (5.5 km, NNW).
Nil
Orissa State (1.4 km, SE)
NMDC Integrated iron & steel plant (adjacent, W)
Zone-II IS 1893 (Part-1):2002
C1-4

Chapter-1
Introduction
FIGURE-1.1
INDEX MAP
C1-5

Chapter-1
Introduction
FIGURE-1.2
STUDY AREA MAP (10 KM RADIUS)
C1-6

Chapter-1
Introduction
FIGURE-1.3
GOOGLE IMAGE (10 KM RADIUS)
C1-7

Chapter-1
Introduction
FIGURE-1.4
PHOTOGRAPHS SHOWING THE EXISTING STEEL PLANT SITE
C1-8

Chapter-1
Introduction
FIGURE-1.5
PHOTOGRAPHS SHOWING THE PROPOSED PELLET PLANT SITE
C1-9

Chapter-1
Introduction
1.4
Scope of the Study

Based on the prescribed TOR, the Environmental Impact Assessment report is
prepared covering study area (10 km radius) around the proposed expansion
project area. The scope of study broadly includes:
To conduct literature review and to collect data relevant to the study area;
To undertake environmental monitoring so as to establish the baseline
environmental status of the study area;
To identify the ambient air quality levels in the project area;
To predict incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to the
proposed project activities;
To evaluate the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in
the study area by using scientifically developed and widely accepted
environmental impact assessment methodologies;
To prepare an Environment Management Plan (EMP) outlining the measures
for improving the environmental quality and scope for future expansions for
environmentally sustainable development; and
To identify critical environmental attributes required to be monitored.
The literature review includes identification of relevant articles from various
publications, collection of data from various government agencies and other
sources.
1.5
Methodology of the Study

M/s. Vimta Labs Limited, Hyderabad had conducted a reconnaissance survey
and sampling locations were identified on the basis of:
Predominant wind directions in the study area
Meteorological Department (IMD), Jagdalpur;
as recorded by India
Existing topography, location of surface water bodies like ponds, canals and
rivers;
Location of villages/towns/sensitive areas;
Accessibility, power availability and security of monitoring equipment, pollution
pockets in the area;
Areas which represent baseline conditions; and
Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental
attributes.
Field studies have been conducted for a period of three months (March 2015 to
May 2015) representing pre-monsoon season to determine existing conditions of
various environmental attributes as outlined in Table-1.2. The applicable
environmental standards for the project are given in Annexure-V and the
methodology of monitoring and analysis is given in Annexure-VI.
C1-10
Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron & Steel Plant (3.0 MTPA) with addition of 2.0 MTPA
Pellet Plant at Kasturi and Chowkawada Village near Nagarnar, Jagdalpur, Bastar District, Chhattisgarh
Chapter-1
Introduction
TABLE-1.2
ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING
Sr.
No.
1
Environmental
Component
Surface
meteorology
Ambient
Quality
Water Quality
Air
Sampling
Locations
Sampling
Parameters
One
central
location
Temperature, wind
speed,
wind
direction
8 locations
16 locations
Total
Sampling
Period
3 months
Hourly
WS: +/-0.02 m/sec

WD: +/- 3 degrees
Temp: +/- 0.2 oC
Rainfall
3 months
Daily
Rainfall: 0.2 mm
Relative humidity,
cloud cover
As
per
NAAQS
2009
3 months
Hourly
RH: +/- 3%
Two days per

week for 13
weeks
24 hourly
PM10: 5 g/m3
PM2.5: 2 g/m3
SO2: 4 g/m3
NOx: 9 g/m3
CO: 12.5 g/m3
O3 : 2 g/m3
As per IS:10500
Grab sampling
Once in
period
study
Heavy metals (As,

Hg, Pb, Cd, Cr-6,
Total Cr, Cu, Zn,
Se, Fe)
Grab sampling
Once in
period
study
(8-surface
water
8-ground
water)
Sampling
Frequency
Detection Limit
EC:+/-0.1 us/cm
TSS/TDS: 0.5 mg/l
O&G:0.1mg/l
DO: 0.5 mg/l
BOD:2 mg/l
COD: 0.5 mg/l
Ca, Mg, Na, K: 0.1
mg/l Alkalinity, PO4,
SO4, Cl, NO3: 0.1 mg/l
Coliform: 1 MPN
0.001 mg/l
Methodology
The
meteorology
parameters
were
recorded
using
automatic
micrometeorological equipment consisting of
anemometer, wind wane and thermometer.
Review of secondary data collected from
IMD station at Ranchi.
Rainfall was recorded every morning at
0830 hours
Automatic Humidity was recorded.
Gravimetric method for PM10 and PM2.5.
Modified West & Gaeke method for SO2
(IS-5182 part-II 1969) using tetrachloro
mercurate 0.01 N absorbing solution.
Jacob-Hochheiser method (IS-5182 part-IV
1975) for NOX using sodium arsenate
absorbing solution of 0.01 N absorbing
solution. CO was measured by GC method.
As per APHA methods. The conductivity,
temperature
were
analyzed
at
site
laboratory and rest of the parameters were
analyzed at VIMTA's central laboratory at
Hyderabad.
C1-11
Chapter-1
Introduction
Sr.
No.
Environmental
Component
Sampling
Locations
Sampling
Parameters
Noise
8 locations
Leq
Soil
8 locations
Terrestrial
Ecology
Total
area
study
Soil
profile,
chemical
constituents,
suitability
for
agricultural growth
Flora and fauna
Total
area
study
Demography and
Socio-economic
aspects
Land Use
Total
area
Geology
10
11
Total
Sampling
Period
Hourly
readings
for
24 hours
Composite
sample up to
1.0 m depth
Sampling
Frequency
study
Methodology
SPL: 0.1 dB(A)
Integrated on hourly basis
Once
during
study period
EC: 0.1 s/cm

N, P, K: 0.1 mg/kg
Analysis was carried out as

chemical analysis by ML Jackson
Field
observations
Once in
period
Demographic
profile
study
Trend of land use

change
for
different categories
Total
area
study
Geological history
Hydrogeology
(Surface
and
ground)
Total
area
study
Drainage pattern,
nature of streams,
aquifer
characteristics,
recharge
and
discharge areas
Through field visits and collected secondary

data. Count and quadrate method has been
used.
Through
field
visits
and
secondary
information sources like National Informatic
Center, Delhi and Census data.
Through
field
visits
and
secondary
information of IRS, LISS P6 satellite
imagery
data
sources
like
National
Informatic Center, Delhi
Secondary information sources (Geological
survey of India and Central Ground Water
Board, Delhi)
Field survey was conducted and primary
data was collected
Traffic Study
2
locations
(Important
traffic
junctions)
Traffic
density
survey
will
be
carried
out
at
suitable locations
24 hours
Once in
period
Detection Limit
study
per
soil
Secondary
information
sources
like
(Geological survey of India and Central
Ground Water Board)
Once
during
study period
C1-12

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.0
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2.1
Introduction
This chapter presents the major resources required for proposed expansion
project, project schedule, process description, technological facilities and plant
configuration, raw material requirement and handling and likely environmental
effects due to the proposed project and proposed mitigation measures.
2.2
Type of Project
The present project involves setting up of pellet plant of capacity 2 MTPA which
falls under Category A of project type 3(a) as per the new EIA notification dated
14th September 2006.
2.3
Need for the Project

As the demand for steel in India is projected to grow in the years to come and
this in turn would call for increased demand for iron ore. NMDC is gearing itself to
meet the expected increase in demand by enhancing production capabilities of
the existing iron ore mines and by opening up new mines and by setting up of 3
MTPA integrated iron and steel plant.
2.3.1 Pellet Plant - Indian Scenario

India figured in the worldpelletizing map in the year 1966 with 0.5 MTPA
installation of Chowgule's Pellet Plant at Pale, Goa. The plant was 100% export
oriented unit with 110 m2 travelling grate supplied by Lurgi.
Subsequently, pellet plants were installed by TISCO, MPL, KIOCL, Essar Steel and
JSW. There are also many upcoming pellet plants proposed to install in India and
it can be seen that pelletisation of iron ore fines is increasingly gaining
importance and new pellet plants of various sizes are under concept and
execution stage. With scarcity of lump ore growing day by day and its prices
soaring high, pellet seems to be the only feasible solution, there by narrowing
demand supply gap. Further, the new blast furnaces envisaged by SAIL &
private entrepreneurs are mostly of high capacity where prepared burden with
high consistency is required. This also underlines the necessity of pellets as the
suitable alternative feed.
which are lying as waste till date will also get used for steel making.
C2-1

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.4
Project Location and Layout

Bastar district of Chhattisgarh and is about 16 km in NorthEast direction from
Jagdalpur town and the project site is well connected to NH-43. The overall plant
layout is shown in Figure 2.1.
2.4.1
Size and magnitude of the Project

About 183 acres of land is in possession of NMDC at Kasturi and Cowkawada
Village. The capacity of the Pellet Plant is to produce 2 MTPA Pellets. The plant is
expected to operate in continuous mode to the maximum extent and is proposed
to operate 7200 hours per annum.
2.5
Project Requirements
NMDC intends to set up 2.0 MTPA Pellet Plant as a backward integration to their
upcoming Integrated Iron and Steel Plant at Nagarnar, Bastar District, Jagdalpur,
Chhattisgarh. Beneficiated iron ore concentrate shall be obtained from the
proposed beneficiation plant of NMDC at Bacheli in the form of slurry through
pipeline. The finished iron ore pellets is envisaged for charging required amount
to blast furnace of NISP (NMDC Iron & Steel Plant), Nagarnar & balance for
domestic sale.
2.5.1 Land Requirement

and Chowkawada village. The breakup of the land classification is given in Table2.1. The land possession document is enclosed as Annexure-VII.
TABLE-2.1
CLASSIFICATION OF LAND - BREAKUP
Sr. No.
1
2
Village
Private Land (ha)
Kasturi
58.89
Chowkawada
12.35
Total
71.24
Source: NMDC, Project Report
Government Land (ha)

2.95
0.00
2.95
About 33% of the area will be reserved for green belt. The area includes road side
plantation, plantation near infrastructure, etc. Land use breakup is given in
Table-2.2.
TABLE-2.2
LAND USE BREAKUP (PROPOSED PELLET PLANT)
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
Facility Description
Process units
Non plant buildings like Admin/ Canteen etc
Roads and drains
Open area / greenery
Total Land area
Area
Acres
84.62
1.08
16.24
81.38
183.32
Hectare
34.25
0.44
6.57
32.93
74.19
C2-2

Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.1
LAYOUT OF THE PROPOSED PELLET PLANT
C2-3

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.5.2 Raw Material Requirement

The Raw materials requirement for 2.0 MTPA Pellet Plant is shown in Table-2.3.
TABLE-2.3
RAW MATERIAL REQUIREMENT
Sr.
No
Material
1
2
3
4
Iron ore Concentrate (Filter cake)

Limestone/Dolomite
Coke Breeze
Bentonite
TOTAL
Annual
Requirement
(LTPA)
20.06
0.40
0.36
0.14
20.96
Specific
Consumption/(kg/t)
1103
20
18
7
1148
2.5.2.1 Size of Raw materials

The Raw Material Handling System (RHMS) have been planned based on the
following assumption.
Beneficiated iron ore concentrate
Lime Stone/Dolomite
Coke Breeze
Bentonite
: (-) 325 mesh

: (-) 40 mm
: (-) 40 mm
: (-) 50 mm
2.5.2.2 Source of raw materials

Iron ore concentrate
Requirement of iron ore concentrate in slurry form shall be met from proposed
iron ore beneficiation plant, NMDC at Bailadila. The slurry shall be transported
from beneficiation plant to the Pellet plant at Nagarnar through slurry pipeline.
Limestone
BF grade limestone (CaO: 46 48%) from Chitapur PotnarBaranji, Deorapal
areas of Jagdalpur Tehsil in Bastar district of Chattisgarh state has been
envisaged to meet the requirement. Alternately, limestone quarries of
SatnaMaihar region of Madhya Pradesh have been identified as potential source
of BF grade limestone.
Coke breeze
The coke breeze requirement is
from the coke oven batteries
Adequate facility for crushing
considered for meeting the coke
envisaged to be met through internal generation

of NMDC integrated steel plant at Nagarnar.
of coke available at NISP shall have to be
breeze requirement of the pelletizing plant.
Bentonite
The bentonite requirement will be met through purchase from private mines in
Kutch district of Gujarat.
C2-4

Chapter-2
Project Description
Unloading, Storage and Transportation of Raw material to Pellet Plant

The transportation of limestone, coke breeze and bentonite will be carried out by
dumper/truck to the plant premises. Individual covered storage building has been
envisaged for unloading limestone, coke breeze and bentonite. Limestone, coke
breeze and bentonite will be unloaded by self tripled dumper/truck inside the
covered storage building. Adequate payloader has also been provided for loading
the materials to underground hopper. 1 no. underground hopper for each covered
storage building will be provided. Below the underground hoppers, 1 no. belt
conveyor will be provided for onward transportation of materials to additive
crushing building to make desired sizes with the help of crusher & screen. In
additive crushing building, 1 no. roll crusher & 1 no. vibrating screen will be
envisaged. From additive crushing building, the ground additive material shall be
transported to ground storage bins in pellet plant.
2.5.2.2 Mode of Transport
The iron ore slurry will be transported through dedicated slurry pipeline from
NMDC, Bacheli to proposed pellet plant at Nagarnar (approx.150 km). Hence, no
truck is required for the iron ore transportation. However, for the other raw
materials like Bentonite, Limestone, Coke breeze, etc., will be transported by
roadways and the details are given in Table-2.4.
TABLE-2.4(A)
DETAILS OF RAW MATERIAL TRANSPORTATION
Sr.
No.
Material
Annual
requirement
(T)
1
2
3
Bentonite
Limestone
Coke breeze
14,000
40,000
36,000
Material
Bulk Density
Considered
(T/Cum)
1.0
1.5
0.5
Annual Traffic
Considering 25 T
Capacity Truck /
Dumper) (Nos.)
934
1818
4500
Trucks
Per Day
(Nos.)
3
6
15
TABLE-2.4(B)
DETAILS OF RAW MATERIAL TRANSPORTATION
Sr
No.
1
Material
Annual requirement
(KL) @ 21.3 Liters /
Tonne of Pellet.
Fuel Oil
42600
Annual Traffic
Considering 20 KL
Capacity Tanker)
(Nos.)
2130
Tankers Per
Day (Nos.)
7
2.5.3 Power Requirement

Maximum Demand
Annual energy consumption
: 20.58 (MVA)
: 96.98 (106 kWH)
C2-5

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.5.3.1 Source of Power Supply

The most feasible option for meeting the power requirement for proposed pellet
plant of NMDC may be taken from the source of 33kV switchboard of 220/33kV
MRS located at NISP, Nagarnar, which is 3 km away from the source. Source of
the power supply for slurry pumping station (PS3) at Nagarnar shall be made
available from proposed HT switchboard of Pellet plant at 6.6kV level. A suitable
rating of DG set shall be envisaged to take care emergency load in case of failure
of normal power supply.
2.5.4 Water Requirement
The water requirement for the proposed pellet plant is mostly for cooling of plant
and equipment with a small part of the requirement being for direct process
needs and drinking & other needs such as dust suppression. With a view to
conserve upon the fresh water requirement the major water consumption for the
recirculation/treatment facilities/circuits will be adopted to meet the various
cooling water needs.
The clarified filtrate water received directly from slurry filtration plant will be
treated stored and supplied to various units of pellet plant. Fresh industrial
makeup water and drinking water will be received from makeup & drinking
water system of 3 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant Project, NMDC, Nagarnar for
further distribution as per requirement. The water allocation letter for the existing
steel plant is enclosed as Annexure-VIII. The unitwise breakup of recirculation
water and process consumption is given in Table-2.5. The water balance detail is
given in Table-2.6 and the water balance diagram is shown in Figure-2.2.
TABLE-2.5
BREAKUP OF RECIRCULATION WATER AND PROCESS CONSUMPTION
Sr. No.
Unit
Indurating machine cross

lintel and other cooling
system
Compressor unit
Circulating
water
(m3/h)
600
Process
Consumption
(m3/h)
-
40
Mixer and Balling discs,

Miscellaneous
process
needs.
80
Dust suppression
50
Remarks
Fresh
Industrial
water based.
Fresh
Industrial
water based.
Industrial
water
consumed
in
process.
Filtrate water from
filtration plant shall
be used.
50 m3/h filtrate
water
from
filtration plant shall
be used for DSS.
C2-6

Chapter-2
Project Description
TABLE-2.6
WATER BALANCE DETAILS
Sr. No.
A
1
2
B
1
2
m3/h
130
80
50
65
60
Total Water Balance

Reclaimed Water from slurry filtrate
Process needs for pellet plant
Dust suppression requirement
Fresh industrial makeup water & DW System
Fresh industrial makeup water requirement including cooling water
circuit losses, miscellaneous, etc.
DW requirement
80
PROCESS NEEDS
(80 CU.M PER HOUR)
RECLAIMED WATER
FROM FILTERING
THE SLURRY
(130 CU.M PER HOUR)
50
20
MAKE UP WATER FROM

NMDC's UPCOMING
INTEGRATED STEEL
PLANT
(65 CU.M PER HOUR)
40
ACVS
(70 CU.M PER HOUR)
MAKE UP WATER
REQUIREMENT
INCLUDING PROCESS
LOSSES
(40 CU.M PER HOUR)
DRINKING WATER
(5 CU.M PER HOUR)
4
SEWAGE TREATMENT
PLANT
GREENBELT AREA
FIGURE-2.2
WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM
C2-7

Chapter-2
Project Description
The following water circuits have been planned in the pellet plant:
Indirect Circulation Water (ICW) For cooling of various equipment by
industrial water. The return hot water is cooled through cooling tower;
Direct spray water to mixer Used up in process; and
Make-up water system To feed make-up water to various consumers.
2.5.4.1 Water System
Indirect cooling system
To cater to the cooling water requirements of lintels, etc., of the Indurating
machine, industrial water recirculation system consisting of pumps, strainers,
valves, piping, etc., shall be provided. Water lost in the cooling tower is
replenished by fresh water from the existing make-up water network.
Process water and auxiliaries cooling system
To cater to the process water requirements and cooling water requirements of the
auxiliaries of the proposed pellet plant, a separate industrial water supply system
consisting of pumps, piping and valves etc. will be provided. Water recovered
from the pellet plant itself i.e. the filtrate of filtering unit will be reused in the
plant. A separate group of pumpsets along with associated facilities shall be
provided for process water in mixer & balling disc.
Reclaimed water system
Water reclaimed from filtration unit shall be treated and the same will be pumped
back to circulating water pumphouse. A part of reclaimed water
(approx.130m3/h) shall be used in mixer & balling disc and makeup water to DS
system.
Makeup water system
Makeup water will be pumped to different consumers, sumps, etc through MS
pipeline network complete with valves, fittings and appurtenances. The makeup
water pumps will be housed in a proposed common pump house for makeup,
circulation water system.
Makeup water system will include distribution of water to the circulation system,
DS/DFDS as well as process needs with isolation valve. The water loss in the
various processes in evaporation, process /system, minor leakage including
service water requirement etc., will be replenished by a separate common make
up water system for pellet plant. All make up tapings shall have flow meters with
bypass arrangement with isolation facility.
Drinking water System
A drinking water will be provided by extension of the existing drinking water
network. The piping network will be provided complete with G.I. pipelines, valves,
fittings and appurtenances.
C2-8

Chapter-2
Project Description
Firefighting System
To cater to the needs of water based firefighting system, a fire water pump
house associated fire water piping network shall be planned with provision of yard
hydrants and internal hydrants at regular intervals.
The firefighting water network will be provided with adequate number of yard
hydrants and in-shop landing valves to combat fire hazards in the plant. To cater
to the needs of water based firefighting system, a fire water piping network shall
be planned with provision of yard hydrants and internal hydrants at regular
intervals. The proposed network shall be connected with the existing network at
the battery limits with an isolation gate valve.
The following specification of work shall be considered:
i) Category at hazard ordinary (as par TAC)
ii) Yard hydrants at 45 m intervals
iii) Internal hydrants at 30 m intervals
iv) Minimum pressure at remotest hydrant 3.5 kg/cm2
Accessories:
Hoses : two nos. of 15 m long RRL as per IS : 636 PartI with instantaneous male
and female coupling for yard hydrant and 15 m long RRL hose for internal
hydrant.
Hose box : 1 no. of hose box each landing valve to keep 15 m hose Branch pipe,
nozzle and spanner.
The piping network will be provided complete with pipelines, valves, hydrants,
fittings and appurtenances.
Interplant pipelines
Industrial water for makeup water supply, firefighting purpose and general plant
usage will be met through the proposed pipeline to be laid from the makeup
water system to these units. Fire water system of the plant will comprise a
pressurized pipe network. Adequate number of yard hydrants as well as indoor
hydrants will be provided on firefighting water network covering the entire plant
area.
Drinking water network will be provided to various consumption points in the
proposed industrial premises with provision for boosting network pressure as
required. Makeup water, fire water and drinking water lines will generally be laid
buried underground.
2.5.5 Manpower Requirement
The requirement of manpower for operation and maintenance of the proposed
pellet plant including the general administration personnel has been estimated at
150. Apart from operational and maintenance (mechanical and electrical), the
C2-9

Chapter-2
Project Description
proposed manpower also includes preventive maintenance and shut down

requirements which are given in Table-2.7.
TABLE-2.7
MAN POWER REQUIREMENT
Sr. No
1
2
3
4
5
Category
Chief executive /GM
Sr. Executive/Jt GM/DGM
ExecutiveI
ExecutiveII
Non-executive
Total
2.6
No. of Person
1
2
15
20
112
150
Project schedule for Approval and Implementation

The pellet plant will be commissioned in a period of 30 months from the date of
receipt of all approvals from statutory authorities.
In order to adhere to the project schedule, it will have to be ensured that
simultaneous work progress is achieved in many fronts, with requisite
mobilization of constructional resources. Selection of construction and erection
agencies, mobilization of requisite resources of men, materials and construction
machinery as well as construction and erection expertise on modern and advance
trends, will be essential to complete the project on time. It will also be necessary
to ensure timely availability of site infrastructure like construction and drinking
water, electric power, site amenities for the workers, sewerage and sanitation
facilities, etc. during the execution period at site.
2.7
Process Technology
The main process stages for production of pellets from raw materials are as
follows:
Raw material preparation;
Formation of green balls; and
Induration of green balls.
Raw Material Preparation
The raw materials for pellet production are iron ore fines, flux materials, binders
and solid fuel like coke breeze. To obtain green balls with the required strength,
fineness of the raw materials must be ensured, which is determined by laboratory
tests.
Characteristics of ore fines govern the degree of fineness and it has been
observed that under Indian condition, grinding of ore to size 6080% passing
through 325 mesh (0.044 mm) is necessary for production of high strength
green pellets. In this project we are receiving the beneficiated iron ore
C2-10

Chapter-2
Project Description
concentrate ( 325#, 80%) from the proposed iron ore beneficiation facility at
Bacheli in the form of slurry through slurry pipelines inside the pellet plant.
Dewatering of iron ore slurry shall be carried out to obtain filter cake. Vacuum
disc filters, ceramic filters and pressure filters are generally used for filtration.
However, for this project pressure filters have been adopted in view of their
efficiency even with high Alumina content as is prevalent in Indian iron ores.
Coarse additive grinding
to (200 mesh, 80 %) by suitable grinding in this unit, coarse additives namely,
limestone, bentonite and coke breeze are ground to required fineness in vertical
roller mill on time sharing basis. Roller mill is complete with mill feed hopper,
cyclone, bag filter, hot gas generator, circulation fan, surge hopper and transport
vessel. Magnetic separator is provided before each roller mill. Ground material
from roller mill is carried to respective ground material storage bins in balling unit
by pneumatic conveying.
Binder and Additives
Bentonite is the most common binder used for iron ore pellet production and has
been considered for this project. Selection of flux materials Limestone shall be
envisaged as the fluxing material which shall be available from Chitapur
PotnarBaranji, Deorapal areas of Jagdalpur Tehsil in Bastar district of
Chhattisgarh state.
Formation of Green Balls
The ground iron ore fines/ concentrates along with additives and binder are
converted to green pellets after thorough mixing. The degree of fineness of input
materials, critical amount of water, amount of binder in the mix etc. are most
important for production of green pellets with adequate compression strength and
size. The strength of green pellets results predominantly from capillary force
caused by wetting with water and mechanical consolidation, effected by rolling
action. The critical amount of water varies from 8 to 13% depending upon the
nature of feed material.
The types of equipment used in commercial plants for production of green pellets
are drum, disc and cone pelletisers. However majority of Pellet plants worldwide,
use either drum pelletiser or disc pelletiser. In this project, disc pelletiser was
selected for production of green balls.
Disc Pelletiser
Today, even though adopted at a much later date than drum pelletisers, disc
pelletiser covers a considerable portion of world pellet production. The disc
pelletiser consists of a concentrically rotating inclined disc composed by a circular
plain bottom area with peripheral skirt. To ensure sufficient frictional resistance
C2-11

Chapter-2
Project Description
and a good lifting effect for the pellet feed, a moist ore bed of about 310 cm
thickness is layered on the bottom and is controlled by scrapers. Different
scrapper designs have been developed such as stationary and oscillating or
rotating spirals. Attempts have been made to utilise a maximum part of the disc
area for green ball formation and 90% of bottom area utilisation for green ball
formation have been achieved after extensive research and development. Since
during ball formation a classification occurs up to the discharge of pellet of
desired size, the quantity of necessary pellet feed corresponds to the amount of
pellets discharged. If nevertheless, small amount of undersize develop, which
mostly occurs during transportation, these are separated by roller screen and
recycled. The size of the ball in a disc pelletiser is easily controlled by adjusting
the moisture content of raw feed, angle of inclination of disc, rotational speed of
disc, etc.
Induration of Green Balls
The green pellets of desired size are subjected to thermal treatment viz. drying,
preheating, firing and cooling; during which the pellets attain adequate strength
to withstand handling, transportation and charging into furnace besides increased
porosity, reducibility and reduction strength, etc. The major indurating processes
developed for thermal treatment of green pellets are as follows:
Shaft furnace;
Graterotary hearthshaft furnace;
Annular furnace;
Circular indurating furnace;
Travelling grate; and
Gratekiln cooler.
However, majority of the pellet plants worldwide use either travelling grate or
grate kiln cooler process. In this project, travelling grate process was selected
for induration of green balls.
Travelling Grate Process
The Travelling grate machine used for induration of green pellets resembles the
wellknown sintering machine of Dwight Lloyd design. The machine consists of
three main parts:
The central part is movable and consists of pellets, composed of a frame and
a supporting structure into which grate bars are inserted. The pallets are
connected by means of sliding seal bars with the wind boxes in a gas tight
manner;
The bottom part is composed of the stationary wind boxes connected with gas
mains and the moving grate; and
The upper part comprises the heat energy and air supply system in a
stationary hood above the grate.
C2-12

Chapter-2
Project Description
The system serves to circulate the necessary drying, heating, firing and cooling
gases through the moving pellet bed. Important process equipment is the fan
with which the process gases are moved through the charge. The entire thermal
treatment is achieved during one passage of pallets on the indurating machine.
Thus no transfer of green pellets from preheating to firing is required as in the
case of Grate Kiln. To protect the grate bars from thermal shocks, hearth and side
layers of indurated pellets are used. A number of process developers have
designed the travelling grate process. However, most of the Travelling grate type
commercial plants are either designed by M/s Lurgi or M/s Arthur G. Mckee and
Co. and the share of Lurgi designed plants are more.
The advantages of travelling grate induration process are production of pellet
from different types of iron ore fines, uniform quality of pellets, possibility of use
of different types of fuels of relatively low specific heat consumption, production
of large pellet quantities in one machine, etc. As a result, this process is one of
the most popular processes for production of pellets. As the machine features a
sophisticated system of gas recirculation within the individual zones, a high
precision control and high degree of automation have also been developed for
most economic operation of the travelling grate machines. In India all the existing
operating pellet plants are equipped with travelling grate process.
2.7.1 Operating Regime, Material Balance and Quality of Raw Materials & Pellets
Operating Regime
The proposed pellet plant will be operating on the basis of three shifts a day and
300 days in a year after taking into consideration the shutdowns required for the
planned maintenance and unscheduled breakdowns. The capital repairs for pellet
plant are envisaged as 15 days in a year.
Quality of Input Raw material
The quality of input raw materials used for pellet production is furnished below in
Table-2.8.
TABLE-2.8
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF RAW MATERIALS
Raw materials
Fe (t), %
Iron ore concentrate

65.65
Coke breeze (FC@85%)
1.4
Bentonite
6.7
Limestone
Dolomite
SiO2, %
Al2O3, %
CaO, %
MgO,%
2.20
8.9
46
9.25
3
1.80
4.33
26
1.5
-
0.14
1.16
3.0
47
29
0.08
0.38
3.0
1.25
20.55
LOI,
%
1.99
80
12
40
43.99
Material Balance
The material balance for production of 2.0 MTPA pellets is given in Table-2.9 and
hourly energy balance for the 2.0 MTPA pellet plant is given in Table-2.10 and
C2-13

Chapter-2
Project Description
the process flow sheet along with mass balance and the energy balance flow
sheet are shown in Figure-2.3 and Figure-2.4.
TABLE-2.9
MATERIAL BALANCE (NET AND DRY)
Material
Iron ore
concentrate
Bentonite
Input
TPH
278.61
TPA
2006000
%
67.75
Material
Pellets
1.94
14000
0.47
590420
82.00
20.00
36000
40000
590420
265690
2952110
1.2
1.35
20.00
9.00
100
Side &
Hearth
layer
Losses
3616900
50.23
12.25
Total
2952110
410.02
100
Coke breeze
5.00
Limestone/Dolomite
5.56
Side & Hearth layer
82.00
Water
36.90
Total
410.02
Output
TPA
TPH
2000000
277.78
%
67.75
TABLE-2.10
HOURLY ENERGY BALANCE
Material
Coke
Fuel oil
ENERGY INPUT
Calorific value
Consumption
Kcal/Kg
Factor
Hourly
Consumption
5263.16
5397.94
5923
10000
85.71%
100.00%
Total
Material
Product pellet
Exhaust from stack
Water & LOI
ENERGY OUTPUT
Specific heat
Temp Diff (dt)
Kcal/Kg
K
K
3,07,787.01
0.15
65
19,34,764.54
0.3
145
40749.13
0.3
55
Total Output
Hourly Output
Specific Energy
(m.Cp.dt)
Kcal/t
267,18,964.74
539,79,441.79
806,98,406.53
Percentage
of Heat
Specific Energy
(m.Cp.dt)
Kcal/t
30,00,923.36
570,26,685.13
206,70,798.03
806,98,406.53
Percentage
of Heat
33.11%
66.89%
100.00%
3.72%
70.67%
25.61%
100.00%
Quality of Pellets
Based on the raw material analyses, the calculated chemical composition of BF
grade pellets is furnished in Table-2.11.
TABLE-2.11
QUALITY OF PELLETS (ESTIMATED)
Constituents
Fe (t)
SiO2
Al2O3
CaO
MgO
Basicity (CaO / SiO2)
Value (%)
65.62
2.85
2.07
1.10
0.13
0.38
C2-14

Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.3
MASS BALANCE FLOW SHEET OF THE PROPOSED PELLET PLANT
C2-15

Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.4
ENERGY BALANCE FLOW SHEET OF THE PROPOSED PELLET PLANT
C2-16

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.8
Pellet Plant Facilities

BF grade pellets will be produced in the proposed 2.0 MTPA pellet plant. The
pellet plant proper based on straight grate technology shall comprise the
following major technological units:
Covered ground storage unit for coarse additives (limestone, Dolomite, coke
breeze and bentonite);
Coarse additive storage bins & grinding;
Slurry storage tank;
Filtering, ground material storage, mixing & balling;
Induration unit including process gas flow;
Pellet screening;
Emergency filter cake & finished pellet stock piles; and
Belt conveyors, junction houses & interconnecting galleries.
Apart from the above major units, all auxiliary facilities like material handling,
water supply system, compressed air, fuel, ventilation & airconditioning, plant
dedusting, repair shop, nonfactory buildings, electrics, instrumentation,
automation and telecommunication facilities etc. have also been envisaged.
Adequate hoisting facilities have been provided in all the units for ease of
maintenance and operation.
2.8.1 Covered Ground Storage Unit for Coarse Additives

The additives (limestone, bentonite and coke breeze) will be received by truck
and unloaded manually in the covered shed and stocked by a pay loader in three
separate stock piles one each for limestone, coke breeze and bentonite. The
ground storage capacity of different materials is given below.
Material
Limestone/Dolomite (040 mm)
Coke breeze (040 mm)
Bentonite (050mm)
Total Qty (TPA)

(net & dry)
40,000
36,000
14,000
No. of Days of Storage

(Approx.)
15
15
15
2.8.2 Additive
Additives from respective stock piles will be unloaded in three numbers of over
ground hoppers with the help of pay loader. A common collecting conveyor below
the over ground hoppers will convey all the coarse additive materials to the
coarse additive storage bins.
2.8.3 Coarse Additive Storage Bins & Grinding
to (200 mesh, 80 %) by suitable grinding in this unit. Additives shall be stored in
separate bins of 160 m3 effective volume each. The storage capacity shall be as
follows:
C2-17

Chapter-2
Project Description
Sr. No
Material
1
Coke breeze
2
Limestone/Dolomite
3
Bentonite
Eff. Volume of bin,m3

160
160
160
Storage capacity, ton

128
240
160
Coke breeze shall be fed from the storage bin to one vertical roller mill by means
of belt weigh feeder & feed hopper. Limestone/Dolomite & bentonite shall be fed
from the respective storage bins to another vertical roller mill by means of belt
weigh feeders & feed hopper on time sharing basis for grinding. Roller mill shall
be complete with mill feed hopper, cyclone, bag filter, hot gas generator,
circulation fan, surge hopper and transport vessel. Magnetic separator shall be
provided before each roller mill. Ground material from this unit shall be carried to
respective ground material storage bins in balling unit by pneumatic conveying.
2.8.4 Slurry Storage Tanks
Iron ore concentrate (-325 mesh, 80%) will be received, in the form of slurry at
68% solids concentration by weight, in the slurry storage tank of pellet plant
complex through slurry pipeline from iron ore beneficiation plant at Bacheli,
NMDC. One slurry storage steel tank has been envisaged for storage of slurry and
to take care of any contingency during shutdowns. The tank is having 20 m dia
and 15m height and shall be provided with agitators. This will ensure storage for
minimum one day.
A slurry pump house shall be constructed near the slurry storage tank having two
slurry pumps of adequate capacity. Slurry is pumped from slurry storage tanks
and fed to individual pressure filters in the filtration unit.
2.8.5 Filtering, Ground Material Storage, Mixing & Balling
Slurry will be pumped to individual pressure filters by separate slurry pumps.
Dewatering of iron ore slurry shall be carried out in three filter presses (2w +
1std. by) located in this building. The slurry distributor shall distribute iron ore
slurry to these filter presses.
Pressure filters are recessed plate membrane filters in which the chambers lie
horizontally. Individual filter plates have either singlesided filtration areas or
doublesided filtration area depending on the filter model. Plates are stacked
vertically to give the required total filtration area. Filter capacity can be expanded
by adding plates.
Many types of filter cloth are available for different applications. The plate pack is
opened and closed by hydraulic cylinders. In the closed position the plates form
sealed chambers with the filter cloth in between. The slurry to be dewatered is
pumped into all chambers simultaneously through the distribution manifold and
piping. After a cake has formed, the plate pack is opened and the cloth is driven
forward, discharging the cakes completely. Simultaneously, the cloth leaving the
plate pack passes through high pressure water sprays that maintain cloth
permeability and extend cloth life. Pressure filters are fully automatic, with
respect to both mechanical operation and process optimisation. All operations are
C2-18

Chapter-2
Project Description
controlled by the filters programmable logic controller that also actuates ancillary
equipment such as pumps and conveyors.
The filtrate water from filters shall be collected and after cleaning the water is
recycled to pellet plant for further use. Filter cake discharged from filter presses
shall be collected by a common belt conveyor and transported to two filter cake
bins of approximate volume 2x600m3 through reversible conveyor above bins.
The capacity of each filter cake bin being approximately 1300 tons.
In case of emergency, facility of diversion arrangement for filter cake coming out
from filter presses, stacking on the ground, reclaiming and then loading to belt
conveyor for onward transportation to filter cake bins shall also be provided.
Ground limestone, coke breeze and bentonite from additive grinding unit shall be
transported pneumatically to this unit and stored in three respective ground
material storage bins of volume 160m3. One ESP dust bin of approximate volume
50m3 shall also be envisaged in this unit. ESP dust shall be pneumatically
transported to this bin from ESPs.
Belt weigh feeders shall be mounted at outlet of filter cake bins and loss in weigh
feeder at outlet of ground material bins & ESP dust bin. Materials discharged from
these bins shall be transported to one High intensity mixer by belt conveyor for
mixing. Belt weigh scales shall be installed on conveyors before and after the
mixer. The HI mixer (approximately 350 tph capacity) shall be provided for
thorough mixing of ground materials.
The mixed material from the mixer shall be transported by a series of belt
conveyors to respective mixed material bins over four balling discs (3w + 1std.
by) in balling area. Over and under size green balls rejects from the roller screen
(at the feed end of indurating machine) will be recirculated to process along with
fresh mix feed through mix material bins and balling discs.
The mixed material shall be distributed to four (4) mixed material bins with an
appropriate storage capacity of 40m3 each (capacity ~80 t), installed directly
above the corresponding balling discs. All the bins shall be load cell mounted. A
horizontal conveyor equipped with pneumatically operated ploughs will distribute
the mixed materials into the mixed material bins. Any spillage passing under
these ploughs will be discharged at the head end of the conveyor and stored in
emergency stockpiles or recirculated through mix material route. Belt weigh
feeders will be provided at the outlet of each bin to draw out required quantity of
material.
The mixed material will be continuously discharged from these bins and fed to
four 7.5 m diameter balling discs by means of fluffers. The fluffers have two
functions, namely, the disintegration of any compacted material as well as the
distribution of the mixed material on the balling discs. Controlled quantity of
water shall be added to the balling discs to adjust the final moisture content of
the green balls.
C2-19

Chapter-2
Project Description
The inclination and the rpm of the discs shall be variable. Optimum inclination
(approx. 45 to 50 deg) is determined during startup depending upon the mixed
material properties, desired green ball diameter and feed rate. It shall be possible
to regulate the disc rpm from 5 to 12 during operation.
The belt conveyor below each balling discs transfer the green balls to a common
green balls collecting conveyor which in turn feeds green balls to a reciprocating
conveyor. The reciprocating conveyor feeds the material to wide belt conveyor to
ensure smooth handling of the green balls. A belt weigh scale is installed on this
belt for weighing the total amount of green balls discharged from the balling
discs, which is one of the parameters for the indurating machine speed control.
2.8.6 Induration
For distributing the green balls from the balling unit smoothly and evenly onto the
indurating machine, a reciprocating conveyor will be installed which feeds the
green balls uniformly onto a 3.0 m wide belt conveyor. The 3.0 m wide belt
conveyor, in turn, discharges the green balls onto a double deck roller screen
consisting of an upper and a lower deck of stainless steel rollers; the rollers on
each deck being driven through a chain by a variable speed drive/individually
driven rollers.
Oversize and undersize green pellets will be recycled by belt conveyors back to
the mixed material stream between the mixer and the discs. The required green
balls, in the size range of 9 mm to 16 mm will be fed to the indurating machine
for heat hardening. Green balls (green pellets) will be indurated on a travelling
grate having reaction area of 312 m2 (approximately 3.0 m wide and 118 m
long). The travelling grate indurating machine consists of an endless chain of
pallet cars moving on tracks. The height of the green balls on the grate is an
important factor in determining the productivity of the machine. Accordingly, the
bed height of the indurating machine is envisaged to be 420 mm. One of the
process prerequisites for obtaining a uniform product quality is a uniform bed
height which is ensured by automatic control of the grate speed as a function of
the green pellets feed rate by a series of ultrasonic level sensors.
A grate bar cleaning device is located near the lowering station on the return
track of the travelling grate. The pallets and the grate bars shall be of special and
well proven design for the induration process enabling long service life with low
maintenance. To avoid thermal shocks to grate bars, burnt pellets are charged
over a layer of indurated pellets, called hearth layer. Pallet sidewalls (both sides)
are also protected from excessive heat, with indurated pellets called side layers.
A storage bin of adequate capacity for hearth & side layers having three outlet
chutes is provided at the feed end of the travelling grate. The height of the hearth
layer on the pallets can be adjusted by a motor driven gate.
The fluctuation in bed height can be sensed instantly by using ultrasonic level
measurement system. As soon as it senses the fluctuation, the hearth layer gate
can be opened immediately to restore the bed levels to normal height with
C2-20

Chapter-2
Project Description
minimum time delay and thus protects the pallet cars and grate bars from
overheating.
The three feed components are charged onto the pallet cars in the following
order.
First, hearth layer is fed onto the indurating machine followed by simultaneous
feeding of side layers (both sides) and green balls onto the pallet car that has
already been loaded with hearth layer earlier.
Green pellets are then subjected to the following different thermal zones during
the process of induration on travelling grate machine:
Up draught drying Zone (UDDZ);
Downdraught drying Zone (DDDZ);
Preheating Zone;
Firing (Induration) & After firing Zone;
First cooling zone; and
Second cooling zone.
After drying of green pellets in the updraught and downdraught drying zones,
the dried pellets will be preheated to a progressively higher temperature to
initiate oxidation and sulphur burning with fuel (coal) present in the green pellets.
The dried pellets will then be fired at approx. 1300C to provide the
recrystallization and slag bonding which will impart adequate strength to the
pellets. The firing in carried out in this indurating zone where specially designed
fuel oil burner will be installed in the hood, and the flame length, high
temperature position and temperature will be adjusted by regulating burner
position and airfuel oil ratio. The temperature of pellet varies from 12501300C.
An unfired short section designated as after firing allows the heat front to
completely penetrate into the bottom of the bed thereby eliminating sudden
quenching of pellets and consequent deterioration of pellet properties.
Cooling of indurated pellets shall be accomplished by updraughting ambient air,
supplied by a cooling air fan, through the pellet bed. The cooled pellets will leave
the indurating machine at 100C or less.
2.8.7 Process Gas Flow
The induration process is characterized by maximum recovery of heat from the
cooling zones as well as firing zone of the travelling grate machine. This calls for
recirculation of hot gases through ducts to different process zones using five fans.
A total of five process fans have been envisaged and are as follows:
Cooling air fan;
Updraft drying fan;
Wind box recuperation fan;
Hood exhaust fan; and
Wind box exhaust fan.
C2-21

Chapter-2
Project Description
For the purpose of recovery of heat, the travelling grate will be provided with a
refractorylined hood above the machine all along the length. Seal boxes are used
in different zones to seal this indurating hood against the moving pallets to avert
heat loss. The hood will be provided with watercooled side and transverse lintels.
The following is a brief account of the process gas flow:
The cooling air, supplied by the cooling air fan, picks up heat from the hot
indurated pellet bed in the first and second cooling zones. The heated air is
recycled to the process as a heat carrier.
2.8.8 Recirculation from Cooling Zone II to Updraught Drying Zone
Hot air from the second cooling zone (UCZ II) will be blown by the updraught
drying fan and forced through a duct into the wind boxes of the updraft drying
zone of the grate.
In order to stabilize the temperature of this hot air for optimum green pellets
drying, ambient air may be sucked in ahead of the updraught drying fan through
a bleeding. The air will be forced through the green pellets bed after which it is
cleaned in an ESP, collected by the hood exhaust fan and discharged into the
atmosphere through the common waste gas stack.
Excess air not required for updraught drying and causing excessive pressure in
the wind boxes of the Updraught drying zone is bypassed via a bleedoff gas
duct.
2.8.9 Recirculation from Preheating/ Firing zone to Down Draught Drying Zone
The hot process gas from the firing and partly from the after firing zones serve as
the drying gases in the down draught drying zone of the travelling grate. They
are sucked through the pellet bed in the firing zone by the wind box recuperation
fan and then forced via gas duct into the hood above the downdraft drying zone.
In order to protect the wind box recuperation fan from overheating, bleedin for
ambient air, equipped with control dampers are provided at the suction side of
the fan.
The hot air passing through the down draught drying zone will be collected by the
wind box exhaust fan. The wind boxes of the down draught drying zone and the
preheating zone are all connected to the wind box exhaust fan. Clean air (cleaned
by ESPs) from this stream will be exhausted to the atmosphere through common
waste gas stack.
2.8.10 Recirculation from Cooling zone I to Preheating/ Firing/ after firing zone
In the first cooling zone, hot air leaving the top of the bed containing a large
quantity of sensible heat will be ducted through a direct recuperation header, to
the sidewall mounted gas burners of the preheating and firing zones of the
indurating machine.
C2-22

Chapter-2
Project Description
The air will be heated in the chamber according to a temperature profile

controlled by the operator. The arrangement and sizing of the burners ensures a
uniform hot gas temperature over the width of the pellet bed. Since the burners
are divided into several control zones, an optimum temperature profile can be
achieved, thus permitting an optimum heat treatment of the pellets. The
temperatures in the individual zones of the preheating and firing are measured
with thermocouples for automatic control of gas flow to the individual zones.
2.8.11 Pellet Screening
The fired pellets discharged from the bin (load cell mounted) at discharge of
indurating machine shall be conveyed to Pellet screening unit. Arrangement shall
be made in Pellet screening unit with two nos. two way chutes for (i) bypass of
screen with required amount to hearth layer route (ii) separate out required
quantity of pellet for feeding to hearth layer route prior to feeding screen based
on the feedback of weigh scale mounted on hearth layer conveyor.
The screen shall have three aperture, () 5mm, 12.5mm and 18mm to separate
out <5mm, 512.5mm and 12.518mm and (+) 18mm size fraction of finished
pellets. The fraction 12.518mm shall be used as hearth layer whereas (+) 5mm
fraction (including excess of hearth layer, 12.518mm) shall be sent to product
route. Pellet fines (5mm fraction) shall be stored on ground for onward
transportation by truck to raw material handling yard for use in sinter plant.
2.8.12 Emergency Filter Cake, Emergency pellet stockpile & Finished Pellet Stock Pile
Product from pellet screening unit shall be transported to finished pellet stock pile
at raw material storage yard by series of belt conveyors. The storage duration of
finished pellets shall be 30 days. The finished pellets storage unit shall be
provided with stackercumreclaimer facility for pellet handling. In addition,
emergency finished pellet ground stock piles shall also be envisaged. One covered
shed for emergency filter cake storage shall be provided in filtration area to store
filter cake in case of any emergency.
2.8.13 Belt Conveyors, Junction Houses & Interconnecting Galleries
Various belt conveyors, interconnecting structural galleries and junction houses
shall be envisaged as per the technological layout of pellet plant.
The equipment flow sheet of the proposed pellet plant is shown in Figure-2.5.
C2-23

Chapter-2
Project Description
FIGURE-2.5
EQUIPMENT FLOW SHEET OF THE PROPOSED PELLET PLANT
C2-24

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.9
Service Facilities
2.9.1 Civil works

The Civil design and construction work shall be carried out as per relevant Indian
standards. The following concrete grades will be adopted for RCC works.
M25
M20
RCC works for all foundations/substructures, superstructure elements

of all buildings, equipment foundations etc.
For drains, minor structure, like pits, etc.
For all RCC work, reinforcement bars has generally been considered to be of high
strength deformed bars conforming to IS: 17861985.
2.9.2 Steel Structures
The design of steel structures shall be as per IS: 8001984 / 2007. Rolled steel
plates shall be as per IS: 2062 latest (Gr. A or B).
Fabrication of all structural steel works shall be in accordance with IS: 8001984.
Fabricated structures shall confirm to tolerance as specified in IS: 72151974.
The method of construction, selection of construction materials, fabrication,
erection and painting of structures shall also conform to relevant Indian
Standards.
2.9.3 Fuel oil facilities
Low sulphur heavy stock (LSHS)/Furnace oil fuel has been envisaged as fuel for
the proposed pellet plant. However, light diesel oil (LDO) shall also be required
for start-up and flame stabilization of the indurating furnace and flushing of the
LSHS oil pipelines during shut down / maintenance and fresh campaigns.
The estimated LSHS requirement will
consumption shall be 145KL (approx.).
be
around
43,517
KL/yr
&
daily
To meet the storage requirement, two storage tanks of 460KL capacity each and
one LDO storage tank of 50KL capacity along with handling facilities shall be
provided.
Oil will be received at site by road tankers and unloaded into the storage tanks by
necessary unloading facilities. Two positive displacement pumps (1W+1S) will be
installed for delivery of LSHS to the consuming units.
2.9.4 Compressed air facilities & steam requirement
A centralized compressed air station has been envisaged to meet the industrial /
instrument quality compressed air. Various facilities envisaged in the compressed
air station are as follows:
C2-25

Chapter-2
Project Description
3 x 12 Nm3/min (2W+1S) Screw Compressors. Discharge pressure of each

compressor is 9 kg/cm2(g);
3 x 12 Nm3/min (2W+1S) Refrigerant Type Air Drying Units;
2 x 14.5 Nm3/min (1W+1S) Reciprocating Compressors. Discharge pressure
of each compressor is 13 kg/cm2(g); and
2 x 14.5 Nm3/min (1W+1S) Refrigerant Type Air Drying Units.
The steam requirement (tracing of LSHS storage tanks & pipelines) is envisaged
to be met through steam pipeline drawn from NISP, Nagarnar. Adequate facilities
to supply steam at 5.5 kg/cm2 with an outlet temperature of 180oC shall have to
be provided.
2.9.5 Water supply facilities
The water requirement for the proposed pellet plant will be mostly for cooling of
plant and equipment with a small part of the requirement being for direct process
needs and drinking & other needs such as dust suppression etc.
To conserve the fresh water requirement the major water consumption for the
recirculation circuits have been adopted to meet the various cooling water needs.
The clarified filtrate water received directly from slurry filtration plant with
required treatment will be stored and supplied to various units of pellet plant.
Fresh industrial makeup water and drinking water is envisaged to be received
from makeup & drinking water system of 3 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant Project,
NMDC, Nagarnar for further distribution as per requirement.
2.9.6 Process gas & Plant dedusting
The measures to control the air pollution will ensure the ambient air quality
standards as laid down by Ministry of Environment & Forests (MO&F) as revised in
November 2009.
Various dust collection equipment such as cyclone separators, wet scrubber,
fabric bag filters, electro static precipitator (ESP), etc. will be adopted to remove
particulate matter from gas streams. The dust laden air will be sucked from
different dust generating points by means of suction hoods, ducting network and
cleaned in the ESP to let out clean air to atmosphere through stack of required
height.
In order to meet the statutory GLC limits for SO2 and NOx, required chimney
heights will be provided for proper dispersion.
Bag filters/ Scrubber type dust extraction system is envisaged for hot pellet
conveying line. The fugitive dust generated is sucked through ducting network &
bag filter by centralized DE fan. Dust collecting silo provide below the hopper. At
regular interval dust shall be disposed by trucks.
C2-26

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.9.7 Ventilation and airconditioning

Buildings & shops will generally be provided with natural ventilation. Mechanical
ventilation will be provided for premises where adequate natural ventilation
cannot be provided.
Water cooled package air conditioner will be provided for control rooms, PLC
Room & Automation Rooms. Window air conditioners / Split air conditioners shall
be envisaged in office and incharge rooms.
2.9.8 Residential Area
The area is well connected with Jagdalpur, where NMDC will provide HRA for the
employees. No additional township is envisaged.
2.9.10 Green Belt
About 33% of the area will be reserved for green belt. The area includes road side
plantation, plantation near infrastructure, etc.
2.9.11 Social Infrastructure
quarters, Community hall and shops for meeting the requirement of employees of
NMDC Iron and Steel Plant & Pellet plant and local population. NMDC is already
implementing CSR works in the areas of education, health, housing, transport,
civic utilities in nearby areas for meeting the social infrastructure demand.
2.9.12 Connectivity (Traffic & Transportation Road/Rail/Metro/Water ways)
The proposed site for 2.0 MTPA pellet plant is located near Nagarnar Village in
Bastar district of Chhattisgarh. The site is at about 16 km in NorthEast direction
from Jagadalpur town. The proposed pellet plant site is located on the western
side of the proposed 3 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant, Nagarnar of NMDC. Amaguda
railway station is located at about 3 km from the proposed site in its SSW
direction. The location map of the site is shown in the drawing enclosed. Madpal,
Nagarnar, Manganpur, Ambaguda, Dhanpunji villages are existing near the
proposed site.
2.10
Electrics, Automation & Illumination

The maximum demand for the pellet plant is estimated at 20.58 MVA. The power
required for the proposed facilities is envisaged to be received at 33kV from
220/33kV switchboard of MRS GIS based of NISP.
For further Power Distribution, Power shall be distributed through 33kV and 6.6kV
switchboards having two power transformers, which will be located at Pellet plant
Nagarnar. The Primary Power distribution shall be stepped down from 33kV to
6.6kV by 33/6.6 kV ONAN/ONAF transformers at HT S/Ss. Further 6.6kV power
C2-27

Chapter-2
Project Description
supply shall be brought to the 6.6kV/415V transformers and HT motors located at

plant area through cables. The Secondary Power shall be stepped down from
6.6kV to 415V and shall be fed to the PCCs through 2 nos of 2.0MVA,
6.6/0.415kV. Distribution Transformer for onward distribution to various LT motor
feeders, lighting distribution boards (MLDBs) and Power Distribution Boards
(PDBs). All LT load shall be catered at 415V.
2.10.1 SCADA/Automation
The automation of operations and monitoring of pellet plant shall be achieved
through HMI system by using SCADA from the central control room at Nagarnar.
It shall be possible to operate any motor in Remote mode from the control room
through SCADA. To monitor the status of various drive motors, VDUs shall be
provided in the control room at Pellet plant (Nagarnar).
2.10.2 Illumination
All Electrical premise (Indoor/Outdoor) in the Pellet plant will have suitably rated
lighting transformers, lighting distribution boards, feeder pillars to feed the
lighting circuits. It is proposed to carry out illumination of all electrical facilities
like Pellet Plant, Electrical premises (Indoor/Outdoor) using energy saving light
fittings (CFL/LED).
2.10.3 Earthing System
System as well as equipment earthing are envisaged to be in accordance with the
Code of Practice for Earthing IS 3043 1993 and IEEE80. It shall also comply
with the relevant clauses of Indian Electricity rules.
2.10.4 Telecommunication System
Automatic Telephone Communication system
One electronic private automatic digital telephone (EPBAX) with required lines
and expandable to higher capacity shall be provided to cater the communication.
2.11
Fuel Oil Storage and Handling System
2.11.1 General
LSHS/Furnace oil shall be used as fuel for the proposed pellet plant. However,
LDO shall be required during startup operation of the pellet plant and flushing of
LSHS piping network before every shut down.
The estimated LSHS requirement will be around 43,517 kl/yr & daily consumption
shall be 142 kl (approx.). To meet these requirements, 2 nos. 460 kl capacity
each LSHS storage tanks and 1 no. 50 kl capacity LDO storage tank along with
handling facilities will be required. Oil shall be supplied by pumping from central
storage tanks to day storage tank of pellet plant and from day storage tank to the
consuming points.
C2-28

Chapter-2
Project Description
2.11.2 Proposed Facilities

For storage of fuel oil, it has been envisaged to provide 2 nos. fabricated
cylindrical vertical mild steel tanks each of capacity 460 kl. The tanks will be
designed as per IS: 8031976. Each tank will be provided with all standard
accessories and fittings, i.e., steam heated floor coil heater, suction heater,
thermal insulation of storage tanks and piping network. The outflow suction
heater will be adequately designed to meet the temperature requirement of LSHS
at desired conditions. For storage of LDO, it has envisaged to provide 1 no. 50 kl
LDO storage tank.
2.11.3 Unloading of oil from road tanker to storage tanks
2 nos. unloading pumps (1 Working+1 Standby) shall be installed for unloading of
LSHS/furnace oil from road tankers to storage tanks. The capacity of unloading
pump shall be 20 m3/hr. Similarly, for unloading of LDO from road tankers to
storage tank, 2 nos. (1 Working + 1 Standby) pumps, each of 10 m3/hr capacity,
shall be installed.
2.11.4 Fuel oil Supply to the consuming units
2 nos. delivery pumps (1 Working +1 Standby) each of 8.5 m 3/hr capacity shall
be required for supply of LSHS/furnace from central storage tanks to the day
storage tanks of the pellet plant.
The entire LSHS/fuel oil delivery system including pumps, pipelines & valves will
be electrically / steam heat traced & lagged with mineral wool blanket and
aluminium cladding.
Duplex filters at suction side of each unloading pumps & delivery pumps to day
storage tanks will be provided.
Adequate provision will be made in the design of piping system which will be laid
overhead and supported on shop columns.
2.12
Sources of Pollutants
2.12.1 Air pollution

Air within the process area gets polluted with gases, fumes and dust particles
emanating from the processes and raw material storage, handling and transfer
points of conveying and handling equipment if air pollutants emissions are not
controlled. The air pollutants are mainly dust and gases like sulphur dioxide,
carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxide, etc.
2.12.2 Water pollution
C2-29

Chapter-2
Project Description
Material conditioning and transportation i.e. for slurring, quenching, mill scale
removal, rinsing, etc;
Water pollution from the industry mainly comprises inorganic solids, either in
suspension or in solution, like oil, grease, etc.
2.12.3 Noise pollution
The noise generation sources from the proposed plant include pump houses,
compressed air station, ID fans, material handling systems, DG sets which will be
used during emergency conditions, etc. The noise levels generated will be in the
range of 75 - 90 dBA at 1m from source.
2.13
Control Measures
2.13.1 Air pollution

There may be some increase in levels of SO2, NOx, PM10, PM2.5 & CO in ambient
air. However suitable air pollution control systems like ESP/Bag flters/scrubber
type dust extraction systems will be provided to control the pollution within
permissible limits. The chimney heights will be provided as per CPCB norms to
ensure ground level concentration (GLC) of SO2 and NOX within permissible limits.
ESP dust shall be recirculated in the process to the maximum extent feasible.
2.13.2 Water pollution
Recirculating water in the process whereby the discharge volume is brought to
minimum;
Removal of oil and grease from the contaminated water by means of oil traps
and skimming devices;
2.13.3 Noise pollution
Various measures proposed to reduce the noise pollution include reduction of
noise at source, provision of acoustic lagging for the equipment and suction side
silencers, Selection of low noise equipment, isolation of noisy equipment from
C2-30

Chapter-2
Project Description
working personnel. In some areas where due to technological process, it is not

feasible to bring down the noise level within acceptable limits, personnel working
in these areas will be provided with noise reduction aid such as ear muffler, ear
plug and also the duration of exposure of the personnel will be limited as per the
norms.
2.13.4 Solid waste management
Pellet plant generates solid wastes, maximum of which are non-hazardous such
as dry tailing and from the bag filters. These waste materials will be reused / reutilized in the plant process.
C2-31

Chapter-3
3.0
BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS
3.1
Introduction
Baseline data generation forms a part of the Environmental Impact Assessment
study, which helps to evaluate the predicted impacts on the various
environmental attributes in the study area by using scientifically developed and
widely accepted environmental impact assessment methodologies. This further
helps in preparing an Environment Management Plan (EMP) outlining the
measures for improving the environmental quality and scope for future
expansions for environmentally sustainable development. The baseline
environmental study also helps to identify the critical environmental attributes,
which are required to be monitored after implementation of the project.
This chapter illustrates the description of the existing environmental status of the
study area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The existing
environmental setting is considered to adjudge the baseline conditions which are
described with respect to climate, atmospheric conditions, water quality, soil
quality, ecology, socio-economic profile, landuse etc.
The present report incorporates the data generated by Vimta Labs during the
period 1st March 2015 to 31st May 2015 representing pre monsoon season and
secondary data collected from various government, semi-government and public
sector organizations.
3.2
Geology and Hydrogeology
3.2.1 Physiography
Physiographically, the area is part of Bastar Plateau. The study are can be divided
into two - 1) with northwest to south having moderately undulating topography
and low ridges with Kakadapasa Forest in the west and Kanger Reserved Forest in
the south and 2) north to southeast with dominating plateau and flood plain.
Indravati river flowing northeast-west in the study area is the major river. Jaura
Nadi running southeast-north joins Indravati River at Ghata Kusum and Bhaskel
River running north-south joins Indravati River near Balgaon.
The highest elevation of 600 m above mean sea level is observed in the
southeastern part of the study area on Majur Dongri near Machkot. Bhalu Dongari
in Kakadapasa Reserved Forest rises to an elevation of 593 m above mean sea
level towards northwest of the proposed project area at a distance of 4.8 km.
Other forest areas in the study area are Ulnav RF in the northwest at 8.7 km and
Malchema RF in the southeast at 9.5 km.
Lowest elevations are observed in the flood plain near Balputi in the northeast
(533 m amsl) and in Kanger Reserved Forest (512 m amsl) just outside study
area towards south. The general slope of the land is towards northwest and
south.
C3-1

Chapter-3
The topography of the proposed project area is plateau/plain with elevation

ranging from 546 m (plant site) to 563 m (township). The general slope in the
proposed project area is towards northwest and south.
3.2.2 Drainage
According to Watershed Atlas of India, the study area forms part of watershed no
INVT010 in Indravati Sub-basin of Godavari River Basin.
The Godavari is the second longest river in India after the river Ganga. It starts in
Maharashtra near Nasik and flows for 1,465 km into the Bay of Bengal via the
states of Telangana and Andhra Pradesh. It forms one of the largest river basins
in India.
Indravati is the major river in the present study area. Indravati is a tributary of
the Godavari river, in Central India. It originates from the Eastern Ghats of
Dnadakaranya range in Kalahandi district, Odisha and flows through Nabarangpur
district, Odisha in westerly direction; enters into Jagdalpur in Chhattisgarh state.
It further traverses in the westerly direction and thereafter in southern direction
before finally meeting Godavari river at the border of Maharashtra. The river
flows for 535 km and has a drainage area of 41,665 sq km. Most of the river
course is through dense forests of Nabarangpur & Bastar.
Of the number of tributaries of Indravati, Bhaskel river and Jaura Nadi joins
Indravati in the study area. Jaura Nadi running southeast-north joins Indravati
River at Ghata Kusum and Bhaskel River running north-south joins Indravati
River near Balgaon.
The study area is drained by the drainage network of Jaura Nadi, Bhaskel river
and Indravati river. The overall drainage pattern in the area is dendritic in
undulating and forest areas and sub-parallel to parallel in plains. The overall
drainage density in the study area is 0.91 km/sq km. The area has a number of
small to medium ponds spread over the entire study area. Distributory channels
of Kolab Reservoir canal system runs in the eastern part of the study area.
Drainage network in the study area is presented in Figure-3.2.1.
C3-2

Chapter-3
FIGURE3.2.1
DRAINAGE MAP OF THE STUDY AREA
C3-3

Chapter-3
3.2.3 Geology
Regional Geology
Oldest rock unit of this area is the biotite-hornblende bearing tonalitic gneisses of
Archaean age. These are believed to be the oldest granitoid component in Eastern
Indian Craton. They intrude and partially granitise the older Metamorphic Group
of rocks. These tonalitic gneisses occur as numerous rafts and enclaves of varying
size. The Bengpal Group of rocks consists of quartz mica schist, talc - chlorite
schist, anthophyllite schist, banded haematite and magnetite quartzite and
metabasic rocks including amphibolite and crop out over the western and
southern parts.
These occur as lenses and long linear bands within granites, Mica schists consist
of quartz, muscovite, biotite and opaque minerals with minor zircon and sphene.
Primary banding is marked by the parallel orientation of the opaque minerals.
Hornblende rich rocks vary from amphibolites to diorite and consist
predominantly of hornblende, andesinic plagioclase, garnet and a good proportion
of opaque minerals with minor pyroxene.
The Khondalite Group is represented by argillaceous, arenaceous, calcareous and
ferruginous rocks. Garnetiferous sillimanite schists and gneisses occur in the form
of hills and ridges as well as low mounds amidst granite gneisses
Massive Acid and intermediate charnockites constitute the lofty hill ranges. Bluish
grey quartz, feldspar (both k-feldspar and plagioclase), hypersthenes,
hornblende, biotite, garnet and diopside are the most common minerals with
magnetite, apatite, zircon and rutile. Basic Charnockite is of limited extent and
occurs as lenticular bands of variable dimensions conforming with the regional
foliation o the acid charnockites. The basic charnockites consist of hypersthenes,
diopside, plagioclase, hornblende, garnet, spinel and opaque minerals.
The host granite and granite minerals gneisses include foliated, porphyroblastic
and augen bearing types nd consist chiefly of quartz, k-feldspar, plagioclase
(minor), hornblende and biotite with zircon and opaque minerals as accessories.
Microcline occurs as pophyroblasts and augen. Granitic rocks are very sporadic in
occurrence.
Tel granite is a widespread litho-unit in the area. It is mainly grey and pink
hornblende granite. Exposure of typical porphyritic pink hornblende granite is
seen in the Tel river section.
Pockets, bands, lenses and streaks of pegmatite and vein quartz are found at
many places. The aplite consists of quartz, sodic plagioclase, biotite, hornblende,
apatite and iron ores.
Dykes and sills of medium to coarse granite rocks of gabbroic affinity traverse the
granitic country at a few places. The dykes consist of hornblende, augite,
clinoenstatite, plagioclase (labradorite) and minor amounts of quartz and iron
ore.
C3-4

Chapter-3
The basal part of the Chhattisgarh basin is marked by an erosional unconformity.

Pebbles of conglomerate consist of quartzite, micaceous quartzite, grains of
fieldspar and quartz. The conglomerate is followed upwards by sandstone, shale,
siltstone and calcareous intercalations within the sandstone. There are occasional
ferruginous laminations also. Between the sandstone and the shale beds above,
there are thin inter-beds of compact red shales and siltstones.
Stromatolitic and banded limestones are found towards the southern part of the
Chhattisgarh basin in the form of a continuous band whose thickness is about
40m. Columnar stromatolitic structure is common. Limestones are overlain by
purple, gey and pink shales. Clayey material and calcareous partings are found
within the shale. Shale is thinly laminated and shows abrupt change in the
amount of dip and strike at places and is unconformably overlain by laterites and
bauxite.
Laterites and bauxite in the area occur as flat blankets on Khondalite and
Charnockite.
Alluvium and soil are the youngest formations exposed along the river and stream
courses.
The Eastern Ghat rock associations have an overall NS trend. The contact
between the charnockitic and non-charnockitic terrain is generally gradational.
The foliations show a general NWSE trend. The trend of major dyke swarms is
also NW-SE. The Bengpal enclaves are however oriented diversely although near
the contact with the Eastern Ghats, the enclaves trend parallel to the contact. A
number of minor folds and faults have been reported.
In Chhattisgarh Supergroup of rocks current bedding, ripple marks and other
small scale sedimentary structures are abundant. The rocks are also folded and
faulted on macroscopic scale. The Regional stratigraphic succession based on GSI
publication is presented in Table-3.2.1.
TABLE-3.2.1
REGIONAL STRATIGRAPHIC SUCCESSION
Lithology
Laterite
Limstone with shale (Pt23cij1);
Grey, purple shale (Pt23cij2);
Siltstone (Pt23cij3)
Sandstone with conglomerate
Dolerite/gabbro; aplite; vein
quartz & pegmatite
Tel Granite (Donargarh
Granite); Unclassified Granite
Granite gneiss
Acit to intermediate
charnockite (Aptegc1);
Pyroxene granulite/basic
charnockite (Aptegc2)
Quartz - garnet - sillimanite
gneiss (Aptegk1); Ferrugenous
magnetite quartzite (Aptegk2);
Calcareous quartzite
Formation
Stage/Group
Series/Super
Group
System/Eon
Cainozoic
Jagdalpur
Formation
Indravati
Group
Chhattisgarh
Supergroup
Intrusives
Migmatite
Charnockite
Group
Mesoproterozoic to
Neoproterozoic
Proterozoic
(Undifferentiated)
Palaeoproterozoic
Eastern Ghats
Supergroup
Archaean to
Proterozoic
(Undifferentiated)
Khondalite
Group
C3-5

Chapter-3
Lithology
Formation
(Aptegk3); Leptynite (Aptegk4)

Qaurtz diorite
Qaurtz - mica schist (Ab1);
Talc - tremolite - actinolite chlorite schist (Ab2);
Anthophyllite - grunerite schist
(Ab3); Quartzite (Ab4);
Magnetite - grunerite quartzite
(Ab5); Banded Magnetite
quartzite (Ab6);
Amphibolite/Hornblende schist
(Ab7); Pillowed metabasalt
(Ab8)
Tonalite gneiss
Stage/Group
Series/Super
Group
System/Eon
Bengpal Group
Archaean
Older
Metamorphic
Group
Geology of the Study Area

Geology of the study area is dominated by shales and siltstone of Jagdalpur
formation of Chhattisgarh Supergroup (97.44%) followed by laterite caps of
Cainozoic (2.56%). The proposed project site is underlain by shales of Jagdalpur
formation. The Geology of the study area based on GSI publication is presented
in Figure-3.2.2.
3.2.4 Hydrogeology
The hydrogeological studies have been carried out in the area to understand the
local geology, geo-morphological features, drainage network, aquifer
characteristics and yield of water. Accordingly various components controlling the
hydrogeological regime of the study area have been studied. Hydrogeological
investigations were carried out in the area between 10.06.2015 and 12.06.2015.
The Detailed Hydrogeology report is given in Annexure-IX.
Nature of Occurrence of Ground Water
Ground water systems are a result of the complex combination of different
lithological and structural types within an area that together constitute an aquifer
within which ground water accumulates and moves. Rather than describing
individual lithologies and their tendencies to form aquifers or otherwise, it is
useful to describe the ground water as one continuous across various lithological
types (Kulkarni and Deolankar, 1995). The study area is covered by the
arenaceous-argillaceous-calcareous sequence of sediments of Indravati Group.
Rain water is the main source of ground water recharge. Ground water in the
study area mainly occurs in phreatic (water table) conditions and at places under
semi-confined conditions. The weathered thickness varies from 10.75 to 45 m
where as the fractured and cavernous formation constitute the aquifers. The
fractures/caverns are limited to a depth of 67 m.
C3-6

Chapter-3
Water Levels
Well inventory of 35 wells was conducted in the study area during the field visit.
Mostly the ground water is developed by way of dug wells, shallow domestic and
deep agriculture bore wells. Depth of dug wells inventoried varies from 2.84 m to
14.5 m below ground level with diameter varying from 0.50 m to 4.40 m and
depth of bore wells varies from 22.00 m to 49.00 m below ground level. The
depth to water level during pre-monsoon range from 0.65 m to 9.35 m below
ground level with some of the wells with depth ranging from 2.84 m to 8.02 m
going dry and average water level is 5.49 m. The depth to water during postmonsoon range from 0.00 m to 2.95 m below ground level and the average water
level is 1.02 m. The average fluctuation between pre and post monsoon seasons
is 4.28 m.
C3-7

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.2.2
GEOLOGY OF THE STUDY AREA
C3-8

Chapter-3
3.3
Land Use Studies

Studies on land use aspects of eco-system play important roles for identifying
sensitive issues, if any, and taking appropriate actions for maintaining the
ecological balance in the development of the region.
3.3.1 Objectives
The objectives of land use studies are:
To determine the present land use pattern;
To analyze the impacts on land use due to plant activities in the study area;
and
To give recommendations for optimizing the future land use pattern vis-a-vis
growth of plant activities in the study area and its associated impacts.
3.3.2 Methodology
For the study of land use, literature review of various secondary sources such as
District Census Handbooks, regional maps regarding topography, zoning
settlement, industry, forest etc., were taken. The data was collected from various
sources like District Census Handbook, Revenue records, state and central
government offices and Survey of India (SOI) Topo sheets and also through
primary field surveys.
3.3.3 Land use Based on Secondary Data
Based on the census report, 10-km radial distance around this Plant boundary
has been considered in the study. These areas were studied in detail to get the
idea of land use pattern in the study area. The land use census data 2011 is not
available and the land use pattern of the study area as per 2001 Census is
presented in Table-3.3.1. The village wise land use data is presented in
Annexure-X.
TABLE-3.3.1
LAND USE PATTERN IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr.
No
1
2
3
4
Particulars of Land
use
Forest Land
Land under Cultivation
a) Irrigation Land
b) Un Irrigated Land
Cultivable Waste Land
Area not Available for
Cultivation
Total Area
0-3 km
3-7 km
7-10 km
0-10 km
(%)
1438
1342
2083
4863
12.22
134
5002
1278
99
5042
1509
89
11208
4900
322
21252
7687
0.81
53.42
19.32
2044
9896
1555
9547
2063
20344
5661
39786
14.23
100.00
Source: District Census Hand Book 2001

Forest
The revenue forest land under the study area consists 4863 ha (12.22%) of the
total geographic area.
C3-9

Chapter-3
Land under Cultivation

Altogether 21574 ha cultivable land (irrigated and un-irrigated) was observed in
the study area. The irrigated land admeasures to about 322 ha in the study area
which works out to be 0.81% of total study area. The un-irrigated land
admeasures about 21252 ha and works out to about 53.42% of the total study
area.
Cultivable Waste
This land includes that land, which was cultivated sometime back and left vacant
during the past 5 years in succession. Such lands may either be fallows or
covered with shrubs, which are not put to any use. Lands under thatching grass,
bamboo bushes, other grooves useful for fuel etc., and all grazing lands and
village common lands are also included in this category. The study area
comprises about 19.32% cultivable wastelands.
Land not available for Cultivation
The land not available for cultivation is 14.23% of the total study area, which
includes area of land with scrub, land without scrub, quarry, mining area, rocky/
stony and barren area.
3.3.4 Land Use Based on Satellite Imagery
Present land use based on remote sensing satellite imageries were collected and
interpreted for the 10 km radius study area for analyzing the land use pattern of
the study area. Based on the satellite data, land use/ land cover maps have been
prepared.
Land use/Land Cover Classification System
The present land use / land cover maps were prepared based on the classification
system of National standards. For explanation for each of the land use category
the details as given in Table-3.3.2 are considered.
TABLE-3.3.2
LAND USE/LAND COVER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
Sr. No.
1
Level-1
Built-up Land
Agriculture Land
Forest
Wastelands
Level-2
Town/cities
Villages
Institution/industry/godown etc
Plotted area/layout
Crop land
Plantations
Fallow
Evergreen/semi evergreen
Deciduous
Forest plantation
Rocky/stony waste
Land with /without shrubs
Saline/sandy & marshy/swampy
C3-10

Chapter-3
Sr. No.
5
6
Level-1
Water Bodies
Others
Level-2
River/stream
Lake/reservoir/tanks
Orchard/Other plantation
Shifting cultivation
Salt pans, snow covered/glacial
Barren/vacant land
Data Requirements
IRS Resourcesat 2 L4FMX of 5 m resolution was acquired for 19th January, 2015
and was used for the mapping and interpretation. Besides, other collateral data
as available in the form of maps, charts, census records, other reports and
especially topographical survey of India maps are used. In addition to this,
ground truth survey was also conducted to verify and confirm the ground
features.
Methodology
The methodology adopted for preparation of land use/ land cover thematic map is
monoscopic visual interpretation of geocoded scenes of IRS Resourcesat 2 L4FMX
and field observations are taken. The various steps involved in the study are
preparatory field work, field survey and post field work.
Pre-field Interpretation of Satellite Data
The False Colour Composite (FCC) of IRS Resourcesat 2 L4FMX satellite data are
used for pre-field interpretation work. Taking the help of topo sheets, geology,
geo-morphology and by using the image elements the features are identified and
delineated the boundaries roughly. Each feature is identified on image by their
image elements like tone, texture, colour, shape, size, pattern and association. A
tentative legend in terms of land cover and land use, physiography and erosion
was formulated. The sample areas for field check are selected covering all the
physiography, land use / land cover feature cum image characteristics.
a)
b)
c)
Softwares used
ERDAS Imagine for image processing/rectification/geocoding;
AutoCAD for data preparation after visual interpretation of the image; and
Arc View for image/landuse presentation.
Ground Truth Collection
Both toposheets and imagery were taken for field verification and a transverse
plan using existing road network was made to cover as many representative
sample areas as possible to observe the broad land use features and to adjust the
sample areas according to field conditions. Detailed field observations and
investigations were carried out and noted the landuse features on the imagery.
Post Field Work
The base maps of the study area were prepared, with the help of survey of india
toposheet. Preliminary interpreted land use and the land cover features
C3-11

Chapter-3
boundaries from IRS Resorucesat 2 false colour composite were modified in light
of field information and the final thematic details were transferred onto the base
maps. The final interpreted and classified thematic map was catrographed. The
cartographic map was coloured with standard colour coding and detailed
description of feature with standard symbols. All the classes noted and marked by
the standard legend on the map.
Final Output
The final output would be the landuse/land cover map and numerals were given
different colour code for each category as shown in map. Area estimation of all
features of land use/land cover categories was noted. The thematic map and
land use pattern is shown in Figure-3.3.1 and Figure-3.3.2. The details of the
land use in 10 km radial study area are given in Table-3.3.3.
TABLE-3.3.3
LAND USE BREAK UP OF THE STUDY AREA
Sr. No.
1
1.1
1.2
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
5
5.1
5.2
6
6.1
Land Use
Built-up Land
Settlements
Industry/Institutional Land
Forest (Protected/Reserved)
Dense/Open Forest
Degraded Scrub Land
Forest Blank
Agricultural land
Plantation
Irrigated/Double Crop
Other Agriculture Land/Single Crop
Fallow Land
Waste Land
Land with/without Scrub
Rocky/Stony/Barren Land
Quarry/Mining Land
Water Body
Stream/River/Canal
Tank/Reservoir/Pond
Others
Dense/Mixed Jungle
Total
Area
(Hectares)
Area
(%)
1022
606
2.96
1.75
6443
25
9
18.64
0.07
0.02
444
624
15085
2768
1.28
1.80
43.64
8.01
4405
15
9
12.74
0.04
0.03
723
479
2.09
1.39
1909
34566
5.52
100.00
Observations
The land use pattern of the study area indicates build up land of 4.71%, forest
land of 18.74% in the study area, agricultural land of 54.74%, waste land of
12.81%, water body of 3.48% and the others (dense/mixed jungle) is about
5.52%.
C3-12

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.3.1
SATELLITE IMAGERY OF STUDY AREA
C3-13

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.3.2
LAND USE PATTERN BASED ON SATELLITE DATA
C3-14

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.3.3
DIGITAL ELEVATION MODEL
C3-15

Chapter-3
3.4
Meteorology
The meteorological data recorded during the monitoring period is very useful for
proper interpretation of the baseline information as well as for input prediction
models for air quality dispersion. Historical data on meteorological parameters will
also play an important role in identifying the general meteorological regime of the
region.
The year may broadly be divided into four seasons as per IMD classification:
Winter season
Pre-monsoon season
Monsoon season
Post-monsoon season
:
:
:
:
December to February
March to May
June to September
October to November
3.4.1 Methodology
The methodology adopted for monitoring surface observations is as per the
standard norms laid down by Bureau of Indian Standards (IS : 8829) and India
Meteorological Department (IMD). On-site monitoring was undertaken for various
meteorological variables in order to generate the site-specific data. Data was
collected every hour continuously from 1st March 2015 to 31st May 2015
representing pre monsoon season.
The Central Monitoring Station (CMS) equipped with continuous monitoring
equipment was installed on top of a residential building at a height of about 10.0
m above ground level to record wind speed, direction, relative humidity and
temperature. The meteorological monitoring station was located in such a way
that it is free from any obstructions and as per the guidelines specified under
IS: 8829. Cloud cover was recorded by visual observation. Rainfall was monitored
by rain gauge.
The continuous recording meteorological instrument of Dynalab Weather Tech,
Pune (Model No. WDL1002) has been used for recording the met data. The
sensitivity of the equipment is given in Table-3.4.1.
TABLE-3.4.1
SENSITIVITY OF METEOROLOGY MONITORING EQUIPMENT
Sr. No.
1
2
3
Sensor
Wind Speed Sensor
Wind Direction Sensor
Temperature Sensor
Sensitivity
0.02 m/s
3 degrees
0.2oC
3.4.1.1 Sources of Information

India Meteorological Department has been monitoring surface observations at
Jagdalpur. Pressure, temperature, relative humidity, rainfall, evaporation, wind
speed and direction are measured twice a day viz., at 08:30 and 17:30 hr. The
data for the above specified parameters has been collected for 10 years (1994VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad
C3-16

Chapter-3
2003) and processed. Data on cloud cover is compiled from the climatological
tables for the IMD station at Jagdalpur.
3.4.2 Presentation of Data
3.4.2.1 Meteorological Data Recorded at IMD, Jagdalpur
The data collected from IMD includes wind speed, wind direction, temperature,
relative humidity, atmospheric pressure, rainfall and cloud cover over a period of
past 5 years (2006-2010). The monthly maximum, minimum and average values
are collected for all the parameters except wind speed and direction. All these
parameters are recorded twice a day viz at 08:30 and 17:30 hours. The collected
data is given in Table-3.4.2.
1] Temperature
The winter season starts from December and continues till the end of February.
December is the coolest month with the mean daily maximum temperature at
28.3C and the mean daily minimum temperature at 8.9C. Both the night and
day temperatures increase rapidly during the onset of the pre-monsoon season
from March to May. During pre-monsoon the mean maximum temperature (May)
was observed to be 39.4C with the mean minimum temperature at 24.6C. The
mean maximum temperature in the monsoon season was observed to be 34.3C
whereas the mean minimum temperature was observed to be 22.9C. By the end
of September with the onset of south-west monsoon (October), the day
temperatures increase slightly, with the mean maximum temperature at 30.8C
and the mean minimum temperature at 18.1C. The monthly variations of
temperature are presented in Table-3.4.2.
2] Relative Humidity
The air is generally very humid in the region especially during the monsoon when
the average relative humidity at 8:30 hr was observed to be 81% with a
maximum and a minimum of 88% and 73% respectively. Similarly, at 17:30 hr,
the average was observed to be 73% with the maximum and minimum values of
83% and 62% values respectively.
In the pre-monsoon period, the average relative humidity at 8:30 hr was 60%
with a maximum and minimum value of 61% and 58%. Likewise, the average
relative humidity at 17:30 hr was 38% with the maximum and minimum to be
41% and 35%. In the post-monsoon period, the average relative humidity at
8:30 hr was 86% with the maximum and minimum to be 86% and 85%.
Likewise, the average relative humidity at 17:30 hr was 70% with the maximum
and minimum to be 72% and 68%.
During winter the average relative humidity at 8:30 hr was 81% with the
maximum and minimum to be 85% and 76%. Similarly, the average relative
humidity at 17:30 hr was 56% with a maximum and minimum of 60% and 52%.
The monthly variations in the relative humidity are presented in Table-3.4.2.
C3-17

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.4.2
CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA GENERATED AT IMD STATION JAGDALPUR (2006-2010)
Month
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Range
Atmospheric
Pressure (mb)
8:30 hr
17:30 hr
953.9
950.2
952.4
948.3
950.5
946.4
948.8
944.2
944.7
940.5
941.8
938.3
941.1
938.5
942.6
939.7
945.2
941.7
949.6
946.3
952.5
949.3
953.7
950.3
938.3 953.9
Temperature (0C)
Max
Min
29.3
14.8
31.9
17.0
34.8
19.5
37.8
22.8
39.4
24.6
34.3
25.2
29.7
23.2
30.3
23.4
31.2
22.9
30.8
21.8
29.5
18.1
28.3
8.9
8.9 39.4
Relative Humidity
(%)
8:30 hr
17:30 hr
85
60
76
52
61
36
59
35
58
41
73
62
88
82
87
83
87
79
85
72
86
68
85
55
35 - 88
Total
Rainfall
(mm)
18.3
5.5
26.0
38.4
46.8
413.6
890.7
820.0
279.6
153.8
27.8
18.5
2739.0
3] Atmospheric Pressure
During winter season the pressure observed was in the range of 953.9 to 948.3
mb, with the maximum pressure (953.9 mb) occurring in the month of January.
During monsoon the pressure observed was in the range of 945.2 to 938.3 mb,
with the maximum pressure 945.2 mb occurring during September month in the
monsoon season. During post-monsoon season the pressure observed was in the
range of 952.5 to 946.3 mb, with the maximum pressure (952.5 mb) occurring in
the month of November. During pre-monsoon the pressure observed was in the
range of 950.5 to 940.5 mb, with the maximum pressure 950.5 mb occurring
during March.
The pressure levels are found to be fairly consistent over the region. The monthly
variations in the pressure levels are presented in Table-3.4.2.
4] Rainfall
The average annual rainfall based on the 10 year IMD data, was observed to be
2739.0 mm. The monsoon sets in the month of June and continues till September
and sometime extends up to mid October. The average rainfall observed during
the monsoon season was 601.0 mm with maximum amount of rainfall (890.7
mm) occurring in the month of July and the minimum (279.6 mm) in the month
of September respectively. The maximum number of rainy days occurs in the
month of July. Monthly variations in the rainfall for past 10 years are given in
Table-3.4.2.
5] Cloud Cover
During the winter and the post-monsoon seasons, it was observed that the skies
are generally very clear. In the pre-monsoon season, generally light clouds were
observed in the evenings, with clear mornings. During the monsoon season, both
in the mornings and evenings, the skies were found to be clouded.
C3-18

Chapter-3
6] Wind Speed / Direction

Generally, light to moderate winds prevail throughout the year. Winds were light
and moderate particularly during the morning hours. While during the afternoon
hours the winds were stronger.The season wise discussion of the respective wind
pattern is given as below:
Generally, light to moderate winds prevail through the year. Winds are light and
moderate particularly during the morning hours. While during the afternoon hours
the winds are stronger. The wind roses representing pre-monsoon, monsoon,
post monsoon, winter seasons along with annual wind roses are shown in the
Figure-3.4.1 to Figure-3.4.3 and presented in Table-3.4.3.
TABLE-3.4.3
SUMMARY OF WIND PATTERN IMD-JAGDALPUR
Season
PreMonsoon
Monsoon
Post
Monsoon
Winter
Annual
First Predominant
Winds
08:30
SW
(22.0%)
SW
(27.2%)
NE
(18.0%)
NE
(7.3%)
SW
(13.0%)
17:30
S
(16.6%)
SW
(21.4%)
NE
(22.0%)
S
(11.1%)
SW
(10.8%)
Second
Predominant
Winds
08:30
17:30
S
SW
(15.0%) (15.6%)
S
W
(11.8%) (16.8%)
N
N
(8.5%)
(12.0%)
N
NE
(4.3%)
(10.0%)
S
S
(8.1%)
(10.3%)
Predominant Wind
Speeds
08:30
1-5
5.0-11.0
1-5
5.0-11.0
1-5
5.0-11.0
1-5
5.0-11.0
1-5
5.0-11.0
17:30
1-5
5.0-11.0
1-5
5.0-11.0
1-5
5.0-11.0
1-5
5.0-11.0
1-5
5.0-11.0
% Calm
Conditions
08:30
25.0
17:30
10.6
23.2
17.0
49.0
37.5
59.7
38.0
39.2
25.8
3.4.3 Meteorological Data Recorded at Project Site

The recorded meteorological data is presented in Table-3.4.4.
meteorological parameters have been recorded and are as follows:
The
TABLE-3.4.4
SUMMARY OF THE METEOROLOGICAL DATA GENERATED AT SITE
Month
Temperature (0C)
Max
March 2015
April 2015
May 2015
Range
1]
Min
38.3
20.7
38.7
24.5
41.6
27.1
20.7 41.6
Relative Humidity
(%)
Max
Min
Rainfall
(mm)
Cloud Cover
(Oktas)
68.7
39.9
59.4
35.3
57.6
32.7
32.7 68.7
34.8
46.7
68.5
150
2/8
3/8
1/8
1/8 - 3/8
Temperature
Maximum temperature of 41.6oC and minimum temperature of 20.7oC was

recorded during the study period. Maximum temperature was observed in the
month of May 2015 and the minimum temperature was observed during March
2015 of the study period.
C3-19

Chapter-3
2]
Relative Humidity
During the period of observation, the relative humidity recorded ranged from
32.7% to 68.7%. Maximum humidity was observed during the month of March
during the study period.
3]
Rainfall
During the study period the total rainfall was observed to be 150 mm.
4]
Cloud Cover
The clear skies were observed mostly during the study period.
5]
Wind Speed/Direction
The predominant winds along with wind speeds during the study period are given
in Table-3.4.5.
TABLE-3.4.5
SUMMARY OF WIND PATTERN AT THE STUDY AREA
Season
Pre-monsoon Season (2015)
First Predominant Wind Direction
SW (21.2%)
Second Predominant Wind Direction
S (11.8%)
Predominant Wind Speeds (kmph)
1.0 to >11
Calm conditions (%)
16.1%
Note: Figures in parenthesis indicates percentage of time wind blows
The wind roses for the study period representing pre-monsoon season is shown in
Figure-3.4.4. A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds
are mostly from SW (21.2%) followed by S (11.8%) and W (8.2%) directions.
The winds in other directions are SSW (7.9%), SSE (6.8%), WSW (4.9%), NE
(4.8%), SE (4.4%), E (3.1%), ENE (2.3%), NNE (2.1%), ENE (1.8%), NW
(1.7%), N (1.3%), WNW (1.0%), NNW (0.5%) and and calm condition prevailed
for 16.1 of the total time.
3.4.4
Comments
The India Meteorological Department (IMD) records the data at two times a day
viz. 08:30 hr and 17:30 hr while the site specific data has been recorded at an
hourly interval. On comparison of site specific data generated for study period vis-vis the IMD data, slight variations were found. The following observations are
brought out:
The temperature recorded on site when compared vis--vis the IMD data, slight
variations was observed. The maximum and minimum temperatures recorded
at site during study period were 41.6oC and 20.7oC, whereas the maximum and
minimum temperature recorded at IMD, Jagdalpur for the same season are
39.4oC and 19.5oC respectively;
C3-20

Chapter-3
The relative humidity was observed to range from 32.7 % to 68.7 % during the
study period whereas according to IMD Jagdalpur data the relative humidity
was observed to range from 35 % to 61 %. The variation could be because of
the fact that the RH values considered for the site are actual values while the
range of IMD, Jagdalpur data represents the average values for 10 year period.
The data generated at continuous monitoring station at project site when compared
with the data recorded at IMD, it can be observed that the data generated at the
site is broadly compatible with regional meteorology, except for minor variations as
described above.
C3-21
N 2.6%
NN
E0
.3%
N
E
2.
6%
W
SS
16.6% S
15
15.0% S
.6
8.3
SW
SS
N 1.0%
NN
N E 0%
E
0.
8%
21
.4
SW
11.8% S
6.0
SS
%
8.5
9%
1.
.0%
E2
W
WS
SS
SW
.2%
E0
EN
C-17.0% E 1.3%
ES
E0
%
SE
.2
NN
27
WN
W
%
9.0
W
WS
%
E0
EN
C-23.2% E 1.2% 16.8% W
ES
E0
%
7%
0.
%
SE E 1.3
SS
7.0
NN
11.0% W
5.2
0.8
WN
W
0%
5.
0.3
0%
2.
N 1.5%
NN
E0
.5%
N
E
2.
0%
PRE MONSOON
17-30 hrs
9.4% S
W
SS
10.
2%
SW
W
WS
6%
3.
SE
.7%
E2
PRE MONSOON
08-30 hrs
4.0
.0%
E1
EN
C-10.6%
E 2.6%
ES
E0
.7%
SS
3.0
.9%
E2
.0
%
W
NN
WN
W
0%
3.
SS
22
9.2% W
SE
W
WS
2.3
E
C-25.0% E 1.3%
ES
E0
.3%
4.0% W
%
4.3
NE
5.0
%
1.0
W
NN
W
WN
W
3%
8.
0.6
6%
2.
2.3
N.4. 6%
NN
E1
.3%
N
E
4.
6%

Chapter-3
MONSOON
08-30 hrs
5%
SCALE
MONSOON
17-30 hrs
SPEED CALM
1
11
19
>19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.4.1
SEASONAL WIND ROSE PRE-MONSOON AND MONSOON-IMD JAGDALPUR
C3-22
WN
W
22
.0
%
E
N
10
.0
%
E
N
NN
E5
.0%
N 8.0%
NN
E3
.0%
N
E
7.
3%
11.1% S
SW
5.0
%
4.
7%
SS
W
N 4.3%
4.2% S
SW
SS
W
4.0% S
1.
5%
SW
SS
W
1.5% S
SS
W
0%
1.
.0%
E2
SS
1.0
%
E 3.6%
ES
E1
.0%
WN
W
SE
SW
.3%
E0
EN
C-38.0% E 0.7%
3.3% W
ES
E0
W
S
%
W
%
0
.
1
3%
2.
SE
.4%
E1
SS
1.
7%
W
NN
C-59.7%
W
WS
2.0
%
.0%
E2
N
E
W
N
W
NN
%
0.3
2.9
W
N
1.6% W
0%
5.
1.3
0%
4.
WN
W
ES
E0
.5%
POST MONSOON
17-30 hrs
POST MONSOON
08-30 hrs
0.5
%
0%
C-37.5%
SW
.0%
E2
EN
E 2%
5%
0.
%
SE E 0.5
SS
0.5
%
1.5% W
5%
0.
SE 0%
E
SS
1.
0%
W
NN
W
N
1.0
E 5.0%
1.5% W C-49.0%
ES
W
E
S
0%
W
0%
1.3
NN
E1
1.0
%
N 12.0%
18
.0
%
E
N
NN
E4
.0%
.0%
E3
EN
WN
W
5%
1.
W
NN
W
N
2.0
2.0
5%
3.
2.0
N 8.5%

Chapter-3
WINTER
17-30hrs
WINTER
08-30 hrs
5%
SCALE
SPEED CALM
1
11
19
>19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.4.2
SEASONAL WIND ROSE POST MONSOON AND WINTER-IMD JAGDALPUR
C3-23
4.5% W
W
WS
13
.0
%
5.0
%
SW
SS
W
%
2.9
7.
2%
6%
1.
.4%
SE
E1
SS
.6%
E1
EN
C-39.2%
E 2.8%
ES
E0
.3%
8.1% S
WN
W
W
NN
W
N
N
E
%
1.1
0%
3.
2.4
N 4.1%
NN
E1
.8%

Chapter-3
W
NN
WN
W
9.
6%
E
10.3% S
10
.8
%
5.0
%
SW
SS
W
W
WS
7%
1.
.8%
SE
E1
SS
.9%
E0
EN
C-25.8% E 1.7%
ES
E0
.3%
7.7% W
%
3.2
W
N
NN
E4
.4%
2.0
0%
5.
3.3
N 6.5%
08-30hrs
ANNUAL
17-30hrs
ANNUAL
5%
SCALE
SPEED CALM
1
11
19
>19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.4.3
ANNUAL WIND ROSE-IMD JAGDALPUR
C3-24
4.
8%
E
N
%
0.5
7%
1.
1.0
E2
.1%
W
W
NN
NN
N
WN
N 1.3%

Chapter-3
2.3
NE
%
C-16.1%
W 8.2%
ES
%
4.9
E1
.8%
SE
WS
E 3.1%
4%
4.
SS
7.9
.8%
E6
SS
SW
21
.2
S 11.8%
SCALE
5%
SPEED CALM
1.0
11
19
>19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.4.4
SITE SPECIFIC WIND ROSE (PRE MONSOON SEASON - 2015)
C3-25

Chapter-3
3.4.5 Site Specific Upper Air Data

SODAR was operated continuously from 17th March 2015 to 17th April 2015. This
is a final report prepared based on one month data. Data generation remained
almost continuous throughout this period using power backup system.
The hourly echograms obtained for a total of about 688 hours in 30 days have
been analyzed to obtain mixing heights. Graphical representation of mixing height
has been shown in Figure-3.4.5. A detailed sodar study report is enclosed in
Annexure-XI.
FIGURE-3.4.5
AVERAGE MIXING HEIGHT
Mixing Height
The mixing height during day time has been observed more than 1000 m
throughout the period of observation. Peak mixing Height for the study period
17th March 2015 to 17th April 2015 month is 1892 m.
i) Nocturnal Inversion Period
The period of nocturnal inversion is from 20:00 hrs in the evening to 06:00 hrs in
the morning. The mixing height during nocturnal inversion period in month of
March is 125 to 357 m.
ii) Early Morning Rising Inversion Layer
The nocturnal inversion layer starts rising at 0800 hrs with the rising of the sun.
It continues to rise till 1000 hrs. The fumigation hours are from 08:00 hrs to
10:00 hrs.
C3-26

Chapter-3
iii) Day Time Convective Mixing Layer

Day time connective structures start forming noon after sunrise under the rising
layer. After 0900 hrs they come in full bloom and rise to height a more than 1000
m. The convective structures start decreasing in the afternoon and disappear
around 19:00 hrs.
iv) Evening Transition Period
The evening transition period is between 18:00 hrs to 19:00 hrs. During this
period the connective structure drop off and the inversion starts forming.
3.5
Ambient Air Quality

The ambient air quality with respect to the study zone of 10 km radius from project
boundary forms the baseline information. The various sources of air pollution in the
region are construction activity at steel plant site, traffic, urban and rural activities.
The study area represents mostly rural environment.
This section describes the selection of sampling locations, methodology adopted for
sampling, analytical techniques and frequency of sampling. The results of
monitoring carried out during study period are presented in Annexure-XII.
3.5.1
Methodology Adopted for Air Quality Survey
3.5.1.1 Selection of Sampling Locations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a
scientifically designed ambient air quality monitoring network. The design of
monitoring network in the air quality surveillance programme has been based on
the following considerations:
Meteorological conditions on synoptic basis;
Topography of the study area;
Representatives of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status;
and
Representatives of likely impact areas.
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were set up at eight locations with
due consideration to the above mentioned points. Table-3.5.1 gives the details of
environmental setting around each monitoring station. The location of the selected
stations with reference to the project area boundary is given in the same table and
shown in Figure-3.5.1.
3.5.1.2 Frequency and Parameters for Sampling
The following frequency has been adopted for sampling:
Ambient air quality monitoring has been carried out with a frequency of two days
per week during study period. The baseline data of air environment was monitored
for parameters mentioned below as per revised MoEF&CC notification dated 16th
November 2009:
C3-27

Chapter-3
Particulate matter (PM10);

Fine respirable particulate matter (PM2.5);
Sulphur dioxide (SO2);
Oxides of nitrogen (NOx);
Ozone (O3) ;
Nickel (Ni);
Ammonia (NH3);
Benzo(a) pyrene (BaP) in particulate phase;
Arsenic (As);
Carbon monoxide (CO);
Lead (Pb);and
Poly aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAH)
3.5.1.3 Sampling and Analytical Techniques
Respirable dust samplers APM-460 BL attached with APM-151 instruments have
been used for sampling of respirable fraction (<10 microns) and gaseous pollutants
like SO2 and NOx.
PM10 (<10 ) present in ambient air is drawn through the cyclone. Coarse and nonrespirable dust (>10 ) is separated from the air stream by centrifugal forces acting
on the solid particles. These separated particulates fall through the cyclones conical
hopper and collect in the sampling cup placed at the bottom of the cyclone. The fine
dust (<10 microns) forming the respirable fraction passes through the cyclone and
is retained by the filter paper.
A tapping is provided on the suction side of the blower to provide suction for
sampling air through a set of impingers. Samples of gases are drawn at a flow
rate of 0.2 litres per minute (lpm). The air samples were analyzed as per
standard methods specified in IS: 5182.
Duration of Sampling
The sampling duration for PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and NOx is twenty-four hourly
continuous samples per day and CO and O3 are sampled for 8 hours continuously
thrice a day. This is to allow a comparison with the present revised standards
mentioned in the latest Gazette Notification of the Central Pollution Control Board
(CPCB) (16th November 2009).
TABLE-3.5.1
DETAILS OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS
Sr. No.
Village Name
AAQ1
AAQ2
AAQ3
AAQ4
AAQ5
AAQ6
AAQ7
AAQ8
Project Site
Nagarnar village
Amrapathi Ghata Churagan
Pirinji
Chanditi
Chowkawada
Amaguda
Madpal
Distance w.r.t
Project
Boundary (km)
1.8
4.6
3.8
2.2
1.4
2.8
4.8
Direction w.r.t
Project
Boundary
NNW
N
NE
E
S
SW
WNW
Environmental
Settings
Crosswind
Downwind
Downwind
Crosswind
Upwind
Upwind
Crosswind
C3-28

Chapter-3
3.5.2
Presentation of Primary Data

The summary of the results for the three months study period are presented in
Table-3.5.2. Characterizations of RSPM are given in Table-3.5.3. Various
statistical parameters like 98th percentile, average, maximum and minimum values
have been computed from the observed raw data for all the AAQ monitoring
stations. These are compared with the standards prescribed by Central Pollution
Control Board (CPCB) for industrial and rural /residential zone.
C3-29

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.5.1
AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS
C3-30
Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron & Steel Plant (3.0 MTPA) with addition of 2.0 MTPA Pellet
Plant at Kasturi and Chowkawada Village near Nagarnar, Jagdalpur, Bastar District, Chhattisgarh
Chapter-3
TABLE-3.5.2
SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS
Station
Code
AAQ1
AAQ2
AAQ3
AAQ4
AAQ5
AAQ6
AAQ7
AAQ8
PM10 ( g/m3)
Name of the Location
Project Site
Nagarnar village
Pirinji
Chanditi
Chowkawada
Amaguda
Madpal
Study Area Range
NAAQ Standards
Min
Max
42.2
42.9
38.7
41.2
40.5
32.6
29.7
35.6
50.2
45.6
54.9
48.0
49.6
45.0
51.0
46.0
54.7
49.0
45.6
41.8
41.0
38.0
45.8
42.1
29.7 54.9
100
PM2.5 ( g/m3)
th
Avg
98
%le
50.1
53.6
49.4
50.7
54.7
45.4
41.0
45.6
Min
Max
Avg
19.2
19.1
17.9
20.6
19.3
16.2
15.0
16.2
22.6
20.6
25.8
21.9
22.9
20.9
25.5
23.0
25.7
22.8
20.7
19.2
20.8
19.2
22.3
19.9
15.0 25.8
60
SO2 ( g/m3)
th
98
%le
22.6
25.8
22.9
25.3
25.7
20.7
20.8
22.1
NOx ( g/m3)
th
Min
Max
Avg
10.4
11.4
9.4
12.0
11.2
9.4
9.6
9.5
12.8
11.4
13.8
12.3
10.7
10.0
14.1
12.8
13.4
11.9
11.8
10.3
11.6
10.2
11.4
10.2
9.4 13.8
80
98
%le
12.7
13.8
10.7
14.0
13.3
11.6
11.2
11.4
Min
Max
13.9
14.4
12.2
14.7
14.3
11.6
12.4
13.4
18.4
16.3
18.5
16.2
15.8
13.3
17.2
16.1
17.9
15.9
15.9
13.5
15.4
14.2
17.2
15.0
11.6 18.5
80
98th
%le
18.0
18.5
15.3
17.2
17.4
15.3
15.3
16.5
Avg
TABLE -3.5.2
SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS (CONT..)
Station
Code
AAQ1
AAQ2
AAQ3
AAQ4
AAQ5
AAQ6
AAQ7
AAQ8
CO ( g/m3)
Project Site
Nagarnar village
Pirinji
Chanditi
Chowkawada
Amaguda
Madpal
Study Area Range
NAAQ Standards
Min
Max
234
283
220
278
240
231
242
268
361
377
351
359
391
331
329
351
Avg
301
335
304
317
328
278
289
316
220 - 391
2000
Ozone ( g/m3)
98th %le
Min
359
370
351
355
384
327
328
350
4.5
3.0
2.3
3.6
3.1
2.4
3.1
2.4
Max
Avg
6.8
5.7
6.9
4.9
6.8
4.3
6.4
4.8
6.9
5.4
5.5
3.9
5.6
4.4
6.1
4.6
2.3 6.9
100
Ammonia, NH3 ( g/m3)

98th
%le
6.7
6.8
6.5
6.3
6.8
5.5
5.6
5.9
Max
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
Min
Avg
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
400
98th
%le
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
<20.0
Lead (Pb) ( g/m3)

Max
Min
Avg
98th
%le
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
1.0
C3-31
Chapter-3
TABLE -3.5.2
SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS (CONT..)
Station
Code
AAQ1
AAQ2
AAQ3
AAQ4
AAQ5
AAQ6
AAQ7
AAQ8
Project Site
Nagarnar village
Amrapathi Ghata
Churagan
Pirinji
Chanditi
Chowkawada
Amaguda
Madpal
Benzo(a)pyrene (BaP) (ng/m3)

Max
Min
Avg
98th
%le
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
Study Area Range
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
Max
Arsenic (As) ( g/m3)

Min
Avg
<0.001
<0.001
Ni ( g/m3)
Min
Avg
98th
%le
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
Max
<0.001
<0.001
PAH (ng/m3)
Min
Avg
98th
%le
<0.001
<0.001
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
Max
<0.01
<0.01
C3-32
98th
%le
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
Chapter-3
TABLE-3.5.3
SUMMARY OF CHEMICAL CHARACTERIZATION OF RSPM PRE-MONSOON SEASON 2015
Sr.
No
Components
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Free Silica
Aluminium
Calcium
Sodium
Potassium
Magnesium
Lead
Zinc
Vanadium
Iron
Manganese
Boran
Cadmium
Copper
Nickel
Cobalt
Mercury
Arsenic
Sulphur
Phosphorus
Chlorides
Chromium
AAQ1
Min
0.56
1.7
5.3
3.1
2.6
1.4
0.17
3.3
<0.001
0.76
3.4
5.2
<0.001
0.12
0.07
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
1.4
6.3
5.8
0.05
Max
0.79
1.9
5.6
5.2
4.5
1.9
0.31
5.9
0.03
0.86
3.3
6.9
0.04
0.35
0.02
<0.001
<0.001
0.02
1.1
5.6
4.9
0.03
AAQ2
Min
0.51
1.4
5.6
3.5
2.6
1.8
0.12
3.2
<0.001
0.71
3.3
5.2
<0.001
0.05
0.04
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
1.02
6.6
6.1
0.04
Concentrations are expressed in g/m3
Max
0.86
1.9
6.6
5.5
4.2
1.9
0.21
5.5
0.02
0.82
3.2
7.2
0.05
0.39
0.06
<0.001
<0.001
0.03
1.6
7.1
5.9
0.03
AAQ3
Min
0.52
1.3
4.8
2.6
2.2
1.4
0.12
3
<0.001
0.68
2.7
5.5
<0.01
0.06
0.03
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.82
6.3
5.5
0.04
Max
0.83
2.4
5.6
5
4.3
2.1
0.27
5.9
0.03
0.58
2.9
6.5
0.05
0.29
0.05
<0.001
<0.001
0.04
0.99
6.1
4.6
0.05
AAQ4
Min
0.51
1.5
5.1
3.5
2.6
1.5
0.15
2.7
<0.001
0.62
2.8
5.6
<0.001
0.07
0.02
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.74
6.6
5.7
0.06
Max
0.81
2.2
5.4
4.8
4.3
2.2
0.25
5.9
0.04
0.71
3.8
7.5
0.07
0.32
0.06
<0.001
<0.001
0.03
1.4
5.9
4.6
0.04
AAQ5
Min
0.55
1.3
4.7
3.5
2.4
1.6
0.15
3.2
<0.001
0.71
2.3
4.5
<0.001
0.07
0.04
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.75
6.4
6.1
0.06
Max
0.83
2.2
5.7
5.2
4.5
2.3
0.26
5.5
0.07
0.65
4.1
7.6
0.11
0.32
0.06
<0.001
<0.001
0.05
0.93
6.8
5.9
0.05
AAQ6
Min
0.45
1.2
4.1
3.2
2.5
1.2
0.13
2.1
<0.001
0.65
2.2
3.3
<0.001
0.07
0.05
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.76
5.1
4.5
0.04
Max
0.76
2.1
5.1
4.2
3.6
2.1
0.25
4.9
0.07
0.72
3.9
6.2
0.05
0.31
0.06
<0.001
<0.001
0.03
0.94
5.2
4.1
0.05
AAQ7
Min
0.45
1.1
3.5
2.4
1.8
1.2
1.02
2.5
<0.001
0.65
2.3
3.6
<0.001
0.08
0.03
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.61
3.8
3.2
0.06
Max
0.81
1.9
3.9
3.4
2.9
2
0.24
4.1
0.07
0.62
3.5
5.5
0.04
0.31
0.05
<0.001
<0.001
0.04
0.91
5.1
3.7
0.04
AAQ8
Min
0.41
1.4
4.1
3.5
3
1.4
1.05
2.2
<0.001
0.66
2.5
5.1
<0.001
0.07
0.02
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.65
4.7
3.5
0.04
Max
0.82
2.1
5.1
4.2
3.4
1.1
0.26
5.1
0.06
0.72
3.4
5.7
0.05
0.32
0.06
<0.001
<0.001
0.05
0.94
6.1
4.7
0.06
C3-33

Chapter-3
3.5.2.1 Observations of Primary Data
The observations based on a perusal of the results for pre-monsoon season are
summarized below:
Particulate Matter (PM10):
A maximum value of 54.9 g/m3 was observed at Nagarnar Village (AAQ-2) and
minimum value of 29.7 g/m3 was observed at Amaguda Village (AAQ-7). The
average values were observed to be in the range of 29.7 to 54.9 g/m3.
Respirable Particulate Matter (PM2.5):
A maximum value of 25.8 g/m3 was observed at Nagarnar Village (AAQ-2) and
minimum value of 15.0 g/m3 was observed at Amaguda Village (AAQ-7). The
average values were observed to be in the range of 15.0 to 25.8 g/m3.
Sulphur Dioxide (SO2):
Maximum concentration of SO2 is observed to be 13.8 g/m3 at Nagarnar village
(AAQ-2) and minimum value of 9.4 g/m3 observed at Amrapathi Ghata Churagan
village (AAQ-3) and Chowkawada village (AAQ-6). The average values were
observed to be in the range of 9.4 to 13.8 g/m3.
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX):
Maximum concentration of NOx is observed to be 18.5 g/m3 at Nagarnar village
(AAQ-2) and minimum value of 11.6 g/m3 observed at Chowkawada Village
(AAQ-6). The average values were observed to be in the range of 11.6 to 18.5
g/m3.
Carbon Monoxide (CO):
The maximum CO concentration is observed to be 391 g/m3 at Chanditi village
(AAQ-5) and minimum value of 220 g/m3 observed at Amrapathi Ghata Churagan
village (AAQ-3). The average values were observed between 220 and 391 g/m3.
Ozone (O3):
The O3 concentrations in the region are well within the prescribed limits of NAAQ
standards.
Ammonia (NH3):
The ammonia concentrations in the region are well within the prescribed limits of
NAAQ standards.
Lead (Pb):
The lead concentrations in the region are well within the prescribed limits of
NAAQ standards.
C3-34

Chapter-3
Benzo(a)pyrene (BaP):
BaP concentrations in the region are well within the prescribed limits of NAAQ
standards.
Arsenic (As):
The arsenic concentrations in the region are well within the prescribed limits of
NAAQ standards.
Nickel (Ni):
The nickel concentrations in the region are well within the prescribed limits of
NAAQ standards.
PAH:
PAH values observed as <0.01 ng/m3 within the study area.
3.6
Water Quality
Selected water quality parameters of ground water and surface water resources
within 10 km radius of the study area have been studied for assessing the
hydrological environment to evaluate anticipated impact of the pellet plant.
Understanding the water quality is essential in the preparation of environmental
impact statement. It also assists to identify critical issues in a view to suggest
appropriate mitigation measures for implementation to curb the deterioration of
various hydrological sources in the vicinity of the project site.
The purpose of this study is to:
Assess the water quality characteristics for critical parameters;
Evaluate the impacts on agricultural productivity,
recreational resources and aesthetics in the vicinity; and
habitat
conditions,
Predict the likely impacts on water quality due to the project and related
activities.
3.6.1
Methodology
Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalized
based on the following aspects:
Drainage pattern of the regional area;
Location of residential areas representing different activities/likely impact
areas; and
Areas representing the existing baseline environment.
Surface and ground water sources covering 10 km radial distance were examined
for physicochemical, heavy metals and bacteriological parameters in order to
C3-35

Chapter-3
assess the effect of industrial and other activities on the hydrosphere resources.
The samples were collected and analyzed as per the procedures specified in
Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water' published by
American Public Health Association (APHA).
3.6.2
Water Sampling Locations

Eight surface water and eight groundwater samples were collected as grab samples
during pre-monsoon season and were analyzed for various parameters. The
analyzed results were compared with the standards for drinking water as per IS:
10500 (the standard prescribes the requirements for the essential and desirable
characteristics required to be tested for ascertaining the suitability of water for
drinking purpose).
The water sampling locations are listed below in Table-3.6.1 and are shown in
Figure-3.6.1.
TABLE-3.6.1
DETAILS OF WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Code
Location
Surface Water
SW-1
Bhaskel river
SW-2
Jaura river
SW-3
Upstream of Indravati river
SW-4
downstream of Indravati river
SW-5
Pond near Tetalkuti
SW-6
Pond near Erapali
SW-7
Pond near Siwanagude
SW-8
Pond near Madpal
Ground Water
GW-1
Project Site
GW-2
Nagarnar village
GW-3
GW-4
Pirinji
GW-5
Chanditi
GW-6
Chowkawada
GW-7
Amaguda
GW-8
Madpal
Distance w.r.t. Project

Boundary (km)
Direction w.r.t.
Project
Boundary
6.0
5.7
4.1
5.8
3.6
4.6
5.9
5.2
NNW
NE
NNW
NNW
N
ESE
SW
W
1.8
4.6
3.8
2.2
1.4
2.8
4.8
NNW
N
NE
E
S
SW
WNW
C3-36

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.6.1
WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS
C3-37

Chapter-3
3.6.3
Presentation of Results
Eight surface water and eight groundwater samples have been within the
periphery of 10 km taking into account the various uses these water resources
are put to. The pre-monsoon season results of surface and ground water samples
are presented in Table-3.6.2 and Table-3.6.3.
TABLE-3.6.2 (A)
SURFACE WATER QUALITY
Sr. No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Parameter
PH
Colour
Conductivity
Total Dissolved Solids
Dissolved Oxygen
BOD ( 3 days at 27oC)
COD
Total Hardness as CaCo3
Total Alkalinity as CaCo3
Calcium as Ca
Magnesium as Mg
Chloride as Cl
Residual free chlorine
Phosphate as PO4
Sulphate as SO4-Fluorides as FNitrates as NO3
Sodium as Na
Potassium as K
Total Boron as B
Cyanides as CN
Phenolic compound
Oil and grease
Cadmium as Cd
Arsenic as As
Copper as Cu
Lead as Pb
Iron as Fe
Chromium as Cr
Selenium as Se
Zinc as Zn
Aluminium as Al
Mercury as Hg
SAR
Insecticides
Anionic detergents as MBAS
Total Coliforms
Units
Hazen units
S/cm
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
MPN/ 100 ml
SW1
8.0
4
338
225
5.2
<3
38.4
166
162
49.3
10.4
17.0
<0.2
<0.1
4.0
0.1
0.13
7.6
5.9
0.08
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
2.86
<0.05
<0.01
0.02
2.07
<0.001
0.26
Absent
<0.2
7
SW2
7.8
3
192
142
5.6
<3
38.4
107
92
28.4
8.7
11.3
<0.2
<0.1
1.7
0.2
0.65
1.3
0.2
<0.01
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.08
<0.05
<0.01
<0.01
0.07
<0.001
0.05
Absent
<0.2
6
SW3
7.5
3
260
169
5.4
<3
38.4
116
102
32.4
8.6
19.9
<0.2
<0.1
0.9
0.2
0.5
5.5
0.7
0.08
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.04
<0.05
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.001
0.22
Absent
<0.2
9
SW4
7.8
2
337
221
5.8
<3
38.4
164
136
54.2
6.8
21.2
<0.2
<0.1
1.7
0.2
0.3
1.7
0.7
<0.01
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.09
<0.05
<0.01
<0.01
0.11
<0.001
0.06
Absent
<0.2
11
$ Limits not specified as per IS code,
C3-38

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.6.2 (B)
SURFACE WATER QUALITY
Sr. No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Parameter
PH
Colour
Conductivity
Total Dissolved Solids
Dissolved Oxygen
BOD ( 3 days at 27oC)
COD
Total Hardness as CaCo3
Total Alkalinity as CaCo3
Calcium as Ca
Magnesium as Mg
Chloride as Cl
Residual free chlorine
Phosphate as PO4
Sulphate as SO4-Fluorides as FNitrates as NO3
Sodium as Na
Potassium as K
Total Boron as B
Cyanides as CN
Phenolic compound
Oil and grease
Cadmium as Cd
Arsenic as As
Copper as Cu
Lead as Pb
Iron as Fe
Chromium as Cr
Selenium as Se
Zinc as Zn
Aluminium as Al
Mercury as Hg
SAR
Insecticides
Anionic detergents as MBAS
Total Coliforms
Units
Hazen units
S/cm
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
MPN/ 100 ml
SW5
7.6
5
162
105
5.4
<3
19.2
69.0
56.0
18.6
5.4
15.2
<0.2
<0.1
3.5
0.1
0.3
5.5
0.8
<0.01
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.32
<0.05
<0.01
<0.01
0.28
<0.001
0.29
Absent
<0.2
10
SW6
7.3
4
255
166
5.8
<3
38.4
118.0
95.0
30.5
10.2
18.4
<0.2
<0.1
6.3
0.3
0.4
4.3
1.0
0.05
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.21
<0.05
<0.01
<0.01
0.16
<0.001
0.17
Absent
<0.2
8
SW7
7.5
4
210
138
5.6
<3
38.4
97.0
80.0
28.0
6.5
16.2
<0.2
<0.1
2.1
0.2
0.4
3.8
0.8
<0.01
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.19
<0.05
<0.01
<0.01
0.15
<0.001
0.17
Absent
<0.2
6
SW8
7.9
3
395
261
5.5
<3
19.2
177.0
148.0
52.4
11.2
28.8
<0.2
<0.1
8.9
0.4
0.7
9.8
1.2
0.11
<0.02
<0.001
<0.1
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.65
<0.05
<0.01
<0.01
0.54
<0.001
0.32
Absent
<0.2
12
$ Limits not specified as per IS code,
C3-39

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.6.3(A)
GROUND WATER QUALITY
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Parameter
IS:10500
Limits
GW1
GW2
GW3
GW4
Units
6.5 8.5
5 (25)
Agreeable
Unobjectionable
$
5 (10)
500 (2000)
Hazen
uS/cm
NTU
mg/l
7.29
4
Agreeable
UO
362
2
222
6.48
3
Agreeable
UO
403
3
246
5.97
2
Agreeable
UO
190
4
118
7.31
3
Agreeable
UO
310
2
202
300 (600)
mg/l
157
157
91
145
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
pH
Colour(Hazen units)
Taste
Odour
Conductivity
Turbidity (NTU)
Total Dissolve solids
Total Hardness as
CaCO3
Total Alkalinity
Calcium as Ca
Magnesium as Mg
Residual Chlorine
Boron
Chloride as Cl
Sulphate as SO4
Fluorides as FNitrates as NO3
Sodium as Na
Potassium as K
Phenolic Compounds
Cyanides
Anionic Detergents
Mineral Oil
Cadmium as Cd
Arsenic as As
Copper as Cu
Lead as Pb
Manganese as Mn
Iron as Fe
Chromium as Cr6+
Selenium as Se
Zinc as Zn
Aluminium as Al
Mercury as Hg
Pesticides
E-coli(Nos/100 ml)
200 (600)
75 (200)
30 (100)
0.2 min
1
250 (1000)
200 (400)
1.0 (1.5)
45 (NR)
$
$
0.001 (0.002)
0.05 (NR)
0.2 (1.0)
0.01 (0.03)
0.003 (NR)
0.01 (NR)
0.05 (1.5)
0.05 (NR)
0.1 (0.3)
0.3 (1.0)
0.05 (NR)
0.01(NR)
5 (15)
0.03 (0.2)
0.001 (NR)
Absent
Absent
147.6
41.8
12.7
<0.2
0.04
14.2
1.2
<0.1
1.75
5.6
1.7
<0.001
<0.02
<0.2
<0.01
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.016
<0.05
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.001
Absent
Absent
116.2
48.6
8.6
<0.2
0.02
36.9
6.0
<0.1
8.41
8.2
2.4
<0.001
<0.02
<0.2
<0.01
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
4.59
<0.05
<0.01
0.15
0.60
<0.001
Absent
Absent
54.8
23.6
7.8
<0.2
0.07
25.5
2.2
<0.1
10.9
3.0
1.3
<0.001
<0.02
<0.2
<0.01
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.33
<0.05
<0.01
1.59
0.09
<0.001
Absent
Absent
136.0
33.8
14.6
<0.2
0.01
11.3
2.4
<0.1
8.6
4.1
1.5
<0.001
<0.02
<0.2
<0.01
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.03
<0.05
<0.01
0.04
0.07
<0.001
Absent
Absent
37
Coliform Organisms
10
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
MPN/
100 ml
<2
<2
<2
<2
Limits not specified as per IS code
C3-40

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.6.3 (B)
GROUND WATER QUALITY
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
$
Parameter
pH
Colour(Hazen units)
Taste
Odour
Conductivity
Turbidity (NTU)
Total Dissolve solids
Total Hardness as
CaCO3
Total Alkalinity
Calcium as Ca
Magnesium as Mg
Residual Chlorine
Boron
Chloride as Cl
Sulphate as SO4
Fluorides as FNitrates as NO3
Sodium as Na
Potassium as K
Phenolic
Compounds
Cyanides
Anionic Detergents
Mineral Oil
Cadmium as Cd
Arsenic as As
Copper as Cu
Lead as Pb
Manganese as Mn
Iron as Fe
Chromium as Cr6+
Selenium as Se
Zinc as Zn
Aluminium as Al
Mercury as Hg
Pesticides
E-coli(Nos/100 ml)
Coliform Organisms
IS:10500
Limits
6.5 8.5
5 (25)
Agreeable
Unobjectionable
$
5 (10)
500 (2000)
300 (600)
Units
GW5
GW6
GW7
GW8
Hazen
uS/cm
NTU
mg/l
mg/l
6.89
2
Agreeable
UO
690
3
448
330
7.40
3
Agreeable
UO
348
2
226
153
5.63
6
Agreeable
UO
119
16
76
45
7.17
3
Agreeable
UO
382
2
248
173
200 (600)
75 (200)
30 (100)
0.2 min
1
250 (1000)
200 (400)
1.0 (1.5)
45 (NR)
$
$
0.001 (0.002)
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
246
94.7
22.7
<0.2
0.01
59.6
1.1
<0.1
30.9
2.2
0.4
152
40.8
12.3
<0.2
<0.01
17.0
1.3
<0.1
8.86
7.1
6.5
29.4
11.8
3.8
<0.2
<0.01
22.7
0.9
<0.1
4.52
7.4
1.1
148
42.6
16.2
<0.2
0.07
22.7
1.7
<0.1
18.2
4.1
0.4
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
<0.001
0.05 (NR)
0.2 (1.0)
0.01 (0.03)
0.003 (NR)
0.01 (NR)
0.05 (1.5)
0.05 (NR)
0.1 (0.3)
0.3 (1.0)
0.05 (NR)
0.01(NR)
5 (15)
0.03 (0.2)
0.001 (NR)
Absent
Absent
10
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
<0.02
<0.2
<0.01
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.051
<0.05
<0.01
0.52
0.051
<0.001
Absent
Absent
<0.02
<0.2
<0.01
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.16
<0.05
<0.01
0.23
0.1
<0.001
Absent
Absent
<0.02
<0.2
<0.01
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.08
12.9
<0.05
<0.01
2.23
0.83
<0.001
Absent
Absent
<0.02
<0.2
<0.01
<0.003
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
<0.01
0.07
<0.05
<0.01
0.24
0.09
<0.001
Absent
Absent
<2
<2
<2
<2
MPN/100
ml
Limits not specified as per IS code
C3-41

Chapter-3
3.6.4
Observations
3.6.4.1 Surface water quality

Pre-monsoon season, 2015
The analysis results indicate the pH range of 7.3 to 8.0 and is observed to be
within the desirable limit of 6.5 to 8.5.
The total hardness is in the range of 69 to 177 mg/l and is observed to be within
the permissible limit of 600 mg/l. The total hardness beyond the desirable limit of
300 mg/l causes encrustation in water supply structure and adverse effects on
domestic use.
The iron concentration is found to be in the range of 0.04 to 2.86 mg/l.
The chlorides concentration is in the range of 11.3 to 28.8 mg/l, and is observed
to be within the permissible limit of 1000 mg/l, beyond the desirable limit of 250
mg/l, taste, corrosion and palatability are affected.
The fluoride concentration is in the range of less than 0.1 to 0.4 mg/l, and is
observed to be within the desirable limit of 1.5 mg/l, high fluoride may cause
fluorosis.
3.6.4.2 Ground water quality
The analysis results indicate the pH range of 5.63 to 7.4 and it is observed to be
within the desirable limit of 6.5 to 8.5, beyond this range water will affect the
mucous membrane and/or water supply system.
The total hardness is in the range of 45 to 330 mg/l, and is observed to be within
the desirable limit of 300 mg/l at all locations except one location. The total
hardness beyond the desirable limit causes encrustation in water supply structure
and adverse effects on domestic use.
The iron concentration is found to be in the range of 0.016 to 12.9 mg/l, and is
observed to be within the desirable limit of 0.3 mg/l at all locations except three
locations. Beyond the desirable limit taste/appearance are affected, has adverse
effect on domestic uses and water supply structures, and promotes iron bacteria.
The chlorides concentration is in the range of 11.3 to 59.6 mg/l, and is observed
to be within the desirable limit of 250 mg/l at all locations. Beyond this limit,
taste, corrosion and palatability are affected.
The fluoride concentration is less than 0.1 mg/l, and is observed to be within the
desirable limit of 1.5 mg/l at all locations, high fluoride may cause fluorosis.
C3-42

Chapter-3
3.7
Noise Levels Survey

The environmental assessment of noise from the construction activity and
vehicular traffic can be undertaken by taking into consideration various factors
like potential damage to hearing, physiological responses, and annoyance and
general community responses.
The impact of noise sources on surrounding community depends on:
Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in
nature). It can be observed that steady noise is not as annoying as one which is
continuously varying in loudness;
The time of day at which noise occurs, for example high noise levels at night in
residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance; and
The location of the noise source, with respect to noise sensitive land use, which
determines the loudness and period of exposure.
The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from Noise
Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) to annoyance depending on loudness of noise. The
environmental impact assessment of noise from the construction activity at steel
plant site and vehicular traffic can be undertaken by taking into consideration
various factors like potential damage to hearing, physiological responses, and
annoyance and general community responses. The main objective of noise
monitoring in the study area is to establish the baseline noise levels, and assess
the impact of the total noise expected to be generated by the operation of the
proposed pellet plant.
3.7.1
Identification of Sampling Locations

A preliminary reconnaissance survey has been undertaken to identify the major
noise generating sources in and around the mine lease area. Noise at different
noise generating sources has been identified based on the activities in the village
area and ambient noise due to traffic.
The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of ambient noise levels
in the study area. The noise levels at each location were recorded for 24 hours. The
environment setting of noise monitoring locations in eight areas is given in Table3.7.1 and shown in Figure-3.7.1.
TABLE-3.7.1
DETAILS OF NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS
Location
Code
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
Location
Project Site
Nagarnar village
Amrapathi Ghata
Churagan
Pirinji
Chandili
Chowkawada
Amaguda
Madpal
Distance w.r.t.
Proposed
Boundary (km)
1.8
4.6
Direction from
Proposed
Boundary
NNW
N
3.8
2.2
1.4
2.8
4.8
NE
E
S
SW
WNW
Environmental Setting
Core Zone
Rural/Residential Area
Rural/Residential Area
Rural/Residential
Rural/Residential
Rural/Residential
Rural/Residential
Rural/Residential
Area
Area
Area
Area
Area
C3-43

Chapter-3
3.7.2
Method of Monitoring
Sound Pressure Level (SPL) measurements were measured at all locations. The
readings were taken for every hour for 24 hours. The day noise levels have been
monitored during 6 am to 10 pm and night levels during 10 pm to 6 am at all the
locations covered in 10 km radius of the study area.
3.7.3
Methodology of Data Generation
3.7.3.1 Instrument Used for Monitoring

Noise levels were measured using integrated sound level meter manufactured by
Quest Technologies, USA (Model No.2900). The integrating sound level meter is
an integrating/ logging type with Octave filter attachment (model OB-100) with
frequency range of 31.5 to 16000 Hz. This instrument is capable of measuring the
Sound Pressure Level (SPL), Leq and octave band frequency analysis.
3.7.3.2 Method of Monitoring
Noise level monitoring was carried out continuously for 24 hours with one hour
interval starting at 06.00 hrs to 06.00 hrs next day. The noise levels were
monitored on working days only and Saturdays, Sundays and public holidays were
not monitored. During each hour, Leq were directly computed by the instrument
based on the sound pressure levels. Lday (Ld), Lnight (Ln) and Ldn values were
computed using corresponding hourly Leq of day and night respectively. Monitoring
was carried out at A response and fast mode.
3.7.3.3 Parameters Measured During Monitoring
For noise levels measured over a given period of time, it is possible to describe
important features of noise using statistical quantities. This is calculated using the
percent of the time certain noise levels are exceeding the time interval. The
notation for the statistical quantities of noise levels are described below:
L10 is the noise level exceeded 10 per cent of the time;
L50 is the noise level exceeded 50 per cent of the time; and
L90 is the noise level exceeded 90 per cent of the time.
Equivalent Sound Pressure Level (Leq):
The Leq is the equivalent continuous sound level, which is equivalent to the same
sound energy as the actual fluctuating sound measured in the same period. This
is necessary because sound from noise source often fluctuates widely during a
given period of time. This is calculated from the following equation:
( L10 _L90 ) 2
Leq = L50 +
60
Lday is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during
day (6 am to 10 pm).
C3-44

Chapter-3
Lnight is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during
night (10 pm to 6 am).
Day-Night Sound Level (Ldn):
The noise rating developed for community noise from all sources is the Day-Night
Sound Level (Ldn). It is similar to a 24-hr equivalent sound level except that during
night time period (10 pm to 6 am) a 10 dB (A) weighting penalty is added to the
instantaneous sound level before computing the 24-hr average.
This night time penalty is added to account for the fact that the noise during night,
when people are usually in sleep, is judged as more annoying than the same noise
during the day time.
The Ldn for a given location in a community may be calculated from the hourly Leqs,
by the following equation.
L dn = 10 log{ 1 / 24[16(10Ld / 10 ) + 8(10(Ln +10 ) / 10 )]}
Where Ld is the equivalent sound level during the day time (6 am to 10 pm) and Ln
is the equivalent sound level during the night time (10 pm to 6 am).
3.7.4
The statistical analysis is done for measured noise levels at eight locations. The
parameters are analyzed for L10, L50, L90, Leq, Lday, Lnight, and Ldn. The statistical
analysis results are given in Table-3.7.2.
3.7.5
Observations
Day time Noise Levels (Lday)
The day time noise levels at all the locations were ranged in between 39.6 to 49.8
dB(A). The minimum value (39.6 dB (A)) was recorded at Pirinji Village (N4) and
the maximum value (49.8 dB (A)) was recorded at Chanditi village (N5).
Night time Noise Levels (Lnight)
The night time noise levels were ranged in between 35.6 to 43.7 dB (A). The
minimum value (35.6 dB (A)) was recorded at Pirinji Village (N4) and the
maximum value (43.7 dB (A)) was recorded at Nagarnar village (N2).
TABLE-3.7.2
NOISE LEVELS [dB (A)] IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. No.
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
Location
Project Site
Nagarnar village
Pirinji
Chandili
Chowkawada
Amaguda
Madpal
L10
47.5
50.4
42.7
41.8
50.7
47.1
46.5
49.1
L50
43.8
46.5
38.9
38.2
46.8
43.4
42.9
45.3
L90
40.2
42.7
35.4
34.5
43.0
39.8
39.2
41.8
Leq
44.7
47.5
39.8
39.1
47.8
44.3
43.8
46.2
Lday
45.4
49.4
40.4
39.6
49.8
44.8
44.3
47.0
Lnight
41.2
43.7
37.4
35.6
42.9
40.9
40.2
42.8
Ldn
48.5
52.2
44.4
42.9
52.1
48.9
48.2
50.8
C3-45

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.7.1
NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS
C3-46

Chapter-3
3.8
Soil Characteristics
The term soil refers to the loose material composed of weathered rock and other
minerals in addition to partially decayed organic matter that covers large parts of
the earth's surface. Soil is an indispensable component of the terrestrial ecosystem.
Hence, the impact of the construction activity on soil needs to be properly evaluated
to plan the mitigation measures wherever required. Soil formation is influenced
mainly by climate, geology and other biotic interactions. Agriculture is the main
occupation of people in the study area.
Hence, it is essential to identify the impacts in the study area on the soil
characteristics, which would affect the agricultural, and afforestation potential.
Accordingly, an assessment of the baseline soil quality has been carried out.
3.8.1 Data Generation

For studying soil quality of the region, sampling locations were selected
representing various land use conditions and samples were collected to assess the
existing soil conditions in and around the project area.
The samples were collected by ramming a core-cutter into the soil up to a depth
of 90 cm. The present study on the soil quality establishes the baseline
characteristics and identifies the incremental concentrations if any, due to the
proposed pellet plant. The sampling locations have been identified with the
following objectives:
To determine the baseline soil characteristics of the study area;
To determine the impact of construction and operation of the project on soil
characteristics; and
To determine the impact on soils more importantly from agricultural
productivity point of view.
Eight locations within 10 km radius of the project site were selected for soil
sampling in pre-monsoon season 2015. At each location, soil samples were
collected from three different depths viz. 30 cm, 60 cm and 90 cm.
The samples were then packed in a polythene plastic bag and sealed. The
samples from three different depths were homogenized and then the samples
were analyzed.
The details of the sampling locations are given in Table-3.8.1 and are depicted in
Figure-3.8.1.
TABLE-3.8.1
DETAILS OF SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Code
Location
S1
S2
S3
S4
Project Site
Nagarnar village
Pirinji
Distance to w.r.t Project

Boundary (km)
1.8
4.6
3.8
Direction to w.r.t
Project Boundary
NNW
N
NE
C3-47

Chapter-3
Code
S5
S6
S7
S8
Location
Distance to w.r.t Project

Boundary (km)
2.2
1.4
2.8
4.8
Chandili
Chowkawada
Amaguda
Madpal
Direction to w.r.t
Project Boundary
E
S
SW
WNW
3.8.2 Baseline Soil Status

The pre-monsoon season soil analysis results are presented in Table-3.8.2.
These results are compared with the standard soil classification given in Table3.8.3.
TABLE-3.8.2
SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS
Sr.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Parameter
pH
Conductivity
Texture
UOM
-s/cm
--
S1
5.42
32.6
Clay
28
27
45
1.01
825
S2
6.03
61.4
Clay
loam
22
24
54
1.21
755
S3
6.15
82.5
Clay
loam
24
24
52
1.01
645
Sand
Silt
Clay
Bulk Density
Exchangeable
Calcium as Ca
Exchangeable
Magnesium as Mg
Exchangeable
Sodium as Na
Sodium
Absorption Ratio
Available Nitrogen
as N
Available
Phosphorous as P
Available
Potassium as K
Organic Carbon
Organic Matter
Water soluble
chloride as Cl
Water soluble
sulphates as SO4
Aluminum
Total Iron
Manganese
Boron
Zinc
%
%
%
g/cc
mg/kg
mg/kg
207
237
mg/kg
121.5
S6
7.45
84.3
Clay
S7
7.32
92.5
Clay
S8
6.25
58.5
Clay
36
16
48
1.11
2255
S5
6.26
45.6
Clay
loam
26
18
56
1.17
905
31
27
42
1.13
2345
37
18
45
1.05
2275
35
16
49
1.17
807
407
565
402
755
676
335
105
142.0
155
101.4
134.5
129.6
115.4
0.98
0.85
1.08
0.76
0.71
0.62
0.61
0.86
kg/hac
267
286
336
447
297
472
386
307
kg/hac
7.6
7.3
8.2
3.5
2.6
4.8
7.6
5.6
kg/hac
185
247
410
556
275
196
187
195
%
%
mg/kg
0.71
1.66
74.6
0.91
1.95
35.7
0.45
1.36
141.3
0.51
1.21
36.2
0.56
1.32
75.4
0.72
1.75
135.6
0.65
1.64
71.6
0.87
1.85
73.4
mg/kg
34.2
59.4
46.8
37.4
31.4
52.6
84.9
48.5
11.6
41.3
12.6
2.6
5.42
125.0
203.4
13.1
3.4
6.03
156
87.6
14.5
4.1
6.15
45.5
93.4
11.9
5.6
6.54
73.4
62.5
9.8
2.4
6.26
17.9
54.6
10.3
4.1
7.45
20.3
64.9
11.2
5.6
7.32
135.0
196.9
15.6
4.3
6.25
%
%
mg/kg
mg/kg
mg/kg
S4
6.54
75.6
Clay
C3-48

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.8.1
SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS
C3-49

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.8.3
STANDARD SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Sr. No.
1
Soil Test
pH
Salinity
Electrical
(ppm)
(1 ppm = 640 s/cm)
Organic Carbon
Nitrogen (Kg/ha)
Phosphorus (Kg/ha)
Potassium (Kg/ha)
Conductivity
Classification
<4.5 Extremely acidic
4.51- 5.00 Very strongly acidic
5.00-5.50 Strong acidic
5.51-6.0 moderately acidic
6.01-6.50 slightly acidic
6.51-7.30 Neutral
7.31-7.80 slightly alkaline
7.81-8.50 moderately alkaline
8.51-9.0 strongly alkaline
9.01 very strongly alkaline
Upto 1.00 Average
1.01-2.00 harmful to germination
2.01-3.00 harmful to crops (sensitive
to salts)
Upto 0.2: very less
0.21-0.4: less
0.41-0.5 medium,
0.51-0.8: on an average sufficient
0.81-1.00: sufficient
>1.0 more than sufficient
Upto 50 very less
51-100 less
101-150 good
151-300 Better
>300 more than sufficient
Upto 15 very less
16-30 less
31-50 medium,
51-65 on an average sufficient
66-80 sufficient
0 -120 very less
120-180 less
181-240 medium
241-300 average
301-360 better
Source: Hand Book of Agriculture, Indian Council of Agricultural Research
Observations of the Results

It has been observed that the pH of the soil ranged from 5.42 to 7.45 indicating
that the soils are strong acidic to neutral in nature. The soil in the study area
ranges between clay and clay loam. The bulk density of the soil ranges between
1.01 to 1.21 gm/cc. The electrical conductivity was observed to be in the range of
32.6 to 92.5 S/cm.
C3-50

Chapter-3
The nitrogen concentrations are in the range of 267 to 472 kg/hac indicating that
soils have better to more than sufficient quantities of nitrogen. The phosphorous
concentrations are in the range of 2.6 to 7.6 kg/hac indicating that soils have
very less category of phosphorus.
The potassium concentrations range between 185 to 556 kg/hac, which indicate
that the soils have very less to better quantity of potassium.
3.9
Ecology and Biodiversity
3.9.1
Introduction
A natural ecosystem is a structural and functional unit of nature. It has
components, which exist in harmony and survive by interdependence. Ecosystem
has self-sustaining ability and controls the number of organisms at any level by
cybernetic rules. The effect of this is that an ecosystem does not become
imbalanced.
Unfortunately, there are very few examples of perfectly natural ecosystems on
earth, because man influences most of them. Man existed earlier also, but as long
as he lived as part of nature, he did not create a disturbance, because nature
provides for needs of everyone, but not for greed.
Development is must for any nation, however, the development needs a price.
The price is paid by one kind of people and natural biota and other people reap
fruits of prosperity. The disparity between the sufferers and enjoyers increases.
The main objective of the ecological survey is aimed to assess the existing flora
and faunal components in the study area.
An ecological survey of the study area was conducted particularly with reference
to the listing of species and assessment of the existing baseline ecological
(Terrestrial and Aquatic ecosystem) conditions in the study area. Considering the
rich bio-diversity of organisms and their role in productivity and their importance in
human livelihood, it is vital to protect and safeguard these dynamic ecosystems.
3.9.2
Objectives of Ecological Studies

The present study was undertaken with the following objectives:
To assess the nature and distribution of vegetation in and around the project
site;
To assess the distribution of animal life spectra;
To understand the productivity of the water bodies;
To asses the biodiversity and to understand the resource potential; and
To ascertain migratory routes of fauna and possibility of breeding grounds.
3.9.3
Methodology Adopted for the Survey

To achieve the above objectives a detailed study of the area was undertaken in 10km radius area with the proposed project site as its center. The different methods
adopted were as follows:
C3-51

Chapter-3
Compilation of secondary data with respect to the study area from published
literature and Government agencies;
Generation of primary data by undertaking systematic ecological studies in the
area;
Discussion with local people so as to elicit information about local plants and
animals.
The present report gives the review of published secondary data and the results of
field sampling conducted during Pre-Monsoon season in the month of January 2015
3.9.4
Review of Secondary Published Data

Of the total project site of 721.58 ha, about 403 ha has already allocated to NMDC
by the State Government. The project site comprises of patches of barren land is
sparsely vegetated with Lantana camara, Calotropis spp, Croton spp, Zizyphus spp,
Xanthium straumarium. There is no reserve forest land in the study area or notified
forest area.
The plant species observed in the greenbelt developed by NMDC were
Acacia auriculiformis
Dalbergia sissoo
Eucalptus globulus
Emblica officinalis
Terminalia arjuna
Tectona grandis
Peltophorum pterocarpum
Azadirachta indica
Delonix regia
Leucaena leucocephala
Australian Acacia
Shisham
Niligiri
Amla
Arjuna
Teak
Copper Pod/ Peltophorum
Neem
False -Flame of the Forest
Subabul
The project site under accquistion process

The part of the project site for which acquisition is under process has following land
uses:
Waste lands in the project site to be acquired have same features as described
under study area
The study area can be roughly divided in to plain and undulating small hillocks, plain
area, which constitutes major portion of the study area.
The most part of the study area is barren or covered with Northern Tropical Moist
Deciduous Forests, but excessive anthropogenic influences at some locations have
caused degradation of these forests to larger extent. The plain areas in non forest
areas are best utilized for paddy cultivation during Kharif season, while forests on
the plains are same as that on hill slopes. The plant species commonly found in the
core and buffer area is given in Table 3.9.1and Table 3.9.2 respectively.
C3-52

Chapter-3
TABLE 3.9.1
FLORA IN THE CORE AREA
Sr. No
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
2
37
38
39
3
40
41
42
Scientific Name
Trees
Anogeissus latifolia
Adina cordifolia
Aegle marmelos
Acacia catechu
Anthocephalus cadamba
Ailanthus excellsa
Azadirachta indica
Albizzia lebbeck
Albizzia procera
Bauhinia racemosa
Bambusa arunduncea
Buchnania lanzan
Bridelia retusa
Bombax ceiba
Boswellia serrata
Cordia dichotoma
Dalbergia latifolia
Dillenia pentagyna
Diospyros melanoxylon
Diospyros montana
Dendrocalamus strictus
Ficus bengalensis
Ficus glomerata
Ficus racemosa
Ficus religiosa
Ficus tomentosa
Morinda tinctoria
Mangifera indica
Hardwikia binata
Terminalia bellirica
Shorea robusta
Terminalia arjuna
Holoptelia integrefolia
Pongamia pinnata
Largerstroemia parviflora
Holarrhena antidysentrica
Shrubs
Lantana camara
Carissa caronda
Calotropis gigantea
Grasses
Cynodon dactylon
Vetiver zizanoides
Sorghum halepense
Common Name
Dhaora
Haldu
Bel
Khair
Kadamba
Maharukh
Neem
Kala Siris
Safed Siris
Apta
Bans
Chironji
Kassai
Semal, Silk Cotton Tree
Salai Guggal
Lasoda
Shisham
Kalla
Kendu
Bistendu
Bans
Bargad
Gular
Dimiri
Peepal
Sonapakad
Aal
Aam
Anjan
Behara
Sal
Arjuna
Chirol
Karanj
Lendia
Kutaja
Putus
Karonda
Milk Weed
Dharbha, Doob
Khus Khus Grass
Barru
C3-53

Chapter-3
TABLE 3.9.2
FLORA IN THE BUFFER AREA
Sr. No
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Scientific Name
Trees
Alstonia scholaris
Anogeissus latifolia
Adina cordifolia
Aegle marmelos
Acacia catechu
Anthocephalus cadamba
Ailanthus excellsa
Azadirachta indica
Albizzia lebbeck
Albizzia procera
Bauhinia racemosa
Bambusa arunduncea
Buchnania lanzan
Bauhinia variegata
Bridelia retusa
Bombax ceiba
Boswellia serrata
Cassia fistula
Casearia elliptica
Citrus medica
Cordia dichotoma
Careya arborea
Cocos nucifera
Dalbergia latifolia
Dillenia pentagyna
Diospyros melanoxylon
Diospyros montana
Dendrocalamus strictus
Ficus bengalensis
Ficus glomerata
Ficus racemosa
Ficus religiosa
Ficus tomentosa
Morinda tinctoria
Mangifera indica
Hardwikia binata
Terminalia tomentosa
Terminalia bellirica
Kydia calycina
Zizyphus mauritiana
Chloroxylon swietiana
Pterocarpus marsupium
Shorea robusta
Wrightia tinctoria
Grewia tiliaefolia
Terminalia arjuna
Emblica officinalis
Holoptelia integrefolia
Common Name
Chanchara
Dhaora
Haldu
Bel
Khair
Kadamba
Maharukh
Neem
Kala Siris
Safed Siris
Apta
Bans
Chironji
Kanchnar
Kassai
Semal, Silk Cotton Tree
Salai Guggal
Amaltas
Gilchi
Nimbu
Lasoda
Kumbhi
Narial
Shisham
Kalla
Kendu
Bistendu
Bans
Bargad
Gular
Dimiri
Peepal
Sonapakad
Aal
Aam
Anjan
Asan
Behara
Barabga
Ber
Bhirra
Bija Sal
Sal
Dudhi
Dhaman
Arjuna
Amla
Chirol
C3-54

Chapter-3
Sr. No
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
2
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
89
80
81
82
Scientific Name
Cassia siamea
Terminalia chebula
Nycanthes arbor-tristis
Tamarindus indica
Syzizium cuminii
Pongamia pinnata
Garuga pinnata
Phoenix sylvestris
Sterculia urens
Schleichera oleosa
Gardenia latifolia
Mitragyna parviflora
Madhuca indica
Soymida febrifuga
Largerstroemia parviflora
Lannea coromandelica
Vitex negundo
Tectona grandis
Xylia xylocarpa
Borassus flabellifer
Alangium salvifolium
Holarrhena antidysentrica
Annona squamosa
Shrubs
Lantana camara
Flaucortia indica
Carissa caronda
Asparagus racemosus
Saccharum officinarum
Dodonea viscoa
Calotropis gigantea
Grasses
Cynodon dactylon
Vetiver zizanoides
Cymbopogan martini
Andropogon pumilius
Sorghum halepense
Imperata cylindrica
Common Name
Cassia
Haritaki
Harsingar
Imli
Jamun
Karanj
Kekad
Khajur
Kulu
Kusum
Papra
Kaim
Mahua
Rohan
Lendia
Jingan
Morphal
Teak
Suria
Tad
Ankol, Akol
Kutaja
Sitaphal
Putus, Lantana
Kakai
Karonda
Shatavari
Ganna, Sugarcane
Kharata
Milk Weed
Dharbha, Doob
Khus Khus Grass
Rusa
Diwartan
Barru
Chhir
Details of Forest Land in Study Area (10km Radius)

Climax vegetation is relatively stable and capable of adjusting itself to the minor
fluctuations in the environment. An area containing more than 20 % of Sal is known
as Sal forests and if the proportion of miscellaneous species is 20% and above it is
designated as miscellaneous forests. An area containing 500 alive culms per hectare
irrespective of age, and size and condition of culms, is known as Bamboo forests.
Ecologically, Sal is a sub-climax stage. The primary succession very rarely proceeds
to the climax type without disturbances. In most of the areas, progression has been
altered to a more or less stable forest type i.e sub-climax under the prevailing
C3-55

Chapter-3
conditions due to the biotic factors like excessive grazing, repeated burning, over
felling etc. In the Cental Bastar Division the major portion of the forest plan is
covered with Sal, which mostly lies on the plateau. In the hilly region Sal is confined
to narrow valleys and on lower slopes. The rest of hill slopes are covered with mixed
tropical deciduous forests. Teak is found over a very small area in the hill ranges,
while it is nearly absent on the plateau. Similarly bamboos are in low intensity on
plateau and they are found gregariously only in the hills. The Sal forests in the area
may be loosely said to be reaching the Climatic Climax for the most part of the
study area.
As per the revised classification of forest types by Champion and Seth (1968), the
forest types in the this region can be classified as follows:
Sal Forests
Northern Moist Peninsular High Level Sal=3C.C2 e (I)
Northern Moist Peninsular Valley Sal= 3C.C2e (iii)
Teak Forests
Southern Moist Deciduous Slightly Moist Teak= 3B/C1c.
Mixed Forests
Southern Moist Mixed Deciduous Forest = 3B/C2
3.9.4.1 Sal Forests
The major portion of the forest area is covered with sal forest, which lies mostly
on plateau and forms extensive patches, In the hilly region, Sal is confined to
narrow valleys and on lower slopes, where moisture and edaphic conditions are
favourable. Wherever conditions become too moist or too dry as along big nallahs
and on the higher slopes sal is replaced by mixed forest. Average density of sal
varies from 0.5 to 0.8. Regeneration is generally inadequate.
Sal forests of Central Bastar forest division can be described under three subtypes, plateau sub-type, Hill sub-type and under stocked and degraded sub-type.
Sal Forest on the Plateau
Shorea robustra (Sal) occurs on sandy loam and lateritic soils and definitely
avoids swampy areas or dry localities. The best Sal forests are found on Bastar
plateau, where as sometimes it is upto 50% of the crop in the over-wood. The sal
forests are generally good in quality. The sal forests also occur intermingled with
mixed forests or large grass blanks. Quality I and II Sal forests are generally
found over undulating ground having very gentle slope, deep sandy-sandy loam
and well-drained soil. It occurs major portion of Machkote, Kanger and Darbha
ranges (Kanger R.F). The quality III Sal forest is found in Barsur parts of
Turmigunda PF and Bakeli PF blocks of Geedham, Barsur ranges. The crop density
in well-stocked Sal forests varies from 0.6 to 0.8. The common associates of Sal
C3-56

Chapter-3
forests are Bija,saja, Haldu, Dhobin, Dhaora, Lendia, Aonla, Garari, Mahua,
Sewan, Kusum , Harra, Ghont, Bhila, Tinsa, Chhind and Doob are most common
in the under growth.
Sal Forest on Hilly Ranges
Sal forests in the hill ranges are found in patches in valleys, lower slopes and
sometimes higher slopes of the hills. In this type, large percentage is
miscellaneous species in the over wood as well as the under wood. Bamboos are
generally found in the under wood, which is either conspicuously absent or poorly
grown and scattered on the plateau. Sal percent ranges from 40 to 60 % of the
crop except on stretches of plains, where plateau sal is found. The common
association of
sal in this type are Bija (Pterocarpus marsupium ), Saja
(Terminalia tomentosa),Tinsa (Oogenia oojenisis), Kusum (Scherichera trijuga),
Dhaoda (Anogeissus latifolia), Mode (Lannea grandis), Tendu (Dispyros
melonoxylon), Chichwa (Albizia odorattissima), Dhobin (Dalbergia paniculata)
Semal (Salmalia malabarica), Lendia (Lagerstroemia parviflora)
Harra
(Terminalia chebula) Mahua (Madhuca latifolia) Bhilwa (Semicarpus anacardium)
Achar (Buchanania lanzan)
Aonal (Emblica officinalis) Ghont (Zizhuphus
xylophora) etc and incidence of Climbers like Shidi, Palasbel, Randatum and
Dioscoria species are more. Major portion of the forests consists of quality III, but
quality I and quality II is found over small areas. Quality IV sal is generally found
on the upper slopes of the hill where the soil has been impoverished by the
shifting cultivation in the past. Regeneration of sal is low as compared to that in
the plains. It is due to shrubby under growth and dense canopy in the hills.
Understocked and Degraded Sub-type
This sub-type includes sal forests, which were very good Sal forests in the past,
but due to intensive biotic interference have become degraded and open. As most
of the species found in these forests are good coppices, sal formed and pollarded
stems are seen all over the area. These areas contain good rootstock and natural
regeneration is mostly sparse and absent. This type is found in Metewada,
Sargipal, Kumdakote and Kakadapasar reserve forest blocks and Bersapal,
Mardom, Ulnar, Ksmi, Korta, Dabguda, Balenga, Dubey-Umargaon, Sadguda,
Markel, Ambaguda, Muchnar, Barsur, Kodripal, Govindpal and Nama protected
forest blocks. The common association of sal in this type are Bija (Adina
cordifolia), Saja (Terminalia tomentosa), Tinsa (Oogenia oojenisis), Kusum
(Scherichera
trijuga),
Dhaoda
(Anogeissus
latifolia),
Mode
(Lannea
grandis),Tendu (Dispyros melonoxylon), Chichwa(Albizia odorattissima),Dhobin
(Dalbergia paniculata) Semal (Salmalia malabarica), Lendia (Lagerstroemia
parviflora)
Harra (Terminalia chebula ) Mahua (Madhuca latifolia) Bhilwa
(Semicarpus anacardium) Achar (Buchanania lanzan) Aonal (Emblica officinalis)
Ghont (Zizhuphus xylophora) etc and incidence of Climbers like Shidi, Palasbel,
Randatum and Dioscoria sp.
C3-57

Chapter-3
3.9.4.2 Teak Forests
Alluvial Teak Forest
In this type of teak forest, the soil is generally deep and alluvial and is well
drained. It is more or less natural and is fit for the growth of both Sal and Teak.
This sub- type is found along the banks of Gudara river and Ganesh bahar nallah
in Central Bastar Division. General crop quality is M.P.II/III quality and in places
it approaches II quality. The crop density in general varies from 0.5 to 07. Teak
forms about 20% of the crop. The common associates are Bija (Pterocarpus
marsupium), Mundi (Mitragyna parviflora), Kusum (Schleichera trijuga), Lendia
(Lagerstroemia parviflora), Shisaham (Dalbergia sisso), Bhirra (Chloroxylon
sweitenia) Rohan (Soymida fabrifuga), Semal (Salmalia malabarica), Karra,
Tendu (Diospyros melanoxylon), Harra (Terminalia chebula), etc. The
undergrowth is generally dense and consists of Chipti (Desmodium latifolia),
Panwar (Cassia tora), Marophali (helicris isora), Ban tulasi (Eranthum
pulchellum), Sabai (Eulaliopsis binata) and Chhir (Imperata cylendrica). The
regeneration of Teak accounts lot difficulties, because of heavy growth of grasses
and the annual fires. Bamboo is also found in the understorey.
3.9.4.3 Mixed Forests
Mixed forests occupy major part of the survey area, mixed forests form
considerable patches inextricably mixed with sal forests. They occur on all types
of geological formations, topography and soils. In general the mixed forests can
be classified into four types:
Hill Type with Dense Bamboos
This sub-type generally occurs on all hill slopes and on undulated area of the
tract. The mixed forests with bamboos are characterized by the occurrence of
bamboo in the understorey. This type if chiefly found in small portion of Kanger,
Badekarka, Barsur, Koder, Jaimer, and Chitalnar reserve forest blocks and
Tumriguda protected forest blocks of central Bastar Forest division. The general
quality of crop is all India quality III with patches of II and III and IV a quality.
The density in general, varies from 0.4 to 0.8 Bamboo of I and II quality occurs
as understorey. The common associates area Dhaka (Anogeissus latifolia), Saja
(Terminalia tomentosa), Bija (Pterocarpus marsupium), Sal (Shorea robustra),
Haldu (Adina cordifolia), Jhingan (Lannea grandis), Kekad, Teak (Tectona
grandis), Kusum (Schleichera trijuga), Tinsa (Oogenia oojenesis), Shisham
(Dalbergia sisso), Chichwa (Albizzia odorattissima), Tendu (Diospyros
melonoxylon), Bahera (Terminalia beleraica), Bamboo (Bambosa arundanacea)
etc. The undergrowth cosnsits of Karchi (Zizyphus xylocarpa), Barrahar
(Moghania semialata), Gursukhi (Grewia hirsuta,) Phul-Bahari (Thysanolaena
maxima), Marophali (Helictris isora), Chiraita (Swertia angustifolia), Chhind,
Baibirang (Emblica robusta) etc. climbers are Mahul (Bauhinia vahlii) Palasbel
(Butea superba), Makor (Zizyphus sp), Ramdatoon (Smilax macrophyla) etc.
C3-58

Chapter-3
Hill Type with Scattered or Without Bamboos
The general differential between this type and one with dense bamboos is that
the former gives an appearance of dry forests and species like Salai, Saja,
Dhaora, Karra, Kullu, etc are more common. In this sub-type, the bamboos may
not be totally absent and a clump here and there may be noticed. The teak is
found scattered in a proportion of 5 to 10 percent only. In areas with outcrops of
big rocks, the quality of forest deteriorates to all India quality class IVa to IVb.
The type occurs along with dense bamboo dense forest type.
Plains Type with Scattered or Without Bamboos
These miscellaneous forests form fairly contiguous area surrounded by Sal
forests. The general quality of this type if forests are All India IV and the density
is generally low being only 0.5-0.7. Teak trees are sometimes seen along the
slopes near nallahs. Elsewhere they area practically absent many of these areas
have been under shifting cultivation in the past and frequently swept by fires.
Thus most of the regeneration gets killed, giving way to the preponderance of
grasses. These forests are unique in the fact that there is only one single storey
discernible. During the summer when the grasses are burnt due to repeated fires,
visibility in the forests increases manifolds. The commonest species in this type of
crop area Mokha (Scherebera seietenoides), Bhirra (Chloroxylon sweitenia),
Dhaora (Anogeissus latifolia), Saja (Terminalia tomentosa), Serha (Bauhinia
retusa), Bija (Pterocarpus marsupium), Tendu (Diospyros melanoxylon), Mahua
(Madhuca latifolia), Anjan (Hardwickia binata), Garari (Cleistanthus collinus),
Kumbhi (Careya arborea), Imli (Tamrindus indica), Khair (Acacia catechu) etc.
Bamboo sometimes occurs in the under-storey. The under growth consists of
Chhind Marophali (Helictris isora), Sabai Kansa (Saccharum spontanareum),
Harsingar (Nyctanthes arbortristis), Gursukhi (Grewia hirsuta) etc and common
climbers are Palasbel (Butea superba), Chilati (Acaica caesia), Randatoon (Smilax
marophyla), Mahul (Bauhina vahlii) and Amarabel (Cuscuta reflexa.)
Understocked and Degraded Sub-type
This type occurs mostly at the foothills, in the plains or on gently sloping grounds,
presumably, these appear to be the remnants of the past practises of shifting
cultivation. Such practices, obviously, led to frequent fires year after year
resulting in the growth of coarse grass. Such areas come under sub-climax stage
in such a condition by annual fires. These understocked or degraded forests are
kept in such a condition by biotic factors. In addition to them, there are areas,
which are flat with exposed Kankar, superficial quartz and eroded hills. These
areas adjoin the hills. The crop is of IV b quality and open, usually with less than
0.4 density. The common associates are poor quality Saja, Dhaora, Tendu,
Bhirra, Salai, Rohan, Mahua, and Achar. The grasses are generally not aggressive
and climbers are few. Reproduction of tree species is very scanty.
3.9.4.4 Bamboo Forests
Bamboo forest cover 63576.226 (40.15%) hectares area in Tongpal range in
Central Bastar.These bamboo forests occur mostly as second storey of Sal and
C3-59

Chapter-3
Miscellaneous forests. The bamboo forests are restricted to Kanger RF, Barsur RF,
Koder RF, Badekarke RF and Tumriguda, Bakeli, Bodhghat and Jaimer PF blocks.
An average clump contains 15 to 25 culms but on higher slopes containing 20 to
40 culms are seen. The general condition of the crop is satisfactory, but in many
areas bamboo working restricted only to the most accessible areas, the remote
higher steep slopes remain virtually unworked or partly worked.
3.9.5
Terrestrial Ecological Status: Primary Survey

A preliminary survey was made and four locations were selected for detailed study
within 10-km radius of the proposed plant. The selected locations are given in
Table-3.9.3 and are depicted in Figure-3.9.1.
TABLE-3.9.3
DETAILS OF TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Code
TE-1
TE-2
TE-3
TE-4
Name of the Area

Plant Site
Near Village Kasturi
Near Village Chandili
Near Village Amaguda
Direction
NW
E
SW
Distance From
Project Site (km)
0.8
2.2
2.8
1. Observing mammals, amphibians and reptiles, noting their calls, droppings,

burrows, pugmarks and other signs;
2. Enumeration of the plants in the study area.
3. Enumeration of the Phyto and Zoo plantkton in the study area.
3.9.5.5 Endangered Plants
The study area did not record the presence of any critically threatened species. The
records of Botanical Survey of India and Forest department also did not indicate
presence of any endangered and or vulnerable species in this area.
The forest blocks found in the study area along with their distance and directions
are given in Table-3.9.4.
C3-60

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.9.1
ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS
C3-61

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.9.4
FOREST BLOCKS IN THE STUDY AREA
Sl.No
1
2
3
4
Forest Area/ Nearest Location

Kanger Reserve Forest
Ulnar Reserve Forest
Kakadapasar Protected Forest
Chalnguda Protecetd Forest
Distance from
the project site
5.0
7.9
5.3
8.5
Direction
SE to S
NW
NW
NW
The forests in the study area are classified as Northern Tropical moist deciduous
forests, of them two are reserve forests and other two forests are protected forests
as listed above along with their distance from the project site.
3.9.6
Terrestrial Fauna and Ornithology
3.9.6.1 Review of Secondary Published Data

Environmental changes through deforestation, spreading urbanization and
destruction of habitats have been of alarmingly high magnitute during the recent
past. This has totally disturbed the balance between mortality and reproduction.
Some threatened faunal forms are biologically handicapped through an imbibed low
rate of reproduction by nature. Fragmentation of population also weakens the
vitality of the species due to rarity and normal reproduction process is thwarted
leading to extinction. Reserve and protected forest blocks are about 34.03% of total
geographic of the study area. Presence of wildlife could be observed during the
study period and also from information from local tribal inhabitants.
Wild animals are move from one place to another place in search of food, water and
other basic need. During the period, wild animals may visit the villages for search of
food.
National Park/Sanctuary
Pamedu, Kutudu, Kanger, Indravathi and Bairomgarh Wildlife sanctuary are present
in Bastar and Dantewada districts. Kanger Valley National park is about 31.5-km
from project on South east direction. All the other sanctuaries as listed above are
located beyond 50 km from the proposed plant site.
3.9.6.2 Primary Survey
Local/ Migratory Birds in Study Area
A number of local migratory and non-migratory birds arrive and depart at different
parts of the season adding their share to the noise, bustle and color of the bird
spectacle on the tank. Among the identified birds, the Indian myna, Common myna
are the local migratory birds, which are observed and are also reported in forest
department, working plans of Central Bastar Division. The area does not fall in the
migratory bird path within the 10-km radius of the study area. A detailed study was
conducted near Indravathii river, belt transect locations and phytosociological study
C3-62

Chapter-3
locations during study period and list of Fauna in core area and buffer area is
presented in Table 3.9.5 and Table 3.9.6 respectively.
TABLE 3.9.5
FAUNA IN THE CORE AREA
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
Technical Name
Aves
Corvus corvus
Corvus splendens
Turdoides striatus
Pycnonotus cafer
Pycnonotus jokokus
Saxicoloides fulicata
Gallus gallus
Columbus livia
Bubo bubo
Copsychus saularis
Oriolus oriolus
Oriolus xanthornus
Sturnus pagodarum
Lonchura striata
Passer domesticus
Nectarina lotensis
Nectarina asiatica
Centropus sinensis
Psittacula Krameri
Merops orinetalis
Merops leschenaulti
Alcedo atthis
Apus affinis
Tyto alba
Butterflies
Papilo demoleus
Papilo polymnstor
Junonia atlites
Juninia almana
Amphibians
Rana tigrina
Hyla goeldii
Mammals
Hare
Squirrel
Field mouse
Common mongoose
Bandicoot
Reptiles
Common Krait
Russels Viper
Chameleon
English Name/
Local Name
Wild Life Act

(1972)
Jungle crow
House crow
White headed babler
Red vented bulbul
White browed Bulbul
Indian robin
Red Jungle fowl
Rock Pigeon
Indian great horned Owl
Magpie Robin
Indian Oriole
Black Headed Oriole
Brahmny Myna
Spotted munia
House Sparrow
Loten's sunbird
Purple Sunbird
Crow Pheasant
Rose ringed parakeet
Common Bee Eater
Chestnut headed Bee Eater
Common Kingfisher
House swift
Barn Owl
Sch-IV
Sch-V
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-V
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Lime butterfly
Blue mormon
Grey pansey
Peacock pansey
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Bull frog
Tree frog
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Lepus nigricollis
Funambulus palmarum
Rattus norvegicus
Herpestes edwardsii
Bandicota bengalensis
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-V
Part-II of sch-II
Sch-V
Bungarus caeruleus
Vipera russelli
Chameleon calcaratus
Sch-II
Sch-II
Sch-II
C3-63

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.9.6
FAUNA IN THE BUFFER AREA
Sr. No.
Technical Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Aves
Sacrogypscalvus
Milvus migrans
Corvus corvus
Corvus splendens
Turdoides striatus
Aegithina tiphia
Pycnonotus cafer
Pycnonotus jokokus
Saxicoloides fulicata
Gallus gallus
Columbus livia
Bubo bubo
Copsychus saularis
Oriolus oriolus
Oriolus xanthornus
Sturnus pagodarum
Acridotheres tristicus
Ploceus philippinus
Uroloncha striata
Passer domesticus
Nectarina lotensis
Nectarina asiatica
Brachypternus
bengalensis
Megalaima merulinus
Eudynamis scolopaceus
Centropus sinensis
Psittacula Krammeri
Coryllis vaeralis
Coracias benghalensis
Merops orinetalis
Merops leschenaulti
Alcedo atthis
Microfus affinis
Caprimulgus asiaticus
Tylo alba
Haliastur indus
Anhinga melanogaster
Egretta garzetta
Bubulcus ibis
Ardeola grayii
Anas acuta
Aythya ferina
Butterflies
Papilo demoleus
Papilo polymnstor
Junonia atlites
Juninia almana
Hypolimnas bolina
Neptis hylas
Amphibians
Rana tigrina
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
English Name/
Local Name
Wild Life Act

(1972)
King vulture
Common Kite
Jungle crow
House crow
White headed babler
Iora
Red vented bulbul
White browed Bulbul
Indian robin
Red Jungle fowl
Rock Pigeon
Indian great horned Owl
Magpie Robin
Indian Oriole
Black Headed Oriole
Brahminy Myna
Common myna
Weaver bird
Spotted munia
House Sparrow
Loten's sunbird
Purple Sunbird
Lesser Golden backed wood
Pecker
Indian Cuckoo
Koel
Crow Pheasant
Rose ringed parakeet
Lorikeet
Indian Roller
Common Bee Eater
Chestnut headed Bee Eater
Common Kingfisher
House swift
Common Indian jar
Barn Owl
Brahmny kite
Darter
Little Egret
Cattle Egret
Pond Heron
Common Teal
White eyed Pochard
Sch-IV
Sch-I
Sch-IV
Sch-V
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-V
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Lime butterfly
Blue mormon
Grey pansey
Peacock pansey
Great eggfly
Common sailor
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Bull frog
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-V
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-V
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-I
Sch-V
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
C3-64

Chapter-3
Sr. No.
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Technical Name
Hyla goeldii
Bufo malanosticus
Mammals
Hare
Hyaena
Jackal
Langur
Monkey
Squirrel
Wild Boar
Field mouse
Common mongoose
Bandicoot
Bear
Wild fox
Blue Bull or Nilgai
Indian Wolf
Indian Fox
Otter
Jungle Cat
Indian Wild Dog
Rhesus Macaque
Spotted Deer/ Chital
Sambhar
Nilgai/ Blue Bull
Panther
Indian Porcupine
Asian Palm Civet
Reptiles
Monitor Lizard
Common Krait
Russels Viper
Cobra
Yellow Rat Snake
Banded Krait
Checkered Keelback/
Pani Sarp
Chameleon
Python
English Name/
Local Name
Tree frog
Bufo
Wild Life Act

(1972)
Sch-IV
Sch-IV
Lepus nigricollis
Hyaena hyaena
Canis aureus
Presbytis entellus
Presbytis phayrei
Funambulus palmarum
Sus sucrofa
Rattus norvegicus
Herpestes edwardsii
Bandicota bengalensis
Melursus ursinus
Vulpes benghalensis
Bosephalus tragocamelus
Canis lupus
Vulpes bengalensis
Lutra lutra
Felis chaus
Cuon alpinus
Macaca mulatta
Axis axis
Cervus unicolor
Boselaphus tragocamelus
Panthera pardus
Hystrix indica
Paradoxurus hermaphroditus
Sch-IV
Sch-III
Sch-II
Sch-III
Part-I of Sch-I
Sch-IV
Sch-III
Sch-V
Part-II of sch-II
Sch-V
Sch-I
Part-II of Sch-II
Sch-III
Sch-I
Sch-II
Sch-II
Sch-I
Sch-II
Sch-II
Sch-III
Sch-III
Sch-III
Sch-I
Sch-IV
Sch-II
Varanus bengalensis
Bungarus caeruleus
Vipera russelli
Naja naja
Pytas mucosus
Bungarus fasciatus
Natrix ( Xenochrophis piscator)
Sch-I
Sch-II
Sch-II
Sch-II
Sch-II
Sch-IV
Sch-II
Chameleon calcaratus
Python molurus
Sch-II
Sch-I
On comparison of the check list given in the Schedule-I of the Act and the list of
wildlife recorded in the study area, it can be concluded that there are quite good
number of endangered and protected animals in the study area. All the major
C3-65

Chapter-3
3.9.6.3 Wild Life Conservation
Flora and faunal data was collected from Forest Working Plans (1994-1999) of
Central Bastar forest range of Bastar District. Detailed field observations and
interactions with local villagers and local tribal hamlet heads reveals that Tigers,
Cheetahs (Thendwa) and Bears are observed within 10 km of the study area. The
cat family members normally visit the near by villages of Machkot, Jiragaon and
Bamhani villages from surrounding reserve forest blocks of Kanger reserve forest
during the summer and winter season for want of food and water.
As per the Wild Life Act (1972), those animals which have been enlisted in the
schedules of the Wildlife Act have been presented in the above table. The
schedules are based on the species namely, rare, endangered, threatened,
vulnerable etc. According to threat of extinction Schedule-I contains those
species which need topmost priority, while II, III, IV and V have lesser degree of
threat. Most of the avi-fauna are listed in ScheduleIV. As per the list of avifaunal species, these are mostly local migrant species only, with few species
recorded in the Schedule I. As per recent forest working plans and discussion
with local forest officials, there are no migratory paths reported from the study
area.
The following mitigation measures will be taken for protection of fauna in the
study area:
Formulate wildlife protection committees in near by villages to check the
area;
movement; and
will attract the avi-fauna in the study area and increase the aesthetic value of
the area.
3.9.7
Aquatic Ecosystems
Protecting the environment and making efficient use of natural resources are two of
the most pressing demands in the present stage of social development. The task of
preserving the purity of the atmosphere and water basins is of both national and
global significance since there are no boundaries to the propagation of
anthropogenic contaminants in the water. An essential pre requisite for the
successful solution to these problems is to evaluate ecological impacts from the
baseline information and undertake effective management plan. So the objective of
aquatic ecological study may be outlined as follows:
To
To
To
To
characterize water bodies like fresh waters;

understand their present biological status;
characterize water bodies with the help of biota;
understand the impact of proposed industrial and urbanization activities; and
C3-66

Chapter-3
To suggest recommendations to counter adverse impacts, if any on the
ecosystem.
To meet these objectives following methods were followed:
Generating data by actual field sampling and analysis in these areas through
field visits during study period;
Discussion with local people to get the information for aquatic plants and
aquatic animals; and
Visit to local fishermen societies to study fish catch.
To fulfill these objectives and to understand the present status of aquatic
ecosystem, samples were collected from different fresh water systems.
In order to get a clear picture and to assess the various parameters of water, six
sampling locations were identified for sampling. Samples were collected during the
summer-2006. The sampling locations are presented in Table-3.9.7 and depicted in
Figure-3.9.1
TABLE-3.9.7
DETAILS OF AQUATIC SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Sr. No. Code
Locations
Remarks
Fresh water
(River)
Fresh water
(Nallah)
Fresh water
(Pond)
AE-1
AE-2
Indravathi river near Village

Balegaon
Jaura nadi near Village Surli
AE-3
Pond near Village Madpal
Distance
(km)
5.8
Direction
NW
5.7
NE
5.2
3.9.7.1 Review of Secondary Data

The river Indravati rises from the Eastern ghats and enters the district from Orissa
State near the confluence of its tributary, the Bhaskal, 22-km upstream of
Jagdalpur. It flows across the center of jagadalpur district with covering a distance
of 385 km and joins the Godavari River near Bhopalapatnam. At Chittrakot, 40 km
west Jagdalpur, river Indravathi plunges off the edge of the Northeastern plateau in
a beautiful horseshoe shape fall of 30-m height descending from the Cuddaph
quarzitic sandstones to the archeans granites and Gneisses. Near Bendri the
Indravathi valley is about 90 m deep because of some rapids, a little down ward
from Chitrakote. Further westwards, the Indravathi river makes the southern limits
of the Abujmarh hills and then it turns south near the district boundary to meet the
Godavari River.
Northern Tributaries of Indravathi
There is large number of tributaries meeting Indravati on both the banks. The
Narangi, Markhandi, Peputula, Nadair, Ganesh bahar, Goriabahar drain the north
eastern plateau into the river. The Gudra river drains the Ahujhar hills and joins the
C3-67

Chapter-3
Indravathi River in Barsur range. The Ochhra nallah joins the Gadra river near
Becha. The Indravati River also joins Godavari river in Barsur range.
Southern Tributaries of Indravati
Southern tributaries are smaller as compared to the northern tributaries. The
Dantewada River and its tributaries such as Sankani, Dankini and Sapagonda river
drains the northern slopes of the southern plateau.
3.9.7.2 Methodology Adopted for Aquatic Studies
Aquatic ecosystem close to the project area under investigation was considered for
a detailed study. Water samples were considered for their physico-chemical
characteristics. Plankton, aquatic plants, fish fauna of water bodies, and their
associated fauna were collected, identified and estimated. The following
methodology has been adopted for sampling;
Physico-Chemical Factors
Temperature - Temperature was measured using centigrade mercury thermometer
of +/- 0.5oC accuracy.
Light Penetration - Light penetration was measured by Secchi-disc of 20-cm
diameter.
Turbidity - Turbidity was measured with a turbidity meter.
pH - Determination of pH was done on Hach Portable pH meter.
Dissolved Oxygen - Dissolved oxygen was estimated by modified Winkler method.
300-ml capacity BOD bottles were used for this purpose. Samples were fixed at the
spot using manganese sulphate and alkaline iodide reagents and analysis were
carried out using 0.01 N sodium thiosulphate. Oxygen analyzer was used.
Phosphate - To estimate phosphate the samples were allowed to react with a mixed
reagent containing 5% H2SO4 and ammonium molybdate and ascorbic acid solution
and the phosphate concentration will be estimated spectrophotometrically at 982
nm wave length.
Nitrate - For the determination of nitrates, nitrate present was reduced to nitrite
using hydrazine in the presence of Copper ions as catalyst and then was estimated
spectrophotometrically using sulfanilamide and NEDA at 543 nm.
Sulphates - Sulphates estimated by the precipitation of sulphates by the addition of
Barium chloride and hydrochloric acid.
C3-68

Chapter-3
Biological Parameters
Phytoplankton
Cell Count
Sedgiwck-Rafter cell was used for the cell count.
Abundance of Phytoplankton
Abundance was measured by counting the average number of plankton in the cell.
Biomass
Phytoplankton biomass measured by cellular measurements. Population density was
measured by determining the abundance of plankton in a unit volume of water.
Zooplankton
Zooplanktons were identified using standard keys.

Cell Count
Sedgwick-Rafter cell was used for the cell count.
Abundance of Zooplankton
Abundance was measured by counting the average number of zooplankton in the
Sedwick - Rafter cell.
Fishes
Samples of fishes in the Indravathi were collected and identified upto the species
level.
Phytoplankton
The plankton (phyto and zoo) status of the studied water bodies is presented in
Table-3.9.8.
Phytoplankton
group
reported
from
four
locations
are
basillariophyceae, chlorophyceae, myxophyceae and euglenophyceae members.
About 24 species of phytoplankton were reported from three locations. Density of
phytoplankton group among the three locations was highest in lentic ecosystem
(AE-2) and lowest in river Indravathi (AE-1). The density of phytoplankton group
ranged between 22 to 34 organisms/ml in all studied samples. Dominance of
Bacillariophyceae members followed by myxophyceae were observed in all the
locations. The highest percentage was Ankistrodesmus falcatus and Anabeana sp
and the lowest percentage was Euglena sp during study period were observed.
C3-69

Chapter-3
Zooplankton
Zooplankton biomass among the three locations varied from 0.7 to 0.9 ml/100 m3.
Among the three locations the highest biomass of zooplankton was recorded in pond
near Madpal village (AE-III) and lowest in Jaura river (AE2). Percentage composition
of zooplankton species varied among different species. Among the zooplankton
group, Brachionous sp (Rotifer group) had highest percentage composition i.e.
17.14% and the lowest percentage composition i.e. 8.57% for Asplancha sp of the
total zooplankton. Cypris sp and Cyclops sp are also present in considerable number
in the studied water bodies.
TABLE-3.9.8
PLANKTON ABUNDANCE
Plankton
Phytoplankton
Ulothrix sp.
Pithophora sp.
Desmids
Cosmarium sp
Pediastrum sp
Volvox sp
Navicula sp
Pluerosigma sp
Achnanthes sp
Pinnularia sp
Anabeana sp
Scenedesmus biguga
Ankistrodesmus falcatus
Melosira sp
Chlorococcum sp
Chlorella sp
Nitzschia sp.
Microcystis sp.
Oscilaltoria sp
Spirulina sp
Oocystis sp
Crucigenia sp
Nitschia sp
Phacus sp
Euglena sp.
Density (nos./1ml)
Zooplankton
Arcella sp
Keratella sp
Asplancha sp
Brachonus sp
Daphnia sp
Cyclops sp
Cypris sp
Total
Biomass(ml/100m3)
Shannon-weaver' Index for
phytoplankton
Shannon-weaver' Index for
zooplankton
Evenness Index for
AE-1
AE-2
AE-3
% Composition
0
0
0
0
2
2
1
1
1
1
0
3
4
1
0
0
1
1
2
1
0
0
0
0
1
22
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
1
0
0
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
34
0
3
0
0
1
1
3
2
1
1
3
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
33
2.24
4.48
2.24
1.12
5.61
4.48
6.74
4.48
3.37
3.37
5.61
7.86
6.74
3.37
2.24
1.12
3.37
3.37
4.48
2.24
1.12
1.12
1.12
2.24
5.61
89
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
9
0.8
2.5
2
2
1
2
2
2
13
13
0.7
3.06
1
2
1
2
2
2
3
13
0.9
2.66
11.42
14.29
8.57
17.14
14.28
17.14
17.14
35
0.8
-
1.74
1.65
1.81
0.81
0.76
0.83
C3-70

Chapter-3
Plankton
phytoplankton
Evenness Index for zooplankton
Similarity Index for
phytoplankton
Similarity Index for zooplankton
AE-1
AE-2
AE-3
% Composition
0.78
0.84
0.76
0.85
0.82
0.82
0.76
0.77
0.81
The indices calculated for all the three sampling locations indicate that the water
bodies in the study area are not polluted due any industrial and domestic activity.
The range of index among the four sampling locations reveals that the water bodies
are having broad ecotone boundaries, which indicates gradual changes in the
biological quality and the species composition.
3.9.7.4 Aquatic Weed Biology
There is a limited weed growth in pond near plant site. Macrophytes are found
along the lentic zones of the water bodies, consisting of Hydrilla sp Verticellata sp
, Potamogeton sp., Vallisneria spiralis, Lemna sp., and the algae such as Chara
and Nitella are found in the margins. Lemna sp and Nymphaea sp could be
observed in pond near Village Madpal .The observed planktonic flora and fauna
are presented in Table-3.9.9 and Table-3.9.10.
TABLE-3.9.9
AQUATIC FAUNA FROM STUDY AREA
Sr.
Name of the Species
No.
Insect
1
Dytiscus sp
2
Nepa sp
3
Ranatra sp
Fishes
4
Notpterus notopterus
5
Esomus darnucus
6
Labeo rohita
7
Labeo catla
8
Cirrhinus mrigula
9
Mysticus vittatus
10
Clarias batrachus
11
Channa striatus
Amphibians
12
Rana cynophyctis
13
Phalacrocorax carbo
14
Bubulcus ibis
15
Egretta garzetta
16
Ardea cinerea
17
Alcedo athinis
18
Dendrocygna javanica
Lentic Water Bodies
Lotic Water Bodies
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
Observed
C3-71

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.9.10
LIST OF OBSERVED PLANKTONIC FLORA AND FAUNA
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Phytoplankton
Anabaena sp
Oscillatoria sp
Microcystis sp
Chrococcus sp
Scenedesmus sp
Scenedesmus bijuga
Pediastrum sp
Ankistrodesmus sp
Oocystis sp
Crucigenia sp
Euglena sp
Phacus sp
Cosmarium sp
Clostrium sp
Navicula sphaerophora
Synedraz ulna
Navicula rhyncocephala
Gomphonema sp
Zooplankton
Arcella
Keratella sp
Asplancha sp
Brachionus sp
Daphnia sp
Cerodaphnia sp
Cyclops sp
Mesocyclops sp
Cypris sp
3.9.7.5 Conclusions on Aquatic Ecology

Surface water samples were collected from river Indravathi near village Balegaon
and pond water near village Madpal during study period. Separate water samples
were collected for biological parameters. Basillariophycean, Chlorophyceaen,
Myxophyceaen, Rotifers and Cladocerans are predominant in the studied water
bodies. Plankton diversity Index for phytoplankton and zooplankton varies from
2.50 to 3.06 and 1.64 to 1.81. Physico-chemical, biological parameters and diversity
index reveals that the studied water bodies are oligotrophic to slightly mesotrophic
in nature.
3.10
Demography and Socio-Economics

The demographic and socio- economic conditions prevailing in the 10 km radius of
the proposed project area are Nagarnar, Madpal villages in Jagdalpur Tahsil,
Bastar district of Chhattisgarh, Kosagumuda C.D block in Nabarangapur district
and Kotpad C.D block in Koraput district of Odisha is analyzed. The socioeconomic data forms the basis for developing a suitable enterprise social
responsibility plan to address the needs of the population.
The project proponent is committed to take up the socio-economic development
initiatives not only to minimize the negative impact on the population and also
improve the socio-economic status of population living in 10 km radius of the
plant as its sustained effort as part of corporate social responsibility.
3.10.1 Methodology Adopted for the Study

The methodology adopted for the study mainly includes review of published
secondary data (District Census Statistical Handbooks- 2011 and Primary Census
Abstract of Census-2011) with respect to population, density, household size, sex
C3-72

Chapter-3
ratio, social stratification, literacy rate and occupational structure for 10 km
radius study area.
3.10.2 Review of Demographic and Socio-Economic Profile-2011
The village wise demographic data of total 93 villages, 54 villages from
Jagdhalpur tahsil, Bastar district of Chhattisgarh. 16 villages from Kosagumuda
C.D block, Nabarangapur district and 23 villages from Kotpad C.D block, Koraput
district of Odisha falling within 10 km radius of the project site as per the 2011
census is given in Annexure-XIII. The salient features of the demographic and
socio-economic conditions are analyzed and described in the following sections.
3.10.3 Demography
Distribution of Population
As per 2011 census the study area consisted of 100027 persons inhabited in
study area. The distribution of population in the study area is shown in Table3.10.1.
TABLE-3.10.1
DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION
0-3 km
Particulars
No. of Households
6567
Male Population
13936
Female Population
13552
Total Population
27488
Male Population (0-6 years)
2004
Female Population (0-6 years)
1989
Total Population (0-6 years)
3993
% of 0-6 years population
14.53
Average Household Size
4.19
50.70
% of males to the total population
% of females to the total population
49.30
Sex Ratio (number of females per 1000
males)
972
Density
278
3-7 km
6487
13068
13593
26661
2045
2128
4173
15.65
4.11
49.02
50.98
7-10 km
11135
22743
23135
45878
3538
3625
7163
15.61
4.12
49.57
50.43
0-10 km
24189
49747
50280
100027
7587
7742
15329
15.32
4.14
49.73
50.27
1040
279
1017
226
1011
251
Average Household Size

The study area has a household size of 4.14 as per 2011 census. This is mainly
due to population control measures, health awareness programs.
Population Density
The density of population reveals that the study area has an overall density of
251 persons per km2 (PP km2) as per 2011 census reports.
C3-73

Chapter-3
Sex Ratio
The configuration of male and female indicates that the males constitute to about
49.73% and females to 50.27% of the total population as per 2011 census
records. The study area on an average has 1011 females per 1000 males as per
2011 census reports. The sex ratio in the study area indirectly reveals certain
sociological and cultural aspects in relation with female births.
3.10.4 Social Structure
In the study area, as per 2011 census, 7.25% of the population belongs to
Scheduled Castes (SC) and 60.84% to Scheduled Tribes (ST). Overall the data of
social stratification reveals that the SC and ST % to population is more than 68%,
The SC and ST community are marginalized and they are at considered at low
level of social strata and calls for a special attention in Social Impact Management
Plan for improving their socio-economic status apart from preservation and
protection of their art, culture and traditional rights of livelihood.
The distribution of population by social structure is shown in Table-3.10.2.
TABLE-3.10.2
DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION BY SOCIAL STRUCTURE
Particulars
Schedule caste
% To the total population
Schedule Tribes
% To the total population
Total SC and ST population
% To total population
Total population
0-3 km
3-7 km
7-10 km
0-10 km
1166
4.24
15669
57.00
16835
61.24
27488
2096
7.86
16786
62.96
18882
70.82
26661
3989
8.69
28401
61.91
32390
70.60
45878
7251
7.25
60856
60.84
68107
68.09
100027

3.10.5 Literacy Levels
The data of study area reveals that literacy rate of 49.18% as per 2011 census.
The distribution of literate and literacy rate in the study area is given in Table3.10.3.
TABLE-3.10.3
DISTRIBUTION OF LITERATE AND LITERACY RATES
Particulars
Male Population
Female Population
Total Population
Male Population (0-6 years)
Female Population (0-6 years)
Total Population (0-6 years)
Total Population above 7 years
0-3 km
3-7 km
7-10 km
0-10 km
13936
13552
27488
2004
1989
3993
23495
13068
13593
26661
2045
2128
4173
22488
22743
23135
45878
3538
3625
7163
38715
49747
50280
100027
7587
7742
15329
84698
C3-74

Chapter-3
Particulars
Male literates (7+ years)
Female literates (7+ Years)
Total literates (7+ Years)
Male literacy rate (%) to the total
literates
Female literacy rate (%) to the total
literates
Average Male Literacy to the total
population (%)
0-3 km
3-7 km
7-10 km
0-10 km
7790
4791
12581
6180
11566
25536
3872
10052
7459
19025
16122
41658
61.48
60.79
61.30
38.52
39.21
38.70
27.48
29.87
30.15
Average female Literacy to the total

population (%)
Total Literacy rate (%) to the total
population
20.39
17.22
19.27
19.03
44.70
49.14
49.18
61.92
38.08
33.16
53.55

The percentage of male literates to the total literates of the study area works out to
be 61.30%. The percentage of female literates to the total literates, which is an
important indicator for social change, is observed to be 38.70% in the study area as
per 2011 census records. The difference sited between the male and female literacy
rate indicates that the study area is socially backward with low social status for the
women and gender disparity.
3.10.6
Occupational Structure
The occupational structure of residents of work participation rate in the study
area is studied with reference to main workers, marginal workers and nonworkers. The main workers include 10 categories of workers defined by the
Census Department consisting of cultivators, agricultural laborers, those engaged
in live-stock, forestry, fishing, mining and quarrying; manufacturing, processing
and repairs in household industry; and other than household industry,
construction, trade and commerce, transport and communication and other
services.
The marginal workers are those workers engaged in some work for a period of
less than six months during the reference year prior to the census survey. The
non-workers include those engaged in unpaid household duties, students, retired
persons, dependents, beggars, vagrants etc.; institutional inmates or all other
non-workers who do not fall under the above categories.
Total work participation in the project study areas is 50.55% and the non-workers
constitute 49.45% of the total population respectively. The distribution of workers
by occupation indicates that the total workers are more than the non-workers,
which is an important socio-economic indicator. But, the main workers to the
total workers are 44.78% and the marginal workers constitute to 55.22% to the
total workers. the above occupation has significant attribute to the economic
condition of the study area, it indicates low economic status of the population.
The occupational structure of the study area is shown in Table-3.10.4.
C3-75

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.10.4
OCCUPATIONAL STRUCTURE
Particulars
Total Population
Total workers
Work participation rate (%)
Total main workers
% of main workers to total workers
Marginal workers
% of marginal workers to total workers
Non-workers
% of non-workers to total population
0-3 km
27488
13131
47.77
7031
53.55
6100
46.45
14357
52.23
3-7 km
26661
13762
51.62
5690
41.35
8072
58.65
12899
48.38
7-10 km
45878
23672
51.60
9924
41.92
13748
58.08
22206
48.40
0-10 km
100027
50565
50.55
22645
44.78
27920
55.22
49462
49.45
Source: District Census Hand Book-2011

3.11
Traffic Density Survey

The traffic studies have been conducted to know the prevailing traffic volumes on
the roads in the study area. It is essential to consider these details for assessing the
anticipated future traffic volumes as a part of overall impacts assessment for the
project.
The variations of traffic densities depend upon the working days and time and also
vary in day and night times. In order to assess the prevailing traffic volumes on the
roads, the survey was conducted during normal working days of the week by
avoiding local holidays or abnormal situations to reflect the true picture of the traffic
densities. The traffic study was conducted at two locations for 24 hours.
3.11.1 Selection of Sampling Location

The traffic density study was conducted at NH 43 (near Chandili village) which is
about 2 km away from the project site and the other location was at NH 43 (near
Jarigudpara) which is about 5 km away from the project site.
3.11.2 Methodology
3.11.2.1 Vehicular Count
The vehicles plying in both the directions were counted continuously for 24 hours at
two locations. The vehicles were counted every hour and recorded under respective
category. The maximum traffic count in an hour is termed as peak hour traffic. The
vehicles were categorized under various heads like trucks/tankers, buses, multi
axles, cars, 2/3 wheelers, cycles and bullock carts.
3.11.2.2 Categorization of Traffic
The engine driven vehicles were categorized into various heads viz. light motor
vehicles (LMV) as two wheelers (scooters, motor cycles etc.), three wheelers
(auto rickshaws, 3-wheel tempo etc.), medium motor vehicles (cars, jeeps),
tractors (6 wheelers), minibuses and mini trucks (8 wheelers); heavy motor
vehicles such as buses, trucks and tankers (10 wheelers).
C3-76

Chapter-3
3.11.3 Results and Discussion
The summary of daily traffic count for the location was monitored during the study
period is summarized in Table-3.11.1 and % of composition of the vehicles is given
in the Table-3.11.2.
It was observed that the 2/3 wheelers, cars/jeeps and trucks/buses forms the
major volume of the traffic. The total traffic PCU of this road is minimal.
3.11.3.1Presentation of Results
The present level of traffic has been converted to Passenger Car Units (PCU) at this
location as per the conversion factors stipulated by Indian Road Congress (IRC). The
Passenger Car Unit (PCU) recorded at the two selected traffic locations were given in
Table-3.11.1.
TABLE-3.11.1
TRAFFIC DENSITY (VEHICLES/DAY)
Code
Location
Two Wheelers
(Bicycle/
Scooter/
Motorcycle)
Four Wheelers
(Car/Jeep)
Tractors
Buses/
Trucks
Multi
Axles
NH 43 (near Chandili
483
348
27
428
41
village)
NH 43 (near
2
241
65
7
42
5
Jarigudpara)
Note: PCU rating: (2/3 wheelers: 0.5, Car/Jeep: 1.0, Tractor: 3.0, Buses: 3.0, Trucks/HMV: 3.0)
1
TABLE3.11.2
COMPOSITION OF EXISTING TRAFFIC VOLUME
Code
Note:
Total
No. Of Vehicles
% Composition
Vehicles
LMV
MMV
HMV
LMV
MMV
HMV
T1
1327
483
375
469
36.4
28.3
35.3
T2
360
241
72
47
66.9
20
13.1
LMV-Light Motor Vehicles (scooter, motorcycle & auto rickshaw etc.)
MMV-Medium Motor Vehicles (car, jeep, tractor, mini bus, mini trucks)
HMV-Heavy Motor Vehicles (bus, trucks and tankers)
C3-77
Total
PCUS
2078
348

Chapter-4
Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.0
ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

This chapter describes the identification of impacts, appraisal of various impacts,
and mitigation measures during construction phase and operational phase. It
further describes the action plan for the control of pollution as per CPCB and
CREP guidelines.
4.1
Identification of Impacts & Mitigation Measures

The environmental impacts can be categorized as either primary impacts or
secondary impacts. Primary impacts are those, which are attributed directly to
the project and secondary impacts are those, which are indirectly induced and
typically include the associated investment and changed pattern of social and
economic activities by the proposed action.
The impacts have been assessed for the proposed expansion of pellet plant
assuming that the pollution due to the existing activities has already been
captured under baseline environmental monitoring and continue to remain same
till the operation of the project.
The environment management plan is required to ensure sustainable
development in the area of the plant. The pellet manufacturing processes to a
certain extent are associated with an inevitable negative impact on environment,
but the impacts are within limits and can be easily ameliorated to a significant
extent through adoption of appropriate mitigative measures.
The construction and operation of the proposed expansion of pellet plant
comprises various activities each of which may have an impact on some or other
environmental parameters. Various impacts during the construction and operation
phase on the environment parameters have been studied to estimate the impact
on the environment and are discussed briefly below and elaborated in the
subsequent sections.
4.2
Impacts & Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase

This includes the activities related to leveling of site, construction of pellet plant,
other project related structures and installation of equipment.
4.2.1 Land Use and Soil Quality

and Chowkawada village. Proposed site does not involve any forest area. Clearing
of trees/shrubs at some locations is required during construction phase. However,
it is proposed to develop adequate greenbelt all along the plant boundary and
township to improve the aesthetics of the area. Thus, the overall impact will be
beneficial in nature.
The muck generated during excavation and construction phase will be stored and
reused in low lying area and leveling purpose. The excavated soil will be used in
filling up of the foundations and other for leveling purposes within the site
premises. The top soil if any will be stacked in earmarked area and will be used in
greenbelt development at project site.
C4-1

Chapter-4
The land use of plant site which is currently barren, fallow land and agricultural
land will be converted to industrial land use category. This will be an irreversible
impact.
Impact on Soil Quality
The soil at the project site predominantly consists of silt clay. The construction
activities will result in loss of topsoil to some extent in the plant area and waste
disposal area. The topsoil requires proper handling like separate stacking so that it
can be used for green belt development. Apart from much localized construction
impacts at the plant site, no significant adverse impact on soil in the surrounding
area is anticipated.
Mitigation Measures
The following mitigation measures will be adopted for soil and land environment:
After completion of the construction phase, the surplus earth will be utilized to
fill up the low lying areas, the rubble will be cleared and all un-built surfaces
will be reinstated;
The top soil from the excavated areas will be preserved in separate stacks and
re-use during the plantation;
Green belt development and related activities will be taken up so that
plantation will grow to adequate height by the time of plant commissioning.
Thus, green belt will be effective in containing the fugitive emissions during
operation, if any;
Species selected in this plantation will be native, fast growing with rich canopy
and they will be easily adaptable to local conditions. Their ability to combat
localized pollution is the prime factor for their selection and placement in the
planting grid/pattern. Most of the varieties shall be eco-friendly i.e. generate
lot of oxygen while helping reduce/absorb gases and dust;
Entire plant will be aesthetically landscaped and natural gradient will be
maintained to the extent feasible;
There will be minimum concreting of the top surfaces so that there is a scope
for maximum ground water recharge due to rainfall; and
Plantation outside the plant premises, in the nearby villages will be
encouraged by supplying free saplings to the villagers.
C4-2

Chapter-4
4.2.2 Air Quality

Impact on Air Quality
During construction phase, particulate matter will be the main pollutant, which
would be generated from the site development activities and vehicular movement
on the road. Further, concentration of NOx and CO will also increase due to
increased vehicular traffic movement. However, the increase in ambient
concentrations of air quality will be negligible. As most of the construction
equipment will be mobile, the emissions are likely to be fugitive and well
dispensed. The dust generated will also be fugitive in nature, which can be
controlled by sprinkling of water.
The impacts will be localized in nature and the areas outside the project boundary
are not likely to have any major adverse impact with respect to ambient air
quality.
Air Pollution Control Measures
The following mitigation measures will be employed during construction period to
reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits.
The construction sites will be adequately camouflaged from outside areas so
that pollution can be confined to the construction site only;
Construction materials will be stored in covered godown or enclosed spaces to
prevent the windblown fugitive emissions;
followed;
Truck carrying soil, sand, stone dust, stone will be duly covered to avoid
spilling and fugitive emissions;
vulnerable areas of construction sites will be undertaken to control fugitive
dust during material handling and hauling activities in dry seasons;
The construction material delivering vehicles will be covered in order to reduce
spills;
Low emission construction equipment, vehicles and generator sets will be
used;
C4-3

Chapter-4
confirm to standards of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB);
Monitoring of air quality at regular intervals will be conducted during
construction phase; and
Construction workers will be provided with masks to protect them from
inhaling dust.
4.2.3 Impact Water Resources and Quality
The peak estimated water requirement during construction will be met from water
obtained from water system of 3 MTPA NMDC iron and steel plant project,
Nagarnar which will be drawing raw water form river Sabari.
The construction workers will be employed from the local area and hence the
wastewater generation includes only the domestic wastes. This wastewater will be
treated in existing sewage treatment plant. The treated wastewater will be used
for greenbelt and dust suppression. Hence, there will not be any major adverse
impact on the water regime due to domestic wastewater.
Mitigation Measures
The plant drainage will be protected or re-routed through well-engineered storm

water drains within the project site. The earth work (cutting and filling) will be
avoided during rainy season and will be completed during summer season. Also
development of green belt in and around plant will be taken up during the
monsoon season. In-plant roads will be paved to arrest fugitive dust emission.
Soil binding and fast growing vegetation will be grown within the plant premises
to arrest the soil erosion.
4.2.4 Noise Environment
Impact due to Noise Levels
equipments will generate noise ranging between 85-90 dB (A) near the source at
Noise Levels Mitigation
C4-4

Chapter-4
ear-muffs etc.
4.2.5 Ecology
will be minimized through paving and water sprinkling. Greenbelt will be developed
surrounding the plant facilities in the open areas.
4.2.6 Impact on Socio-Economic Aspects during the Construction Phase
The project proponent of the proposed expansion of pellet plant has taken all the
possible mitigation measures in minimizing the any adverse impact on the
population in core zone due to the establishment of the project.
4.2.6.1 Positive Impacts of the Project during the Construction Phase
The project study area both core zone and buffer zone population will have
positive impact of the project due to adequate inputs being proposed by the
project proponent besides offering the benefits of royalty and other revenue to
the state exchequer. Any company will have its own community development
policy and would try to implement the same. Company would also be providing
direct employment in the project besides large number of villagers would get
indirect employment due to self-employment opportunities available. Following
direct and indirect employment opportunities will be created during the
construction phase and would further consolidate with more exhaustive
opportunities due to cascading effect of the project establishment.
Construction workers both technical and non-technical;
Development of transportation and travel industry;
Automobile servicing centers;
Hotels and canteens;
Markets and shopping complex;
Labour contractors;
Electricals and maintenance;
Internet, xerox and printing;
Education institutions;
Health services sector;
Earth work and reclamation business; and
Other ancillary units will develop in the process of establishing the industry.
These inputs would be in addition to the development of appropriate
infrastructure under various government schemes. The project proponent would
also develop in-house expertise to handle the social issues and take help of
outside voluntary organizations. Besides, the company would make adequate
C4-5

Chapter-4
allocation of budget for taking up socio-economic development programs for

minimizing/mitigating the adverse impacts during the project construction phase.
4.2.7 Storage of Hazardous Materials
The hazardous materials used during construction may include petrol, diesel,
welding gas and paints etc. These materials will be stored and handled carefully
under applicable safety guidelines.
Some of the precautions of storage include the following:
Diesel and other fuels shall be stored in separate dyke enclosures;
The distance between the storage tanks shall be at least half their height; and
The precautions as suggested under TAC/OISD guidelines will be
implemented.
4.2.8 Facilities for Construction Workforce
The contractor shall be asked to provide following facilities to construction work
force:
First Aid: At work place, first aid facilities will be maintained at a readily
accessible place where necessary appliances including sterilized cotton wool etc.
will be available. Ambulance facilities will be kept readily available at workplace to
take injured person to the nearest hospital.
Potable Water: Sufficient supply of cold water fit for drinking will be provided at
suitable places.
Temporary Housing Facility: The workforce for the construction of the pellet
plant will be deployed from the local area and hence temporary sites or housing
for construction workers are not necessary.
4.3
Impacts & Mitigation Measures during Operational Phase

The proposed expansion project operation will involve production of 2 MTPA pellet
plant. For the purpose of impact assessment during the operational phase, the
following components have been separately considered although some of these
will be overlapping:
Land use;
Topography and climate;
Air quality;
Traffic;
Water resources and quality;
Noise levels;
Ecology; and
Solid waste management; and
Socio-economic aspects.
C4-6

Chapter-4
4.3.1 Land use

and Chowkawada village. This proposed pellet plant site is envisaged on barren,
fallow land and agricultural land. The present land use will be converted into
industrial land use. This will be an irreversible change. Forest land is not involved
in the proposed pellet plant site. The existing trees/shrubs/plantation will be
retained to the extent possible in line with the plant design. Further, suitable
greenbelt development will also be implemented. While change in land use will be
an irreversible impact, the aesthetics will be improved with greenbelt of native
species with rich canopy.
4.3.2 Topography and Climate
The topography of the project site is flat (545 m - 550 m aMSL) with vegetation
present at some places. There will not be much cutting and filling required for the
proposed project as it is vacant land. The additional structures such as industrial
buildings, stacks, storage facilities, waste disposal facilities etc. will be
constructed. The general appearance of the site will change into an industrial setup. Excavation will be carried out for foundation of buildings and basements. The
excavated soil will be used in backfilling, landscaping of the project, road work
and rise of site level at locations. This will be a permanent change at the project
site.
The exit temperatures from the stacks will be maintained in the range of ambient
temperature from 50 oC to 200oC, which will have nominal impact. By
implementing the pollution control measures the impact will be localized. The
temperature rise is not likely to have any macro-climatic adverse impacts.
Further, the proposed extensive green belt in the project site will have a
moderating impact on the heat conditions in the project site.
4.3.3 Air Environment
4.3.3.1 Impact on Air Quality
In a pellet plant, air pollutants are generated at different stages of production. Air
pollutants may be particulate matter, sulphur dioxide, oxides of nitrogen etc. The
pollutants may be released as point source emission or fugitive emission.
Accordingly it is most expected that there will be some variation in the emitted
pollution load. It is therefore most justified to first assess the anticipated
variation in the emitted pollution load. Once these variations vis--vis increase or
decrease in emitted pollution load is estimated, its impact on air environment will
be assessed and predicted.
Pellet Plant
Pelletising turns iron ore fines into balls suitable for feeding into BF plants.
Impurities are removed from crushed iron ore and is subsequently moistened and
then heated with a binding agent to create "green pellets in rotating drums or on
rotary discs. These green pellets are subsequently dried and indurated at
temperatures of more than 1000 C travelling grate (induration units). Particulate
C4-7

Chapter-4
matter is generated at mixed material drying unit, which is led to atmosphere

through multi cyclone-scrubber based de-dusting facility. The exhaust gases
during induration process carries along with it particulate matter, oxides of
sulphur and nitrogen as major pollutant, which will be cleaned in ESP and will be
vented into the atmosphere through common waste gas stack.
The pellet process except for mixing the raw material and other materials, will be
carried out in the wet condition, thereby air pollution from the process is
negligible.
4.3.3.2 Air Modeling
Particulate matter, sulphur dioxide (SO2) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions
will be the main pollutants in the proposed expansion project. The incremental
ground level concentrations from the proposed expansion facilities have been
estimated by using dispersion modeling.
Details of Mathematical Modelling
For prediction of maximum ground level concentrations (GLCs), the air dispersion
modeling software (AERMOD version 7.1.0) was used. AERMOD is steady state
advanced gaussian plume model that simulates air quality and deposition fields
upto 50 km radius. AERMOD is approved by USEPA and is widely used software.
It is an advanced version of industrial source complex (ISCST3) model, utilizes
similar input and output structure to ISCST3 sharing many of the same features,
as well as offering additional features. The model is applicable to rural and urban
areas, flat and complex terrain, surface and elevated releases and multiple
sources including point, area, flare, line and volume sources.
Dispersion modeling using AERMOD requires hourly meteorological data. Site
specific data recorded during pre-monsoon 2015 at project site is used for
executing modeling studies. The site specific meteorological data is processed
using AERMET processor.
Model Set-up
The model set-up details are presented in Table-4.1 below:

TABLE-4.1
MODEL SET-UP
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Parameter
Model name
Model type
Topography
Averaging time
Source type
Boundary limits
Co-ordinate system
Receptor height
Anemometer
Surface meteorological data
Upper air data
Details
AERMOD (Version 7.1.0)
Steady state gaussian plume air dispersion model
Rural, flat
24 hours
Point source
10 km X 10 km
Uniform polar grid
0
10 m
Site specific data processed by AERMET
Upper air estimator using AERMET processor
C4-8

Chapter-4
Model Input Data

The details of proposed stack emissions in the expansion project are given in
Table-4.2.
TABLE-4.2
DETAILS OF STACK EMISSIONS FROM THE PROPOSED PELLET PLANT
Sr.
No.
Plant
Name
Stack-1
Stack-2
Stack
Attached to
Main process
Stack
Dedusting
Stack
Stack
Height
(m)
Stack
Temp
Velocity
Dia
(oC)
(m/s)
(m)
Flow Rate
(Nm3/s)
PM
(g/s)
SO2
(g/s)
NOx
(g/s)
80
150
20
176.85
8.84
144.9
61.90
30
65
20
124.63
6.23
The simulations have been carried out to evaluate SO2, NOx and PM likely to be
contributed by the proposed pellet plant. For the short-term simulations, the
concentrations were estimated to obtain an optimum description of variations in
concentrations over the site in 10 km radius covering 16 directions. The predicted
results for PM, SO2 and NOx are presented in Table-4.3 and isopleths showing
the incremental concentrations are shown in Figure-4.1 to Figure-4.3. The
stack emission details for the proposed stacks in the pellet plant are calculated
and the sheet is enclosed as Annexure-XIV.
TABLE-4.3
PREDICTED SHORT-TERM MODELLING RESULTS (24-HOURLY)
Pollutants
Particulate matter (PM10)
Sulphur dioxide (SO2)
Nitrogen oxides (NOx)
Maximum Incremental
Levels (g/m3)
1.3
8.8
3.6
Distance
(km)
1.4
1.4
1.4
Direction
NE
NE
NE
Resultant Concentrations after Implementation of Expansion Project

The resultant concentrations after the implementation of the proposed pellet plant
are given in Table-4.4.
TABLE-4.4
RESULTANT GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATIONS (24-HOURLY)
Pollutant
PM (PM10)
SO2
NOx
Max
Baseline
54.9
13.8
18.5
Concentrations (g/m3)
Incremental
Resultant
Concentration
1.3
56.2
8.8
22.6
3.6
22.1
NAAQS Limits
100
80
80
The incremental concentrations when superimposed over the existing maximum

baseline concentrations, the resultant concentrations are observed to be within
the permissible levels for residential/rural conditions. The Resultant concentration
for PM10, SO2 and NOx are observed as 56.2 g/m3, 22.6 g/m3 and 22.1 g/m3
respectively.
C4-9

Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
6000
0.30
8000
Isopleths Showing Incremental Concentrations for PM
0.3
0
0
0.9
0.30
2000
0.60
4000
0
0.3
0.30
0.30
-8000
-6000
0.30
0.30
-4000
-2000
STCK2
STCK1
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
PLOT FILE OF HIGH 1ST HIGH 24-HR VALUES FOR SOURCE GROUP: ALL
0.300
0.600
COMMENTS:
0.900
SOURCES:
ug/m^3
1.200
1.330
COMPANY NAME:
2
RECEPTORS:
MODELER:
441
Dr. Chandra Sekhar

Mr. S. Kishore Kumar
OUTPUT TYPE:
SCALE:
Concentration
MAX:
DATE:
1.32935 ug/m^3
23-07-2015
AERMOD View - Lakes Environmental Software
1:125,000
4 km
PROJECT NO.:
G:\Kishore\Modeling\Aermod\NMDC Pellet plant\NMDC\PM.isc
FIGURE-4.1
SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCS OF PM
C4-10

Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
Isopleths Showing Incremental Concentrations for SO2
2000
4000
6000
8000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
STCK1
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
2.000
4.000
COMMENTS:
6.000
SOURCES:
ug/m^3
8.000
8.830
COMPANY NAME:
1
RECEPTORS:
MODELER:
441
Dr. Chandra Sekhar

OUTPUT TYPE:
SCALE:
Concentration
MAX:
DATE:
8.82526 ug/m^3
23-07-2015
1:125,000
4 km
PROJECT NO.:
G:\Kishore\Modeling\Aermod\NMDC Pellet plant\NMDC\NMDC.isc
FIGURE-4.2
SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCS OF SO2
C4-11

Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
4000
6000
8000
Isopleths Showing Incremental Concentrations for NOx
2000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
STCK1
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
1.000
2.000
COMMENTS:
SOURCES:
3.000
ug/m^3
3.580
COMPANY NAME:
1
RECEPTORS:
MODELER:
441
Dr. Chandra Sekhar

OUTPUT TYPE:
SCALE:
Concentration
MAX:
DATE:
3.58219 ug/m^3
23-07-2015
1:125,000
4 km
PROJECT NO.:
G:\Kishore\Modeling\Aermod\NMDC Pellet plant\NMDC\NOx.isc
FIGURE-4.3
SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCS OF NOx
C4-12

Chapter-4
Model Input Data

The cumulative impact due to the Existing plant (Integrated Steel Plant-under
construction) and the proposed pellet plant in the study area on ambient air
quality has also been assessed using AERMOD. Stack details of the existing plant
/ under construction and the proposed pellet plant considered for modelling
purposes are given in Table-4.5.
TABLE-4.5
CUMULATIVE STACK EMISSIONS FROM THE EXISTING PLANT
AND PROPOSED PELLET PLANT
Sr.
No
Source/Units
I
1
2
3
II
1
BF (4500 m3)
BF Stove
Cast House
Stock House
Sinter Plant (460 m2)
Sinter Machine (Process
ESP)
Sinter Plant (Space
Dedusting ESP)
SMS
Ladle Furnace (175t)
Ladle Furnace (175t)
Desulphurisation Plant
Desulphurisation Plant
Coke Oven
Coke Oven 1
Coke Oven 2
Hot Strip Mills
Tunnel Furnace
Lime Plant
Lime Plant (500t/d) Kiln 1
Lime Plant (500t/d) Kiln 2
Dolo Plant
Dolo Plant (300/d) Kiln
Captive Power Plant
2
III
1
2
3
4
IV
1
2
V
1
VI
1
2
VII
1
VII
I
1
2
1
2
Power Plant (30 MW) - 1

Power Plant (30 MW) - 2
Main process stack
Dedusting Stack
Flue
type
Height
(m)
Top
Dia
(m)
Exit
Velocity
m/s
Flow Rate
Nm3/h
Gas
Temp
o
C
Emissions g/s
SPM
SO2
NOx
Existing Plant (Under Construction)

C
DD
DD
70
45
45
3.5
5
3.5
18
19
17
623688.7
1343547
589039.3
200
40
40
0.55
18.5
7.7
1.6
0
0
5.54
0
0
60
6.6
20
2464207
160
23.9
42
14.3
DD
60
18.3
1863429
50
24
DD
DD
DD
DD
60
60
35
35
2.1
2.1
2.8
2.8
9.8
9.8
3.1
3.1
122243
122243
68744.4
68744.4
40
40
120
120
1.62
1.62
0.71
0.71
0
0
0.14
0.14
0
0
0.31
0.31
C
C
120
120
4.2
4.2
7.9
7.9
394171
394171
260
260
1.96
1.96
0.6
0.6
6.12
6.12
40
1.5
18
114555.1
300
0.16
2.59
8.41
C
C
55
55
1.8
1.8
15
15
137466.1
137466.1
135
135
1.39
1.39
0.5
0.5
2.22
2.22
55
1.5
15
95462.6
135
0.97
0.78
0.97
C
C
50
3
16.8
50
3
16.8
80
4
20
30
3
20
427672
427672
120
120
4.44
4.44
4.2
4.2
2.22
2.22
636660
448668
150
65
8.84
6.23
144.9
0
61.9
0
C
DD
Resultant Concentrations after Implementation of Expansion Project

The modelling predictions and the resultant concentrations for cumulative
modelling are tabulated below in Table-4.6 and Table-4.7. The isopleths
showing the incremental concentrations are given in Figure-4.4 to Figure-4.6.
C4-13

Chapter-4
TABLE-4.6
CUMULATIVE PREDICTED 24-HOURLY SHORT TERM INCREMENTAL
CONCENTRATIONS
Pollutants
Particulate matter (PM10)
Sulphur dioxide (SO2)
Nitrogen oxides (NOx)
Maximum Incremental Levels

(g/m3)
9.75
9.2
4.53
Direction
NE
NE
NE
TABLE-4.7
CUMULATIVE RESULTANT GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATIONS (24-HOURLY)
Pollutant
Max Baseline
PM (PM10)
SO2
NOx
54.9
13.8
18.5
Concentrations (g/m3)
Incremental
Resultant
Concentration
9.75
64.7
9.2
23.0
4.53
23.03
NAAQS Limits
100
80
80
The incremental concentrations when superimposed over the existing maximum

baseline concentrations, the cumulative resultant concentrations are observed to
be within the permissible levels for residential/rural conditions. The Resultant
concentration for PM10, SO2 and NOx are observed as 64.7 g/m3, 23.0 g/m3 and
23.03 g/m3 respectively.
C4-14

Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
2000
4000
6000
8000
Cumulative Modeling for PM
3
1
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
1.000
2.000
3.000
COMMENTS:
4.000
SOURCES:
5.000
6.000
7.000
ug/m^3
8.000
9.000
9.750
COMPANY NAME:
14
RECEPTORS:
MODELER:
441
Dr. Chandra Sekhar

OUTPUT TYPE:
SCALE:
Concentration
MAX:
DATE:
9.74518 ug/m^3
23-07-2015
1:125,000
4 km
PROJECT NO.:
G:\Kishore\Modeling\Aermod\NMDC Pellet plant\NMDC\PMCum.isc
FIGURE-4.4
CUMULATIVE SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCS OF PM
C4-15

Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
4000
6000
8000
Cumulative Modeling for SO2
2000
-6000
-4000
-2000
-8000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
1.000
2.000
3.000
COMMENTS:
4.000
SOURCES:
5.000
6.000
7.000
ug/m^3
8.000
9.000
9.180
COMPANY NAME:
14
RECEPTORS:
MODELER:
441
Dr. Chandra Sekhar

OUTPUT TYPE:
SCALE:
Concentration
MAX:
DATE:
9.18151 ug/m^3
23-07-2015
1:125,000
4 km
PROJECT NO.:
G:\Kishore\Modeling\Aermod\NMDC Pellet plant\NMDC\SOCUm.isc
FIGURE-4.5
CUMULATIVE SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCS OF SO2
C4-16

Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
6000
8000
Cumulative Modeling for NOx
2000
4000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
1.000
2.000
COMMENTS:
3.000
SOURCES:
8000
ug/m^3
4.000
4.530
COMPANY NAME:
14
RECEPTORS:
MODELER:
441
Dr. Chandra Sekhar

OUTPUT TYPE:
SCALE:
Concentration
MAX:
DATE:
4.52856 ug/m^3
23-07-2015
1:125,000
4 km
PROJECT NO.:
G:\Kishore\Modeling\Aermod\NMDC Pellet plant\NMDC\NOCu.isc
FIGURE-4.6
CUMULATIVE SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCS OF NOx
C4-17

Chapter-4
4.3.3.3 Air Pollution Control Measures

The air pollution control system proposed in the expansion project is given below:
During the construction phase of the proposed project appropriate mitigation
measures will be implemented to ameliorate the anticipated air quality problems.
Various dust collection equipment such as cyclone separators, wet scrubber,
fabric bag filters, electro static precipitator (ESP), etc. will be adopted to remove
particulate matter from gas streams. The dust laden air will be sucked from
different dust generating points by means of suction hoods, ducting network and
cleaned in the ESP to let out clean air to atmosphere through stack of required
height.
In order to meet the statutory GLC limits for SO 2 and NOx, required chimney
heights will be provided for proper dispersion. The stack height for process
dedusting is estimated as 80m and that for plant dedusting would be about 30m.
Stack will be provided with port hole and working platform so that stack
monitoring can be done as per norms of statutory authority. The quantum of dust
generation for process gas dedusting is estimated about 1.4 tph and for plant
dedusting is about 6.03 tph. The ESP dust shall be recycled in the process.
Bag filters/ Scrubber type dust extraction system is envisaged for hot pellet
conveying line. The facilities planned for controlling the air pollution and
emissions with and without air pollution control measures are summarized in
Table-4.8.
TABLE-4.8(A)
PROPOSED FACILITIES FOR CONTROL OF AIR POLLUTION
Sr.
No
Name
and
description of
material
consumed
A
1
Dust generation
Filter cake
Coke breeze
Process
of
consumption
Pellet making
Name
and
nature
of
Pollutant
generated
Process gas &

plant
dedusting
dust
Quantity of
Pollutant
generated
Controlling
measure adapted
Emissions
to
atmosphe
re/
surroundi
ng
From process
gas:
10,044 TPA
ESP for
process
dedusting
From
process
gas:
<334.8 TPA
From
plant
dedusting:
ESP & Bag filter for

plant dedusting
gas
From plant
C4-18

Chapter-4
Sr.
No
Name
and
description of
material
consumed
Process
of
consumption
Name
and
nature
of
Pollutant
generated
Limestone
B
1
Quantity of
Pollutant
generated
43,470 TPA
Bentonite
SOx generation
Coke breeze
Fuel
oil)
(Furnace
NOx generation
Heat
hardening
of
green pellets
Heat
hardening
of
green pellets
Controlling
measure adapted
(The dust collected

by ESPs & bag
filters are recycled
in the process)
Emissions
to
atmosphe
re/
surroundi
ng
dedusting:
<134.19
TPA
SO2 in
form
gas
628 TPA
628 TPA
SO2 in
form
gas
3136 TPA
3136 TPA
2008 TPA
2008 TPA
TABLE-4.8(B)
PROPOSED FACILITIES FOR CONTROL OF AIR POLLUTION
Sr. No.
1
Shop / Unit
Pellet Conveying System
Process Gas Cleaning Plant
3
4
Stock Pile Area

Raw Material Transfer
Points in Junction Houses
Proposed Facilities
Bag filters / Scrubber type dust extraction
system is operating
Cyclone separators, wet scrubber, fabric bag
filters, Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP)
DSS with water sprinkling system
Dual Fluid Dust Suppression System
Additional Recommendations
two locations;
Workers will be provided with adequate protective measures to protect them
from inhaling dust;
Good house keeping shall be maintained in the plant premises; road sweeping
machine shall be used to clean road;
The trucks and other vehicles shall be maintained and serviced regularly to
reduce air emissions; and
Usage of respiratory protective equipment by all employees to be ensured.
4.3.3.4 Fugitive Dust Emissions & Control Measures

The following technologies and requirements as per CPCB guidelines are
recommended for control of dust and fugitive emissions for the proposed
expansion project. These will be strictly implemented.
C4-19

Chapter-4
The fugitive dust generated is sucked through ducting network & bag filter by
centralized DE fan. Dust collecting silo provide below the hopper. At regular
interval dust are disposed by trucks.
Specific Measures to Control Fugitive Emissions
Raw Materials Handling & Transfer Section
To control the fugitive dust emissions at the stock piles on the ground, conveyor
transfer points, vibrating screens, etc which would be major source of fugitive
dusts, both water sprinkling and dry fogging (DFDS) would be adopted for dust
suppression. The DFDS system generates a layer of fine water droplets (fog) that
a dust particle cannot pass through without colliding with water droplet. It does
not use any chemicals as dust suppressant agent. DF requires only compressed
air and water pressure for atomization through specially designed nozzles. DF is
applicable for coal dusts, coke dust, ore dust etc., which are non-reactive with
water if the material is not hot.
The conventional dust extraction system (DE) will comprise of pulse jet type bag
filter, centrifugal fan with motor and other accessories, suction hood, duct work,
stack, etc., will be provided. The pollution control facility at RHMS can be
summarized as:
Stock pile & wagon tipper plain water spray;

Rest all transfer point DFDS;
All crusher house bag filter based dust extraction; and
DE system with bag filters in case of crusher house of lime/dolo handling plant.
The following measures will also be implemented in the raw material handling area
in order to control fugitive dust:
Raw material storage area will be covered to control fugitive dust.

Water sprinkling system will be provided at raw material storage area for
sprinkling water at regular intervals.
A closed conveyor system will be provided for transportation of raw material
from the stock yard to the respective plant.
Conveyor systems, crushers, screens and finished product area will have
independent dust extraction units of adequate capacity.
Dust extraction system will have bag filter unit provided with ducts, extraction
fan and stack of appropriate height.
Pellet Plant
There will be dust suppression system for raw material preparation, handling and
different material transfer points in pellet plant.
Mixed material drying unit: Multi cyclone-scrubber based de-dusting facility; and
Induration unit: ESP based de-dusting facility.
C4-20

Chapter-4
Process Gas Cleaning System

A gas cleaning plant (GCP) comprising of dust catcher, scrubber and wet ESP will
be installed.
Roads
Measures for effective prevention and control of fugitive emissions to be provided
for the roads are given in Table-4.9.
TABLE-4.9
CONTROL MEASURES ON THE ROADS
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
Control Measures Proposed

All roads on which vehicle
movement of raw materials or
products take place would be
paved.
Limiting the speed of vehicles.
Employing preventive measures
to minimize dust build up on
roads.
Carry out regular sweeping of
roads to minimize emissions.
Accumulated dust shall be
removed / swept regularly and
water the area after sweeping.
Details
The paved roads would be maintained as
paved at all times and necessary repairs to
be done immediately after damages to the
road if any.
Limiting the speed of vehicle to 10 km/hr for
heavy vehicles with in the plant premises to
prevent the road dust emissions.
Preventive measures include covering of
trucks and paving of access areas to
unpaved areas.
Mitigative controls include vacuum sweeping,
water flushing.
Any deposits of dust on the roads would be
cleaned regularly by sweeping machines.
4.3.3.5 Summary of Proposed Air Pollution Control (APC) Measures

In line with the above stated proposals for air pollution prevention and control of
the emissions from proposed production facilities, a summarized list of required
APC measures is presented in Table 4.10. Air pollution control measures
envisaged above will be designed suitably so as to meet the air emission norms.
The table indicates design target and control measures at respective sources.
TABLE-4.10
EMISSION NORMS FOR AIR POLLUTION CONTROL (APC) MEASURES
Sr.
No
1
Production
Unit/
Facilities
Raw
materials
handling &
transfer
section
Proposed Emission Control Devices

Non-Point Sources
Point Sources
-
Covered conveyor
Dry fogging
Water sprinkling
Bag filter
DE system
DE stacks
Design Target
Dust outlet: 50
mg/Nm3
Work
zone dust level: <
5 mg/m3
C4-21

Chapter-4
Sr.
No
2
Production
Unit/
Facilities
Pellet plant
Proposed Emission Control Devices

Non-Point Sources
Point Sources
Dust
suppression
system
for
raw
material preparation &
handling.
-Multi
cyclonescrubber
based
de-dusting
for
drying unit.
-ESP
for
induration unit.
Design Target
Dust outlet: 50
mg/Nm3
Work
zone dust level: <
5 mg/ m3
4.3.4 Impact on Traffic due to Transportation of Raw Materials and Products

The proposed expansion site is well connected to NH43. An approach road is to
be planned connecting the site and NH43. Amaguda railway station on
KirandulKotavalasa section is located at about 3 km from the proposed site in its
SSW direction. A railway siding is planned from Amaguda and Ambagaon railway
stations to the Integrated Steel Plant, Nagarnar, NMDC for receipt of incoming
raw materials and dispatch of finished products.
All raw materials required for the proposed project will be transported by using
roadways except iron ore concentrate in slurry form transported through pipeline.
Impacts due to the transportation of raw material and products by road on
ambient air quality has been carried out and the details are given below.
4.3.4.1 Details of Mathematical Modeling
Model Input Data
The parameters considered for prediction of GLCs are CO and NO x. A study area
within a radius of 10 km around the project site has been taken into consideration
to compute the ground level concentrations (GLC) of the said air pollutants. The
line sources are taken according to national highway to the project site. The
emission rates as inputs to the line source model are calculated based on
Emission factor development for Indian vehicles, a project executed by
Automative Research Association of India, Pune, 2008. The inputs used for
modeling area given in Table-4.11.
TABLE-4.11
INPUT TO THE MODEL
Raw Material
Truck capacity (T)
No. of trucks
Emission Factors
CO (g/km/vehicle)
NOx (g/km/vehicle)
Emission Rate
CO (g/s)
NOx (g/s)
Details
25
31 Trucks per day
3.97
6.77
0.014
0.024
C4-22

Chapter-4
The predicted CO and NOx concentrations from additional vehicular traffic are
presented in Table-4.12 and the isopleths showing the incremental
concentrations for CO and NOx are shown in Figure-4.7 to Figure-4.8
respectively.
TABLE-4.12
PREDICTED PEAK HOURLY AIR POLLUTION
DUE TO ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC
Sr. No.
1
2
Parameter
Carbon monoxide
Oxides of nitrogen
Concentration ( g/m3)
0.25
0.43
Mitigation Measures
Sprinkling of water and fine spray from nozzles to suppress the dust;
On road- Inspection should be done for black smoke generating machinery;
Promotion of use of cleaner fuel should be done;
Vehicles having Pollution Under Control (PUC) certificate may be allowed to
ply;
Use of covering sheets should be done for trucks to prevent dust dispersion
from the trucks; and
Reducing the speed of a vehicle to 20 kmph can reduce emissions by a large
extent.
4.3.5 Impact on Water Resources and Water Quality

requirement.
In pellet plant, water is mainly used for wetting the ore additive mix before
feeding into balling mills for making balls. Further, in the balling discs controlled
C4-23

Chapter-4
water is used for adjusting final moisture content of the green balls. Further, the
water requirement / consumption in pellet plant are very less. Waste water
discharges from a pellet plant can be divided into two parts, non-contact water
discharges and contact water discharges. Due to repeated recirculation and high
temperature concentration of these salts starts getting built up necessitating
bleeding off of some part of circulating water. Water is also used for contact
cooling (e.g. spraying), mixing of ores, etc. This contact water discharges may be
contaminated with different pollutants and needs to be treated prior to
discharges.
In addition to the above some additional wastewater may be generated due to
floor washings and also from the toilet blocks of the various units of the plant.
The sewage generated from the toilet blocks will be treated in the sewage
treatment plant (STP) and reused for green belt/green cover.
C4-24

Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
05
0.
0.10
0.05
0.05
0.10
0.15
SLINE1
0.05
0.10
15
0.
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
Line Source Modeling for CO
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
0.050
0.100
COMMENTS:
0.150
SOURCES:
8000
ug/m^3
0.200
0.249
COMPANY NAME:
1
RECEPTORS:
MODELER:
441
Dr. Chandra Sekhar

OUTPUT TYPE:
SCALE:
Concentration
MAX:
DATE:
0.24893 ug/m^3
31-07-2015
1:125,000
4 km
PROJECT NO.:
G:\Kishore\Modeling\Aermod\NMDC Pellet plant\NMDC\LiCO.isc
FIGURE-4.7
ISOPLETHS SHOWING INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATIONS FOR CO
C4-25

Chapter-4
PROJECT TITLE:
5
0.0
4000
6000
8000
Isopleths Showing Incremental Concentrations for NOx
0.20
0.15
0
0.2
0.25
0.05 0.10
0.15
0.10
0.2
0
5
0.0
0
0.1
SLINE1
0.10
0.05
0.15
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
0.05
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
2000
4000
6000
8000
0.050
0.100
COMMENTS:
0.150
0.200
SOURCES:
0.250
0.300
ug/m^3
0.350
0.400
0.432
COMPANY NAME:
1
RECEPTORS:
MODELER:
441
Dr. Chandra Sekhar

OUTPUT TYPE:
SCALE:
Concentration
MAX:
DATE:
0.43207 ug/m^3
31-07-2015
1:125,000
4 km
PROJECT NO.:
G:\Kishore\Modeling\Aermod\NMDC Pellet plant\NMDC\LiNox.isc
FIGURE-4.8
ISOPLETHS SHOWING INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATIONS FOR NOx
C4-26

Chapter-4
4.3.5.1 Water Quality

In order to combat industrial pollution and to comply with guidelines laid down by
the statutory authority, suitable treatment units and neutralization pits will be
provided to control water pollution in different water system units. Attempts will
be made to achieve zero discharge as far as practicable by making use of bleed
water from cooling tower and other effluent water for dust suppression.
Wastewater generated from different areas of plant will be treated to the desired
extent and recycled in the re-circulating system as far as possible, facilitating
adequate reuse of water.
Considering the following factors 1) zero discharge from the proposed project,
2) waste disposal mechanism and 3) analysis results of all the surface and ground
water samples are within desirable limits of ISO: 10500, impact on surface and
ground water quality is not envisaged.
Mitigation Measures
minimum;
Clarifier and settling tank for removal of suspended solids;
The following water reduction methods should also be implemented:
Over 90% of the wastewater generated can be reused;
Recirculate wastewaters. Using dry air pollution control systems where
feasible. Otherwise, treating wastewaters;
Segregating wastewaters containing lubricating oils from other wastewater
streams and remove oil;
Controlling water consumption by proper design of spray nozzles and cooling
water systems;
In the segregating process water from cooling water;
The wastewater treated in the effluent treatment plant will be reused in the
plant;
The plant shall be operated on the zero discharge condition; and
The sewage effluent after treatment in sewage treatment plant will be used
for greenbelt development.
C4-27

Chapter-4
Recommended Water Pollution Control Measures
The typical water pollutants and suggested treatment and/or disposal in the pellet
plant are given in Table-4.13. The flow diagram showing Membrane bio-reactor
based sewage treatment plant is shown in Figure-4.9.
TABLE-4.13
WASTEWATER TREATMENT
Name and
description
of material
consumed
Chemical
composition
STP - To treat
Sewer
generated
from various
premises
of
the
Pellet
Plant
sewage water
Incoming
Effluent
Parameter:
a) pH : 6.5 - 8.5
b) BOD: 400 ppm
c) TSS: 250 ppm
Process of
consumption
50 m3/day
Name and
nature of
Pollutant
generated
Sewer
Quantity of
Pollutant
generated
Controlling
measure
adapted
Treated
Effluent
Parameter:
a) pH : 6.5 - 8.5
b) BOD: <10 ppm
c) TSS: <5 ppm
MBR
Technology
based
STP
Plant
C4-28

Chapter-4
FIGURE-4.9
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF PROPOSED MBR BASED STP
C4-29

Chapter-4
4.3.5.2 Impact on Ground Water Quality

The proposed plant does not envisage any ground water drawl during the
operation. There will not be any major adverse impact on ground water.
The waste disposal area around any industry is one of the major factors
deteriorating ground water quality, if the water leached from the waste dumps
contains toxic substances. In the proposed plant, waste material will be dumped
in secured land fill sites and inert wastes will be dumped in low lying area. All
other solid wastes are reused / recycled or sold out.
4.3.5.3 Impact on Surface Water Quality
The proposed plant does not envisage any surface water drawl during the
construction and operation. There will not be any major adverse impact on
surface water.
4.3.5.4 Water Conservation Schemes
In order to conserve water to the maximum possible extent, closed re-circulating
cooling system will be adopted using re-circulating soft water as the primary
cooling media and air or industrial water as secondary cooling media in heat
exchangers. For some users, the industrial water will be used directly/ indirectly
as primary cooling media. The hot re-circulating industrial water will be cooled in
cooling towers.
Rain water harvesting schemes from roof top of the buildings will be included in
the proposed project as part of water conservation measures.
4.3.6
Resource Optimization / Recycle and Reuse

(a) Recycling of green Pellets
Oversize and undersize green pellets will be recycled by belt conveyors back to
the mixed material stream between the mixer and the discs. The required green
balls, in the size range of 9 mm to 16 mm will be fed to the indurating machine
for heat hardening.
(b) Recovery of heat and reuse in the process optimization
The induration process is characterized by maximum recovery of heat from the
cooling zones as well as firing zone of the travelling grate machine. This calls for
recirculation of hot gases through ducts to different process zones using five fans.
The cooling air, supplied by the cooling air fan, picks up heat from the hot
indurated pellet bed in the first and second cooling zones. The heated air is
recycled to the process as a heat carrier.
(c) Reuse of oversized fired Pellets
The fired pellets discharged from the bin (load cell mounted) at discharge of
indurating machine shall be conveyed to Pellet screening unit. Arrangement shall
C4-30

Chapter-4
be made in Pellet screening unit for collection of oversize pellets generated for
feeding to hearth layer route prior to feeding screen based on the feedback of
weigh scale mounted on hearth layer conveyor.
4.3.7 Design Measures to meet Environmental Standards
During design stage of the plant, efforts will be made for reduction of raw
material requirements by adopting latest technological measures and maximum
recirculation of water so that fresh water consumption can be reduced. All air
pollution control systems will be designed to 50 mg/Nm 3. SO2 emission will be
controlled by tall chimney as per norms. Low NOx burner will be used in all
furnaces. In-plant generated mixed gas will be reused inside the plant. Less
noise generation equipment will be considered while selecting any equipment.
Recycle and reuse of solid waste to the maximum extent will be adopted in the
plant. The plant would be designed conforming to all applicable environmental
laws/standards of SPCB/CPCB/MoEF&CC.
4.3.8 Impact on Noise Levels
The main noise generating sources in the pellet plant will be from pump houses,
compressed air station, DG sets which will be used during emergency conditions
etc. The noise levels at 1m from the source will be in the range of 75-90 dB (A).
The noise dispersion from the plant units has been computed based on the
mathematical model as described below.
4.3.8.1 Mathematical Model for Sound Wave Propagation During Operation
For an approximate estimation of dispersion of noise in the ambient air from the
source point, a standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation is
used. The sound pressure level generated by noise sources decreases with
increasing distance from the source due to wave divergence. An additional
decrease in sound pressure level with distance from the source is expected due to
atmospheric effect or its interaction with objects in the transmission path.
For hemispherical sound wave propagation through homogenous loss free
medium, one can estimate noise levels at various locations, due to different
sources using model based on first principles, as per the following equation:
Lp2
L p1
r2
r1
20 log
(1)
Where Lp2 and Lp1 are sound pressure levels (SPLs) at points located at distances
r2 and r1 from the source. The combined effect of all the sources then can be
determined at various locations by the following equation.
Lp (total )
( Lp1 / 10)
10 log 10
( Lp 2 / 10)
10
( Lp 3 / 10)
10
.........
(2)
Where, Lp1, Lp2, Lp3 are noise pressure levels at a point due to different sources.
Based on the above equations, an user-friendly model has been developed. The
details of the model are as follows:
C4-31

Chapter-4
Maximum number of sources is limited to 200;

Noise levels can be predicted at any distance specified from the source;
Model is designed to take topography or flat terrain;
Co-ordinates of the sources in meters;
Maximum and minimum levels are calculated by the model;
Output of the model in the form of isopleths; and
Environmental attenuation factors and machine corrections have not been
incorporated in the model but corrections are made for the measured L eq
levels.
The major noise generating sources from the proposed plant are listed in Table4.14. These are considered as input to the noise model.
TABLE-4.14
NOISE LEVELS FROM THE PROPOSED EXPANSION PLANT
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Sources
Compressed air station (Main
Plant)
Compressed air station (Filtration
system)
Water Pump House
DG set
Road Weigh bridge
Co-ordinates (m)
X
Y
132
109
Expected Noise
Levels dB(A)
75-85
245
34
75-80
241
-245
-189
70
-10
119
75-85
75-85
65-70
4.3.8.2 Presentation of Results

The isopleths and the noise levels obtained by modelling are presented in Figure4.10. From the Isopleth, it is observed that the noise levels at a distance of 2.0
km and above from the proposed expansion site will be less than 25 dB (A) and
high noise levels will be conformed to work zone areas only. It can be seen hat
noise levels gets diffused rapidly with distance.
From the noise modelling, it can be stated that the impact on the present noise
levels due to proposed expansion project will be restricted to the work zone
environment only. Hence, the impact of noise on the human habitation is
insignificant.
4.3.8.3 Prediction of Impacts
The noise modeling result indicates that the resultant noise levels at plant
boundary do not change much due to the proposed activities. This may be due to
the masking effect since the incremental noise levels due to the proposed project
are less. The predicted incremental noise levels at the boundary of the plant are
less than 40 dB (A), which is well within the prescribed norms for industrial zone.
C4-32

Chapter-4
-2000
2000
-1500
-1000
-500
500
1000
1500
2000
2000
1500
1500
1000
1000
42.00
40.00
38.00
500
500
36.00
34.00
32.00
0
30.00
28.00
-500
-500
26.00
24.00
22.00
-1000
-1000
20.00
18.00
-1500
-2000
-2000
-1500
-1500
-1000
-500
500
1000
1500
-2000
2000
FIGURE-4.10
NOISE DISPERSION CONTOURS
C4-33

Chapter-4
4.3.8.4 Noise Pollution Control Measures

As per model results the incremental noise levels due to the proposed pellet plant
will be <40 dB (A) at the plant boundaries in all the directions. The ambient noise
levels in the region are within permissible limits and are envisaged to be within
the permissible limits after commissioning of the proposed facilities also.
The criterion for environmental noise control is that the design of the proposed
plant will not exceed, in any continuous mode of operation, the level stipulated by
MoEF&CC and/or pollution control board at any point on the site boundary.
The measured noise level produced by any rotating equipment will not exceed 90
dB (A) at a distance of 1.0-m from its boundary in any direction under any load
condition. The noise produced in valves and piping associated with handling
compressible and incompressible fluids will be attenuated to 85 dB(A) at a
distance of 1.0 m from the source by the use of low noise trims, baffle plate
silencers/line silencers, acoustic lagging (insulation), thick-walled pipe work as
and where necessary.
All rotary equipment like fans, blowers, pumps and compressors would be of low
noise design. The grouting of this equipment will be made free from vibrations.
The work zone noise exposure of the operating personnel would be avoided by
remote operation from the control rooms.
Adequate greenbelt development will be done in the plant boundary of the
proposed pellet plant.
4.3.8.5 Recommendation for Reduction in Noise Levels
Noise level can be reduced by stopping leakages from various steam lines,
compressed air lines and other high pressure equipment;
By providing padding at various locations to avoid rattling due to vibration;
Encasement of noise generating equipment where otherwise noise cannot be
controlled;
Providing noise proof cabins to operators where remote control for operating
noise generating equipment is feasible;
The air compressor, process air blower, pneumatic valves should be provided
with acoustic enclosure;
All the design/installation precautions as specified by the manufacturers with
respect to noise control will be strictly adhered to;
High noise generating sources will be insulated adequately by providing
suitable enclosures;
Design and layout of building to minimize transmission of noise, segregation
of particular items of plant and to avoid reverberant areas;
C4-34

Chapter-4
Use of lagging with attenuation properties on plant components / installation

of sound attenuation panels around the equipment;
The noise control system will be designed to form an integral part of the
plant;
Other than the regular maintenance of the various equipment, ear
plugs/muffs are recommended for the personnel working close to the noise
generating units; and
All the openings like covers, partitions shall be designed properly.
4.3.8.6 Noise Control at the Community Level
It should be noted that, the incremental noise levels at the plant boundary will be
less than 40 dB (A). The proposed greenbelt in the project will help to further
attenuate the noise emitted by the various sources in the plant and the
community noise levels will not be increased.
4.3.9 Impact on Soil Quality and Management
Most of the impacts of expansion project on soils are restricted to the construction
phase, which are expected to be stabilized during operational phase.
The impact on the topsoil will be confined to the main plant area. The air borne
fugitive dust from the plant is likely to be deposited on the topsoil in the immediate
vicinity of the plant boundary. However, the fugitive emissions are likely to be
controlled to a great extent through proposed control measures like electro static
precipitator, ventilation systems and industrial road sweeping machines in all plant
areas. Good greenbelt development has been envisaged to further arrest the
fugitive emissions.
4.3.10 Solid Waste Management
waste materials will be reused / re-utilized in the plant process. Used Oil/cotton
wastes are the hazardous waste produced from the proposed expansion project
which will be disposed-off to registered recyclers. The generation of solid waste
and hazardous waste generation and its disposal is given in Table-4.15 and
Table-4.16.
TABLE-4.15
SOLID WASTE GENERATION AND DISPOSAL
Sr. No
1
Solid waste
Dust from ESP
(Process gas plant
and Dedusting dust)
Generation TPA
53,045
Proposed disposal
Shall be completely reused in
the process.
C4-35

Chapter-4
TABLE-4.16
HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATION AND ITS DISPOSAL
Sr. No
1
Category
Waste oil & Used oil
Quantity KL or
TPA
20 KL per year
Proposed disposal
Disposed-off to registered
recyclers.
4.3.11 Impact on Ecology
Impacts on Terrestrial Ecology
The impact on terrestrial ecology may occur due to emission of gaseous

pollutants like SO2 PM and NOx. These pollutants at a very low dose act as
atmospheric fertilizer for the vegetation. However, at higher doses, they can be
injurious to both vegetation as well as animals.
The main sources of air pollution from the proposed plant would be from the
process stacks. The pollutants from the proposed plant include sulphur dioxide,
particulate matter and NOx.
Presentation of Modeling Results
The impact of air pollutants on vegetation due to the proposed integrated pellet
plant is identified and quantified by using air dispersion modeling.
The simulations have been done to evaluate PM, SO 2 and NOx likely to be
contributed by the proposed expansion project. The resultant concentrations are
estimated as 56.2 g/m3 for PM, 22.6 g/m3 for SO2 and 22.1 g/m3 for NOx
concentrations of pre-monsoon season which is within the limits as per National
Ambient Air Quality Standards. Hence, a marginal impact is envisaged due to
proposed pellet plant on the surrounding forest areas.
Impact on Aquatic Ecology
Since the unit will be operating on zero discharge process, no adverse impact on
aquatic ecology is envisaged. The plant drainage system will be suitably designed
such that the storm water does not carry any pollutants.
Impact of Air Emissions on Forest Blocks
The proposed power plant is not part of any forest block or forest lands. However
four protected forest blocks exist within in 10 km radius from project site; the
forests of this region are basically comprised of northern tropical deciduous
forests.
The impacts on the forest blocks will be minimum as the green belt of 33 % tree
cover will be developed in the area comprising of 81.18 acres (25 ha), choosing
all native indigenous species which exhibit high Air Pollution Tolerance Index
(APTI) levels which will mitigate the Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM), NOx,
SO2 and noise levels.
C4-36

Chapter-4
Mitigation measures to be proposed for the impacts
Development of Green belt and plantation within the project site would
help in ameliorating the impact and improving the environmental quality of
the surrounding area;
Choosing deciduous trees which are having Air Pollution Tolerance Index
(APTI) species of plants of the native plant species which are found in the
buffer zone will be beneficial and will able to acclimatize in the green belt
area of the proposed plant area, sooner, if the native and local flora are
chosen;
Being a pellet plant, suspended Particulate Matter (SPM) and sulphur

dioxide (SO2) and Oxides of Nitrogen will be the important pollutants.
Electrostatic Precipitators with higher efficiency will be installed to limit the

particulate (SPM) emission within statutory limit;
NOx emissions from the boilers will be controlled by controlling combustion

measures, which will be approached by way of low NOx burners or by air
staging in furnace; and
Fugitive dust will be controlled by adopting dust extraction and dust

suppression measures and development of green belt along the periphery
of the proposed pellet plant.
4.3.12 Impact on Socio-Economic Aspects After the construction of Project

This section of the chapter deals with the demographic, social and economic
impact of the study area. The proposed project site is free from human
settlements and all the villages are situated at a considerable distance from the
plant area, except few villages, which are within one km radius of plant area.
However, the project is expected to result in improvements in the socio-economic
levels in the study area.
4.3.12.1 Positive Impacts of the Project
There will be number of positive changes on the socio-economic conditions of the
project study area villages as well as the population. There will be a natural
change, due to industrialization process, in the scenario leading into the socioeconomic development of project core zone area and also the buffer zone.
Considering project size and investment, it is expected to create direct and
indirect impact on:
Employment potential;
Increased business opportunity;
Better living standards; and
Access to improved infrastructure facilities.
The project is expected to provide impetus for economic development in the
immediate surroundings and would also generate local employment. The
cumulative likely positive impacts of the project will result in increased mobility,
employment generation and above all better economic integration of the area
with the major market and trade centers within and outside the districts.
C4-37

Chapter-5
5.0
ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES FOR TECHNOLOGY AND SITE
5.1
Analysis of Alternative site

This is an expansion project of NMDC Integrated Iron & Steel Plant with addition
of 2.0 MTPA Pellet Plant at Kasturi and Chowkawada Village.
Site is selected at Kasturi and Chowkawada village where about 74.19 ha of land
are available towards eastern side of upcoming NMDC Integrated Iron and Steel
Plant near Nagarnar;
The land was acquired and taken possession from State Revenue Department in
August2010;
Availability of land, power, water at NMDC Steel Plant complex and site is well
connected to road and railway network;
Dye to nearness of site, Pellets produced from the proposed plant can be easily
transported to Steel plant complex;
No forest land is involved in the proposed site; and
No displacement of persons is involved.
Hence, no alternative site was analysed.

5.2
Analysis of Process Technology

On the basis of the technological considerations, final selection of process flow for
the proposed pellet plant has been arrived at as indicated below:
Receipt of Beneficiated Iron ore slurry by pipeline;
Filtration of iron ore slurry by pressure filters;
Grinding of Additives (limestone, bentonite and coke breeze) in separate mill;
Use of Coke breeze as solid fuel;
Disc pelletiser for production of green balls; and
Travelling grate process for induration of pellets.
5.2.1 Receipt of Beneficiated Iron ore slurry by pipeline

To obtain green balls with the required strength, fineness of the raw materials
must be ensured, which is determined by laboratory tests. Characteristics of ore
fines govern the degree of fineness and it has been observed that under Indian
condition, grinding of ore to size 6080% passing through 325 mesh (0.044 mm)
is necessary for production of high strength green pellets. In this project we are
receiving the beneficiated iron ore concentrate ( 325#, 80%) from the proposed
iron ore beneficiation facility at Bacheli in the form of slurry through slurry
pipelines inside the pellet plant.
5.2.2 Filtration of iron ore slurry by pressure filters
Dewatering of iron ore slurry shall be carried out to obtain filter cake. Vacuum
disc filters, ceramic filters and pressure filters are generally used for filtration.
However, for this project pressure filters have been adopted in view of their
efficiency even with high Alumina content as is prevalent in Indian iron ores.
C5-1

Chapter-5
5.2.3 Grinding of Additives (limestone, bentonite and coke breeze) in separate mill
to (200 mesh, 80 %) by suitable grinding in this unit. Coarse additives namely,
limestone, bentonite and coke breeze are ground to required fineness in vertical
roller mill on time sharing basis. Roller mill is complete with mill feed hopper,
cyclone, bag filter, hot gas generator, circulation fan, surge hopper and transport
vessel. Magnetic separator is provided before each roller mill. Ground material
from roller mill is carried to respective ground material storage bins in balling unit
by pneumatic conveying.
5.2.4 Disc pelletiser for production of green balls
The types of equipment used in commercial plants for production of green pellets
are drum, disc and cone pelletisers. However majority of Pellet plants worldwide,
use either drum pelletiser or disc pelletiser. Brief description of these two types of
pelletisers is discussed below.
Drum Pelletiser
Drum pelletisers are the oldest equipment for production of green pellets. All
pelletising plants operated on an industrial scale in the USA and in Sweden were
exclusively equipped with drums upto about 1956. Owing to the fact that their
component parts have been known and proven for many years, as well as to their
easy operational control under relevant operating conditions, they are now a days
also used frequently in pelletising plants. The drum consists of a slightly inclined
cylinder open at both ends with a cone at the feed end in order to prevent
backward flow of pellet feed. For the improvement of the adhesive strength and
roughness, the metallic smooth inner wall is coated with a layer of moist fines
and its thickness is controlled and limited by scrapers. These scrapers are
stationary or rotating and arranged in parallel to the drum axis. Due to the mode
of operation, the drum has practically no sorting effect. The drum discharge has
to be screened and the green pellets of desired size are separated. The product
oversize after crushing combined with under size and fresh feed material is
charged to the drum. The under size pellets during their repeated passage
through the drum serve as seeds for the formation of properly sized pellets.
Disc Pelletiser
Today, even though adopted at a much later date than drum pelletisers, disc
pelletiser covers a considerable portion of world pellet production. The disc
pelletiser consists of a concentrically rotating inclined disc composed by a circular
plain bottom area with peripheral skirt. To ensure sufficient frictional resistance
and a good lifting effect for the pellet feed, a moist ore bed of about 310 cm
thickness is layered on the bottom and is controlled by scrapers. Different
scrapper designs have been developed such as stationary and oscillating or
rotating spirals. Attempts have been made to utilise a maximum part of the disc
area for green ball formation and 90% of bottom area utilisation for green ball
formation have been achieved after extensive research and development. Since
C5-2

Chapter-5
during ball formation a classification occurs up to the discharge of pellet of

desired size, the quantity of necessary pellet feed corresponds to the amount of
pellets discharged. If nevertheless, small amount of undersize develop, which
mostly occurs during transportation, these are separated by roller screen and
recycled. The size of the ball in a disc pelletiser is easily controlled by adjusting
the moisture content of raw feed, angle of inclination of disc, rotational speed of
disc, etc.
The comparison between drum and disc pelletiser is given in Table5.1.
TABLE-5.1
COMPARISON BETWEEN DRUM AND DISC PELLETISER
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
Parameters of Comparison
Suitability of process
Commercial application
Quality of green pellets
Drum Pelletiser
Disc Pelletiser
Suitable
Well established
Suitable for further
processing
Necessary as no
classification takes
place inside the
drum
Suitable
Well established
Suitable
for
further
processing
Not necessary for BF
grade
pellets
as
classification takes place
during operation
Screening of green pellets
More
Less
Quantity of recirculating
materials
Requirement of space
More
7
8
Capital investment
Production cost
More
More
3040% less than drum

pelletisers
Less
48% lower for BF grade
pellets
Based on the above and considering the extent of commercial use and economic
advantages, disc pelletiser for production of green pellets has been envisaged for
the proposed pellet plant.
5.2.5 Travelling grate process for induration of pellets
The major indurating processes developed for thermal treatment of green pellets
are as follows:
Shaft furnace;
Graterotary hearthshaft furnace;
Annular furnace;
Circular indurating furnace;
Travelling grate; and
Gratekiln cooler.
However, majority of the pellet plants worldwide use either travelling grate or
gratekiln cooler process. These two processes have been described below:
C5-3

Chapter-5
Travelling Grate Process

The Travelling grate machine used for induration of green pellets resembles the
wellknown sintering machine of Dwight Lloyd design. The machine consists of
three main parts:
The central part is movable and consists of pallets, composed of a frame and
a supporting structure into which grate bars are inserted. The pallets are
connected by means of sliding seal bars with the wind boxes in a gas tight
manner;
The bottom part is composed of the stationary wind boxes connected with gas
mains and the moving grate;
The upper part comprises the heat energy and air supply system in a
stationary hood above the grate.
The system serves to circulate the necessary drying, heating, firing and cooling
gases through the moving pellet bed. Important process equipment is the fan
with which the process gases are moved through the charge. The entire thermal
treatment is achieved during one passage of pallets on the induarting machine.
Thus no transfer of green pellets from preheating to firing is required as in the
case of Grate Kiln. To protect the grate bars from thermal shocks, hearth and
side layers of indurated pellets are used. A number of process developers have
designed the travelling grate process. However, most of the Travelling grate type
commercial plants are either designed by M/s Lurgi or M/s Arthur G. Mckee and
Co. and the share of Lurgi designed plants are more.
The advantages of Travelling grate induration process are production of pellet
from different types of iron ore fines, uniform quality of pellets, possibility of use
of different types of fuels of relatively low specific heat consumption, production
of large pellet quantities in one machine, etc. As a result, this process is one of
the most popular processes for production of pellets. As the machine features a
sophisticated system of gas recirculation within the individual zones, a high
precision control and high degree of automation have also been developed for
most economic operation of the travelling grate machines. In India all the existing
operating pellet plants are equipped with Travelling grate process.
Grate Kiln Process
The grate kiln process is also the most common process for pellet hardening.
Devised by Metso Minerals (formerly AllisChalmers/ Boliden Allis/ Svedala, USA),
it is basically a modification of the Lepol cement making technology. It differs
from the rest of the pellet hardening units in which drying, hardening and cooling
are carried out in a single device. The grate kiln unit comprises three equipment
viz. straight grate, rotary kiln and circular cooler. The green balls are first dried
and preheated on the straight grate by gases discharged from the rotary kiln.
They are then hardened in a counter flow manner in the rotary kiln and air cooled
in an annular cooling system in rotary kiln. The first grate kiln unit was
commissioned by M/s Cleveland Cliffs in the Humboldt. Mine plant during 1960.
The bed on the drying and preheat grates is 150200 mm whereas the bed on the
straight grate machine is deeper. The firing on the rotary kiln lasts longer and the
C5-4

Chapter-5
material is cooled in a separate cooler, in which cooling air passes through a

relatively deep (0.81.0 m) bed of pellets. The biggest rotary kiln installed in USA
has a capacity of 4.0 MTPA. The major drawback of grate kiln system is likely
buildup of materials inside the rotary kiln and it is necessary to test the raw
materials to establish proper thermal regime of the kiln. However, the grate kiln
process has been adopted for production of pellets from different types of iron ore
fines and the specific energy consumption is low compared to Travelling grate
process. The quality of pellets (produced by this process) with respect to tumbler
and shatter index are superior and uniform, as pellets are rotated and tumbled
continuously during firing inside the kiln.
A comparison of travelling grate process and grate kiln process is at Table-5.2.
TABLE-5.2
COMPARISON OF TRAVELLING GRATE AND GRATE KILN PROCESS
Sr. No.
1
Item
Traveling Grate
Process and equipment design
Heat hardening Drying, preheating, induration and
cycle
cooling are done on a single grate
Grate bars
Since induration is done on the

grate,
the
grate
bars
are
subjected to high temperature and
have to be made of alloy steels.
The use of side and bed layers is
necessary.
Pellet
movement
Pellets remain stationary on a

static bed over the machine
throughout the process
Process Control
Burners
Fans
4
5
Ability to
produce all
grades of
pellets
Largest
machine
World
installed
capacity
Grate Kiln
Drying
and
preheating
performed on a traveling grate
and induration is carried out in
a Rotary Kiln. Cooling is done in
a separate cooler.
Since, only preheating and
drying are done on the grate,
the temperatures to which grate
bars are subjected are much
less. No side or bed layers are
necessary. Bed depth is only
half of that in the Travelling
Grate process.
Pellets
are
tumbled
continuously
during
the
induration.
There are a number of burners

along the length of induration
furnace
There are several fans operating
in series with multiple fan controls
Yes
A single burner is used for the

Kiln
The largest machines to date are

768m2 (CVRD) with 7.0 MTPA
capacity
About 294.0 million tonne
The largest kiln installed to date

is LKAB4 with 6 MTPA capacity
Less number of fans with single

fan control.
Yes
About 154.0 million tonne
Selection of Process Route

Travelling grate and Grate kiln process are the two established process routes for
iron ore pelletisation, dominating the global pellet scenario. However, as per the
information available, none of the technology suppliers of travelling grate process
have supplied pellet plants of capacity 0.6 or near about in the recent past.
C5-5

Chapter-5
Outotec has recently taken up design development of 1.2 to 2.0 Mt/yr pellet plant
with latest technology keeping in view the Indian market. It is reported that M/s
VT CORP in technical collaboration with one of the world leader in iron ore
pelletisation, M/s Aker Solution, have developed pellet plant of 0.6 1.2 Mt/yr
capacity based on straight grate process. However, they have not supplied any
plant of this capacity till date.
Metso mineral, USA possesses technology of Grate Kiln process and have supplied
pellet plants of capacity in the range of 1.2 1.5 Mt/yr based on Hematite or
Magnetite ores. The Chinese design institutes have developed pellet plant based
on Grate kiln technology with magnetite ore, since the same is easily available in
China and 0.6 pellet plant module is readily available with Chinese technology
suppliers.
Further, few pellet plants with hematite iron ore have been installed in India
based on the Chinese GrateKiln technology. These plants (Arya & BMM Ispat)
both 1.2 MTPA capacities each are in operation, but certain operating problems
have been reported.
It can also be seen from the Table-5.3 that most of the pellet plants installed in
India, particularly for sizes higher than 1.2 MTPA are based on straight grate
technology with hematite as the feed ore Based on above, it can be inferred that
for a 2.0 MTPA or higher module the likely technology that would be preferred is
Travelling Grate particularly with hematite as the feed material. Accordingly, for
the present project, Travelling grate process has been selected considering its
suitability towards haematite ore, size of the machine and based on operating
experience of pellet plants in India.
TABLE-5.3
STATUS OF MAJOR PELLET PLANT INSTALLED IN INDIA
Sr.
No.
Plant
Location
Process
Comm.
Date
Cap.
Mt/yr.
Chowgule & Co.,

Pale, Goa
TISCO, Noamundi
Travelling
Grate
Grate Kiln
Oct. 1966
0.5
1971
0.9
Mandovi,
Shiroda, Goa
Travelling
Grate
20.05.79
1.8
KIOCL,
Mangalore
Travelling
Grate
14.01.87
3.0 {3.5}
Dismantled
In 1980
Dismantled
In 1981
Stopped
from
1981 to 91,
(Now
operating )
Operating
Hy grade
Ltd., Vizag
Travelling
Grate
06.11.96
3.0 {4.0}
Operating
KIOCL.
Shaft
20.08.00
0.5
pellets
Status
Stopped
Remark
Not
operational
Not
operational
Dry grinding of
Iron ore fines
Magnetite
concentrate
used
till
recently.
Initially
wet
grinding
of
Iron ore fines.
Recently,
switched over
to
haematite
concentrate
Suitable only
C5-6

Chapter-5
Sr.
No.
Plant
Location
Process
Mangalore
Furnace
JSW, Vijayanagar
Hygrade
pellets
Ltd.
,Vizag
Bharat Mines
and minerals,
Ispat Ltd.
Hospet
Arya I &S Co.
Matkambeda,
Barbil
JSPL, Barbil
Travelling
Grate
Travelling
Grate
10
11
Comm.
Date
Nov, 2000
Cap.
Mt/yr.
Status
Remark
for Magnetite
ores
Dry grinding of
Iron ore fines.
Haematite
concentrate
Operating
2006
3.0 {4.2}
{5.0}
4.0
Grate
Kiln
2007
1.2
Operating
Haematite
Grate
Kiln
2007
1.2
Operating
Haematite
Travelling
Grate
2010
4.0
Operating
Haematite
Operating
C5-7

Chapter-6
6.0
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM
6.1
General
To ensure compliance to environmental regulation and also to maintain healthy
environmental conditions around the proposed pellet plant, several measures
have been proposed in the Environment Management Plan (EMP) for mitigation of
adverse environmental impacts. These shall be implemented as per proposal and
shall be monitored regularly.
A monitoring strategy shall be ensured that all environmental resources, which
may be subject to contamination, are kept under review and hence monitoring of
the individual elements of the environment will be done. A major part of the
sampling and measurement activities will be concerned with long term monitoring
aimed at providing an early warning of any undesirable changes or trends in the
natural environment that could be associated with the plant activity.
This is essential to determine whether the changes are in response to a cycle of
climatic conditions or due to plant activities. During the operation phase,
Environment Management Department (EMD) will undertake all the monitoring
work to ensure the effectiveness of environmental mitigation measures. The
suggestions given in the environmental monitoring programme will be
implemented by the EMD by following an implementation schedule.
In case of any alarming variation in ground level concentration in ambient air,
stack emission, work zone air, water quality or noise monitoring results.
Performance of air pollution control equipment, effluent treatment facilities,
wastewater discharge etc., will be discussed in the EMD and any deviation from
the prescribed norms will be reported to the higher management for immediate
rectification action. In addition to the monitoring programme, the following will
also be done to further ensure the effectiveness of mitigation measures:
Comprehensive environmental audits will be carried out for the entire plant
operation to check for compliance with standards / applicable norms by
inhouse experts. Third party environmental audits will be carried out once in
every year;
The environmental aspects to be monitored will ensure proper implementation
and effectiveness of various mitigative measures envisaged / adopted during
the design and commissioning stage of the proposed project plan are
described here under.
6.1.1 Meteorology
Automatic continuous meteorological station will be installed in the plant and the
observations recorded will be used in respect of the project. The following
parameters will be recorded regularly:
Wind speed and direction;
Rainfall; and
Temperature and humidity.
C6-1

Chapter-6
6.1.2 Primary and Secondary Emissions and Air Quality Monitoring

Ambient air quality will be monitored regularly in accordance with CPCB/
Chhattisgarh State Pollution Control Board (CSPCB) guidelines. Work zone air
quality will be monitored for the units under operation as per directives of CSPCB
to assess the levels of PM, NOx and SO2.
Stack Emission Monitoring
All major stacks will be monitored regularly in accordance with CPCB/CSPCB
guidelines. Major stacks will be provided with on-line monitoring system.
The emissions from all major stacks will be monitored once in a month using the
manually operated stack monitoring equipment. However, the frequency of
monitoring will be discussed with CSPCB and frequency may be increased as
required in accordance with the stipulation of CSPCB or other statutory
authorities.
Work Zone Monitoring
Work zone air quality shall be monitored as per directives of CPCB/CSPCB to
assess the levels of PM10, NOx and SO2. 8 hourly samples will be collected from all
major unit premises.
Work zone dust levels/fugitive emissions will be monitored inside the plant
regularly. The EMD will keep a record of the same and taking necessary
organizational actions.
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
Ambient air quality will be monitored regularly in accordance with CPCB/CSPCB
guidelines.
6.1.3 Water Quality Monitoring
Wastewater from all units of plant shall be monitored and tested in EMD
laboratory at least once a month as per CPCB/CSPCB guidelines/directives.
However, the frequency of monitoring may be increased if required in accordance
with the stipulations of CSPCB or other statutory authorities. In addition to the
above, NMDC will carry out monitoring of certain parameters in some of the plant
areas as a quality measure for pollutants in the discharge.
6.1.3.1 Ground Water Monitoring
Ground water is important source of potable water for surrounding communities.
Ground water will be sampled to check for possible contamination and to
ascertain the trend of variation in the water quality, if any. In case any adverse
trend is noticed, immediate remedial measures shall be taken.
6.1.3.2 Maintenance of Drainage System
The region has records of good rainfall during monsoon and therefore effective
drainage within plant for storm water is essential. The effectiveness of the
C6-2

Chapter-6
drainage system depends on proper cleaning of all drainage pipes/channels just

before monsoon and after at regular interval. Regular checking will be done to
see that none of the drains are clogged due to accumulation of sludge/sediments.
The clogged drains are cleaned as soon as possible, preferably the same day. The
catch-pits linked to the storm water drainage system from the raw material
handling areas are regularly checked and cleaned to ensure their effectiveness.
This checking and cleaning is rigorous during the monsoon season, especially if
heavy rains are forecast.
6.1.4 Noise Monitoring
Ambient noise quality will be monitored regularly in accordance with CPCB /
Chhattisgarh State Pollution Control Board (CSPCB) guidelines.
6.1.4.1 Work Zone Noise Level
Noise levels will be monitored inside the plant and in the study area regularly.
The EMD will keep a record of noise levels and take necessary organisational
actions like rotation of workmen, availability and use of personal protective
devices, damage to enclosures or insulation layers over enclosures and piping.
Noise levels are measured at the source of generation at a 1 m distance. The
noise attenuation measures will be taken at the design stage of the plant itself.
However, in case of high noise generating equipment, which shall not be
frequented by the plant personnel, the area will be clearly marked as High
Noise area and the employees be provided with personal protective equipment
(PPE) like ear plugs/ear muffs. Further, noise levels in the nearby villages will be
monitored regularly to estimate the community noise impact due to operation of
the plant.
6.1.5 House Keeping
The EMD shall be keeping a very close monitoring of housekeeping activities and
organizing regular meetings of joint forum at the shop level (monthly).
6.1.6 Occupational Health and Safety
The routine medical examination of personnel will be carried out in a systematic
manner by the plant medical unit. A systematic programme for medical check-up
at regular intervals will be followed for all workers to ascertain any changes in
health condition due to the working conditions.
6.1.7 Solid/Hazardous Waste Generation and Utilisation
Maximum re-cycling and utilization of generated solid and hazardous waste within
the plant as per guidelines will be done. Minimal amount of hazardous waste shall
be obtained and it will be sold to the authorized recyclers.
6.1.8 Socio-Economic Development
The proposed project will improve the infrastructure and economic conditions of
the local people and thus improve the socio economic development of the region
C6-3

Chapter-6
as whole. The communities will be benefited by the proposed expansion project.

It is suggested that NMDC should have structured interactions with the
community to disseminate the measures taken by the expansion project and also
to elicit suggestions for overall improvement for the development of the area.
6.2
Monitoring Schedule
Environmental monitoring schedules are prepared covering various phases of
project advancement, such as construction phase and regular operational phase.
6.2.1 Monitoring Schedule during Constructional Phase

The construction activities require clearing of vegetation, mobilisation of
construction material and equipment. The construction activities are expected to
last for over thirty months.
The generic environmental measures that need to be undertaken during project
construction stage are given in Table-6.1.
TABLE-6.1
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING DURING PROJECT CONSTRUCTION STAGE
Sr.
No.
1
Potential
Impact
Air emissions
Noise
Action to be Followed
All
equipments
are
operated within specified
design parameters.
Vehicle
trips
to
be
minimized to the extent
possible
Parameters for
Monitoring
Random checks of
equipment
logs/
manuals
Vehicle logs
Maintenance of DG set
emissions
to
meet
stipulated standards
Ambient air quality within
the
premises
of
the
proposed
unit
to
be
monitored.
Gaseous
emissions
(SO2, HC, CO, NOx)
List of all noise generating

machinery
onsite
along
with age to be prepared.
Equipment logs, noise

reading
Equipment
to
be
maintained in good working
order.
Night working is to be
minimized.
Generation
of
vehicular
noise
Noise to be monitored in
ambient air within the plant
premises.
The
ambient
air
quality will conform to
the standards for PM,
SO2, NOx, and CO
Frequency of
Monitoring
Periodic
Periodic
during
site clearance &
construction
activities
Periodic
emission
monitoring
As per CPCB/
SPCB
requirement or
on monthly basis
whichever
is
earlier
Regular
during
construction
activities
Working hour records
Daily records
Maintenance
of
records of vehicles
Spot Noise recording
Daily records
As
per
CPCB/SPCB
requirement or
on
quarterly
basis whichever
C6-4

Chapter-6
Sr.
No.
Potential
Impact
Wastewater
discharge
Soil erosion
Drainage and
effluent
management
Waste
management
Non-routine
events and
accidental
releases
Health
Environmental
management
cell/ unit
10
Loss of flora
and fauna
Parameters for
Monitoring
No untreated discharge to
be made to surface water,
groundwater or soil.
Protect topsoil stockpile
where possible at edge of
site.
Ensure drainage system
and
specific
design
measures
are
working
effectively.
No discharge hoses
shall be in vicinity of
watercourses.
Effective
cover
in
place.
The design to incorporate

existing drainage pattern
and avoid disturbing the
same.
Implement
waste
management
plan
that
identifies and characterizes
every
waste
arising
associated with proposed
activities
and
which
identifies the procedures
for collection, handling &
disposal of each waste
arising.
Plan to be drawn up,
considering
likely
emergencies
and
steps
required to prevent/limit
consequences.
Employees and migrant
labour health check ups
The
environment
management cell/unit is to
be set up to ensure
implementation
and
monitoring
of
environmental safeguards.
Re-vegetation as per forest
guidelines
Visual inspection of
drainage and records
thereof
Comprehensive waste
management
plan
should be in place and
available
for
inspection on-site.
Compliance with MSW
Rules,
1998
and
Hazardous
Wastes
(Management
and
Handling Rules), 2003
Mock
drills
and
records of the same
Frequency of
Monitoring
is earlier
Periodic
during
construction
activities
Periodic
during
construction
activities
Periodic
during
construction
activities
Periodic
check
during
construction
activities
Periodic
during
construction
activities
All
relevant
parameters including
HIV
Responsibilities
and
roles will be decided
before
the
commencement
of
work.
Regular
ups
check
No. of plants, species
During
site
clearance phase
During
construction
phase
6.2.2 Monitoring Schedule during Operational Phase

During operational stage, continuous air emissions from all major units of pellet
plant, wastewater disposal, non-hazardous waste and hazardous waste such as
used oily wastes are expected.
The following attributes, which require regular monitoring based on the
environmental setting and nature of project activities are listed below:
C6-5

Chapter-6
Source emissions and ambient air quality;

Groundwater levels and ground water quality;
Water and wastewater quality (water quality, effluent & sewage quality etc);
Solid and hazardous waste characterisation (fly ash, bottom ash, oily wastes,
ETP sludge, used and waste oil);
Soil quality;
Noise levels (equipment and machinery noise levels, occupational exposures
and ambient noise levels); and
Ecological preservation and afforestation.
The following routine monitoring programme as detailed in Table-6.2 will be
implemented at site. Besides this monitoring, the compliances to all
environmental
clearance
conditions
and
regular
permits
from
CSPCB/MoEF&CC/CPCB will be monitored and reported periodically.
TABLE-6.2
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING DURING OPERATIONAL PHASE
Sr.
No.
1
Potential
Impact
Air Emissions
Stack emissions from all
major units and CPP boilers
to
be
optimized
and
monitored
Stack emissions from DG set
to
be
optimized
and
monitored
Ambient air quality within
the
premises
of
the
proposed unit and nearby
habitations to be monitored.
Exhaust from vehicles to be
minimized by use of fuel
efficient vehicles and well
maintained vehicles having
PUC certificate.
Measuring onsite
data of
meteorology
Noise
Vehicle
trips
to
be
minimized to the extent
possible
Noise
generated
from
operation
of
power
boilers/cooling towers to be
optimized and monitored
Parameters for
Monitoring
Gaseous emissions
(PM,
SO2,
CO,
NOx)
Gaseous emissions
(SO2,
HC,
CO,
NOx)
PM,
RPM, SO2,
NOx, CO and HC.
November
notification
2009
Frequency of
Monitoring
Continuous
monitoring
using
on-line
equipment
during operation
phase
Periodic during
operation phase
As per CPCB/
CSPCB
requirement or
on weekly basis
whichever
is
earlier
Vehicle logs to be
maintained
Wind
speed,
direction,
temp.,
relative humidity
and rainfall.
Vehicle logs
Spot Noise Level
recording;
Leq (night), Leq
(day), Leq (dn)
Continuous
monitoring
using
on-line
weather station
during operation
phase
Daily records
Periodic during
operation phase
Noise
generated
from
operation of DG set to be
optimized and monitored
C6-6

Chapter-6
Sr.
No.
Potential
Impact
Parameters for
Monitoring
Frequency of
Monitoring
DG sets to generate less

than 75 dB(A) Leq at 1-m
from the source
Wastewater
discharge
Drainage and
effluent
management
Water quality
and water levels
Work zone air

contamination
Emergency
preparedness,
such as fire
fighting
Maintenance of
flora and fauna
Waste
management
DG sets are to be provided

at basement with acoustic
enclosures
Generation
of
vehicular
noise
No untreated discharge to
be made to surface water,
groundwater or soil.
Take care in disposal of
wastewater generated such
that soil and groundwater
resources are protected
Compliance of wastewater
discharge to standards
Compliance
of
treated
sewage to standards
Ensure drainage system and
specific design measures are
working effectively.
Design
to
incorporate
existing drainage pattern
and avoid disturbing the
same.
Monitoring
used
water
quality, groundwater quality
around
ash
pond
and
ground water levels
River
water
quality
downstream to discharge
Contaminants such as VOCs
to be reduced by providing
adequate ventilation
Fire protection and safety
measures to take care of fire
and explosion hazards, to be
assessed and steps taken
for their prevention.
Vegetation, greenbelt /
green cover development
Implement
waste
management
plan
that
identifies and characterizes
every
waste
arising
associated with proposed
activities
and
which
identifies the procedures for
Maintain
records
of vehicles
Regular check ups
Periodic
operation
Periodic
operation
Discharge norms
for effluents
Periodic during
operation phase
pH,
TSS,
TDS,
BOD,
COD
&
temperature
Comprehensive as
per GSR 422(E)
Visual inspection
of drainage and
records thereof
Once in a week
during operation
phase
Once
in
a
season
Periodic during
operation phase
Comprehensive
monitoring as per
IS 10500
Periodic during
operation phase
Groundwater level
in meters bgl
As per IS 10500
during
phase
during
phase
Once in a week
Monitoring
of
indoor
air
contaminants such
as CO, CO2 and
VOCs.
Mock drill records,
on site emergency
plan,
evacuation
plan
As per CPCB/
SPCB
requirement
Local/native
species
Records of solid
waste generation,
treatment
and
disposal
Periodic
operation
Periodic
operation
Periodic during
operation phase
during
phase
during
phase
C6-7

Chapter-6
Sr.
No.
6.3
Potential
Impact
10
Soil quality
11
Health
collection,
handling
&
disposal of each waste
arising.
Maintenance of good soil
quality
Employees
and
migrant
labour health check ups
Parameters for
Monitoring
Frequency of
Monitoring
Physico-chemical
parameters
and
metals.
All
relevant
parameters
including HIV
Periodical
monitoring
at
ash pond site
Regular
check
ups
Progress Monitoring and Reporting Arrangements

The rationale for a reporting system is based on accountability to ensure that the
measures proposed as part of the environmental monitoring plan get
implemented in the project. The monitoring and evaluation of the management
measures are critical activities in implementation of the project. Monitoring
involves periodic checking to ascertain whether activities are going according to
the plans. It provides the necessary feedback for the project management to
keep the programme on schedule.
6.4
Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures

The mitigation measures suggested in Chapter-4 will be implemented so as to
reduce the impact on environment due to the operations of the proposed
expansion project. In order to facilitate easy implementation of mitigation
measures, the priority of implementation is given in Table-6.3.
TABLE-6.3
IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
6.5
Recommendations
Air pollution control
measures
Water pollution control
measures
Noise control measures
Ecological preservation and
up gradation
Time Requirement
Before commissioning of respective
units
Before commissioning of the units
Schedule
Immediate
Along with the commissioning of the

plant activities
Stage wise implementation
Immediate
Immediate
Immediate &
Progressive
Infrastructure for Environmental Protection

A well-equipped environmental laboratory will be set up within the plant
premises. Proper periodic training will be given to all employees to carry out
necessary environmental monitoring and analysis. The requirement of equipment
for carrying out environmental monitoring and frequency are given in Table-6.4.
Alternatively, NMDC can engage well reputed, recognized laboratory for carrying
out the environmental monitoring works.
C6-8

Chapter-6
TABLE-6.4
ENVIRONMENT MONITORING AND FREQUENCY
Sr.
No
Major Monitoring
Equipment
Equipment
Nos.
Required/
Proposed
Air/Stack/Noise Monitoring
1
Respirable
4
dust sampler
(RDS)
Parameters/
Function
Frequency
Ambient
Air
Fugitive
Emission
Stack Gas
Source
Emission
24
hr
continuous
once per month
Yes
PM2.5 samplers
PM10,
SO2,
NOx,
O3,
NH3,As, Ni &
Benzo-aPyrine (Bap)sampling
PM2.5
Yes
Stack
Monitoring kit
(manual)
On line stack
monitoring
along
with
accessories for
monitoring
SO2, NOx, CO2,
CO & PM
On line AAQ
monitoring
station
Flue
gas
analyser
PM
24
hr
continuous
once per month
All stack once
per month
No
Yes
Particulate
matter, SO2,
NOx, CO2 &
CO
Continuous
No
Yes
PM10, PM2.5
Continuous
Yes
No
O2%
CO%
SO2 mg/m3
NOx mg/m3
NO mg/m3
CxHy PPM
Ambient temp
Noise levels
Once per month

for coke oven
battery stacks
No
Yes
As and when
required
Once per month
Yes
Once per month
Yes
Once per month
Yes
Continuous
Daily
Regularly
5
6
Sound
level
1
meter
8
CO
analyser
1
CO
(NDIR)
9
Gas
1
Benzene
chromatograph
(C6H6)
10
High pressure
1
Benzo-aliquid
pyrine (BaP)chromatograph
particulate
(HPCL)
phase only
Meteorological Monitoring
11
Automatic
1
Meteorological
weather
parameters
monitoring
station
Water Monitoring & Chemical Analysis
12
Ion
analyser
1
NH3. CN,F
with
autotitrate
13
Hot air oven
1
Moisture
content
&
drying
of
samples
glassware
C6-9

Chapter-6
Sr.
No
14
Major Monitoring
Equipment
Equipment
Nos.
Required/
Proposed
Hot plate
2
15
Muffle furnace
16
17
BOD incubator
BOD
apparatus,
Oxitop
DO meter
1
1 set of 6
Parameters/
Function
Frequency
Ambient
Air
Fugitive
Emission
Stack Gas
Source
Emission
when
O&G Iron &

various
purpose like
boiling
digestion
of
sample
Digestion
at
temp, up to
10000 C
BOD
BOD
Regularly
Twice in a week
Twice in a week
BOD
Spectrophoto
meter
with
COD digestion
assembly
pH meter
Conductivity
meter
AAS along with
Graphite
furnace,
hydride
generator and
cold
vapor
technique
Digital MicroBalance
Digital top load
balance (range
1 to 500 g)
Filtration
apparatus
Heating
material
Refrigerator
COD,
Phenol
NO3-N
PO4-P
pH
TDS
As and
required
Daily
29
Fuming
chamber
Water bath
30
Vacuum pump
31
Turbidity
meter
Filter papers,
glass
ware,
plastic wares,
chemicals
Evaporation
of sample
Hardness,
alkalinity etc.
Turbidity
In Lot
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
32
2
1
As and
required
when
Daily
Daily
Heavy metals
in water, As &
Ni analysis in
Ambient air
As and
required
Weighing
Daily
Weighing
Daily
SS/MLSS
Daily
Distillation
Daily
Preservation
of chemicals
and samples
For Exhaust
Regularly
when
when
when
when
when
As and
required
As and
required
As and
required
As and
required
As and
required
when
C6-10

Chapter-6
6.6

The total cost of the proposed expansion project is about 818 Crores. The cost
provision for the environmental measures proposed in the project is about 15.32
crores (i.e. Rs. 1532 lakhs). The break-up of the investment is given in Table6.5.
TABLE-6.5
COST PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MEASURES
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
6.7
Description of Item
Process ESP
De-dusitng bag filters
Green belt Development
STP & maintenance
Rain water harvesting
Env. Monitoring
Total
Capital Cost
(Rs in Lakhs)
800
400
230
100
2
-1532
Recurring Cost
(Rs in Lakhs)
40
20
25
5
5
10
105
Greenbelt Development
6.7.1 Objective
The main objective of the green belt is to provide a barrier between the plant and
the surrounding areas. The green belt helps to capture the fugitive emissions and
to attenuate the noise generated in the plant apart from improving the aesthetics
of the plant site. In order to control the industrial pollutants, dense tree
plantations are necessary.
As the sedimentation pattern of the pollutants, ambient and ground level
concentration of pollutants are usually determined by the direction and speed of
prevailing wind and vertical and horizontal thermal gradients prevailing in the
area, the belt of plantations will be designed accordingly. The width of the tree
belt depends on the gaseous emissions, availability of land and site
characteristics etc.
Geometry of planting of tree is more important in order to have effective wind
break by the plantation. For an effective green belt, a mixture of tree species is
necessary and some shrubs and grasses will be inter-cropped. As far as possible,
there will be no gaps in the green belt. Where opening is imperative, alignments
to roads will be such that open gaps are prevented to overcome funneling action
of wind.
The trees will be planted in several rows with a tree density of 2000-2500
trees/ha with adequate width around the plant boundary and maintained as per
CPCB guidelines. The inter-spaces will be planted with grasses, bushes and
hedges. Greenbelt is thus a set of rows of trees planted in such a way that they
form an effective barrier between the plant and the surroundings. The greenbelt
layout is shown in Figure-6.1.
C6-11

Chapter-6
Design of Green Belt

The following shall be designed and implemented as per the latest CPCB
guidelines. The broad aspects to be covered are given below:
Shrubs and trees will be planted in encircling rows around the project site;
The short trees (<10-m height) will be planted in the first rows (towards plant
side) of the green belt. The tall trees (>10 m height) will be planted in the
outer rows (away from plant side);
Planting of trees in each row will be in staggered orientation (triangular form);
The spacing between the trees will be maintained slightly less than the normal
spaces, so that the trees may grow vertically and slightly increase the
effective height of the green belt.
6.7.2 Plant Species for Greenbelt
While selecting the plant species for the proposed green belt, the following points
will be taken into consideration:
Should
Should
Should
Should
Should
be a fast growing type;

have a thick canopy cover;
be perennially green;
be preferably of native origin; and
have a large leaf area index.
6.7.3 Recommended species in the Greenbelt Area

The recommended species for the greenbelt development are given in Table-6.6.
TABLE-6.6
LIST OF SPECIES SHOWING HIGH AIR POLLUTION TOLERANCE INDEX (APTI)
Sr.
No
1
Scientific Name
Alstonia scholaris
Saptaparni
(Sanskrit)
Apocynaceae
Azadirachta indica
Neem
Meliaceae
Dalbergia sissoo
Sisoo, Shisham
Fabaceae
Tamarindus indica
Imli
Ceasalpinaceae
Terminalia arjuna
Arjun
Combretaceae
Ficus bengalensis
Peepal
Moraceae
Common Name
Family
Air Pollution Tolerance

Index levels
For controlling Suspended
Particulate Matter (SPM),
S02, NOx and Noise
S02, NOx and Noise
S02, NOx and Noise
S02, NOx and Noise
S02, NOx and Noise
S02, NOx and Noise
C6-12

Chapter-6
Sr.
No
7
Scientific Name
Common Name
Family
Pongamia pinnata
Karanj
Fabaceae
Madhuca indica
Mahua
Sapotaceae
Tectona grandis
Teak, Segwan
Verbenaceae
10
Melia azadirach
Persian Lilac
Meliaceae
Air Pollution Tolerance

Index levels
S02, NOx and Noise
S02, NOx and Noise
S02, NOx and Noise
For
concontrolling
Suspended
Particulate
Matter (SPM), S02, NOx and
Noise
All the above mentioned species are ideally suited for the ecological habitat of
northern tropical mixed deciduous forests of Nagarnar region, and they are all
fast growing species, ideal for undertaking greenbelt plantations. The choosing of
the species should be ratified by the Horticulturist of the project site and local
forest department.
Above all species are fast growing species and are well acclimatized in the
northern tropical moist deciduous forest habitat of Nagarnar, Chhattisgarh state.
Their planting should be interspersed with each other to create mixed canopy of
the plants and the ideal stance for planting all trees except Ficus benghalensis is
3 X 3 m, for Ficus sp it is 5 X 5 m.
6.7.4 Action plan for development of Greenbelt Area
The year wise breakup for development of greenbelt is given in Table-6.7.
TABLE-6.7
YEARWISE - GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT
Year Wise
1st Year
2nd Year
3rd Year
4th Year
5th Year
Grand Total
Row wise planting

5 ha X
5 ha X
5 ha X
5 ha X
5 ha X
25 ha
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
samplings
samplings
samplings
samplings
samplings
Number of plants taken

during 5 ha planting per
every year for five years
12,500
12,500
12,500
12,500
12,500
62,500
Per ha ideally 2500 saplings based on the chosen spacing between 3.0 X 3.0 m
or 2.0 X 2.0 m between the plants, will accommodate optimum planting diversity
of the plants. The plants should be ideally 1 to 2 years old, chosen from notified
social forest nurseries or private nurseries and care should be taken to adhere to
the native and local species, avoiding as far as possible the planting of exotic
species for the green belt development.
C6-13
Chapter-6
FIGURE-6.1
GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN
C6-14

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.0
ADDITIONAL STUDIES
This chapter describes the public consultation for the proposed project, risk
assessment and disaster management plan, occupational health and safety issues.
7.1
Public Consultation
As per New Environment Impact Assessment Notification dated 14th September
notification 2006 was requested to MoEF&CC.
As per the request, the committee had exempted the proposed project for
installation of pellet plant from public hearing under Clause 7 (ii) of EIA
Notification 2006.
7.2
Risk Assessment
7.2.1 Introduction
Industrial activities, which produce, treat, store and handle hazardous
substances, have a high hazard potential to safety of man and environment at
work place and outside. Recognizing the need to control and minimize the risks
posed by such activities, the Ministry of Environment & Forests have notified the
Manufacture Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules in the year 1989
and subsequently modified, inserted and added different clauses in the said rule
to make it more stringent. For effective implementation of the rule, Ministry of
Environment & Forests has provided a set of guidelines. The guidelines, in
addition to other aspects, set out the duties required to be performed by the
occupier along with the procedure. The rule also lists out the industrial activities
and chemicals, which are required to be considered as hazardous.
The proposed project will be producing iron ore pellet. In view of this, proposed
activities are being scrutinized in line of the above referred manufacture, storage
and import of hazardous chemicals rules and observations / findings are
presented in this chapter.
7.3
Approach to the Study

Risk involves the occurrence or potential occurrence of some accidents consisting of
an event or sequence of events. The risk assessment study covers the following:
Identification of potential hazard areas;
Identification of representative failure cases;
Visualization of the resulting scenarios in terms of fire (thermal radiation) and
explosion;
Assess the overall damage potential of the identified hazardous events and the
impact zones from the accidental scenarios;
Assess the overall suitability of the site from hazard minimization and disaster
mitigation point of view;
C7-1

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Furnish specific recommendations on the minimization of the worst accident

possibilities; and
Preparation of broad disaster management plan (DMP), on-site and off-site
emergency plan, which includes occupational and health safety plan.
7.4
Fuel Storage at the Plant

Fuel considered for the proposed NMDC pellet plant at Nagarnar is LSHS/furnace oil
and LDO.
Low sulphur heavy stock (LSHS)/Furnace oil
Low sulphur heavy stock (LSHS)/Furnace oil fuel has been envisaged as fuel for
the proposed pellet plant. However, light diesel oil (LDO) shall also be required
for start-up and flame stabilization of the indurating furnace and flushing of the
LSHS oil pipelines during shut down / maintenance and fresh campaigns. The
annual requirement would be 43,517 KLPA. To meet the storage requirement,
two storage tanks of 460KL capacity each and one LDO storage tank of 50KL
capacity along with handling facilities shall be provided.
7.5
Hazard Identification
7.5.1
Introduction
Identification of hazards in NMDC pellet plant is of primary significance in the
analysis, quantification and cost effective control of accidents involving chemicals
and process. A classical definition of hazard states that hazard is in fact the
characteristic of system/plant/ process that presents potential for an accident.
Hence, all the components of a system/plant/process need to be thoroughly
examined to assess their potential for initiating or propagating an unplanned
event/sequence of events, which can be termed as an accident. The following two
methods for hazard identification have been employed in the study:
Identification of major hazardous units based on Manufacture, Storage and
Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 of Government of India (amended
GOI Rules, 2000); and
Identification of hazardous units and segments of plants and storage units based
on relative ranking technique, viz. Fire-Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI).
7.5.2
Identification of Major Hazardous Units
7.5.2.1 Classification of Major Hazardous Substance

Hazardous substances may be classified into three main classes: Flammable
substances, unstable substances and Toxic substances. The ratings for a large
number of chemicals based on flammability, reactivity and toxicity have been given
in NFPA Codes 49 and 345 M. Characteristics of the major fuels that are employed
in different processes of the NMDC pellet plant are listed in Table-7.1.
C7-2

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
TABLE-7.1
CATEGORY WISE SCHEDULE OF STORAGE TANKS
Materials
LDO
HFO
Hazardous Properties
UN 1203. Dangerous Goods Class 3 Flammable Liquid
UN 1202. Dangerous Goods Class 3 Flammable Liquid
TABLE-7.2
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS STORED, TRANSPORTED AND HANDLED
A
Material
1
2
No. of
Tanks
1
2
LDO
LSHS/Furnace Oil
Capacity
(Storage Condition)
50 KL
460 KL
TABLE-7.3
PROPERTIES OF FUELS USED AT THE NMDC PELLET PLANT
Chemical
LDO
HFO
TLV
MP
UEL
7.5.3
:
:
:
Codes/Label
Flammable
Flammable
TLV
FBP
MP
C
FP
371
>350
54.4
>62
14
Threshold Limit Value

Melting Point
Upper Explosive Limit
FBP
FP
LEL
:
:
:
UEL
LEL
%
6
5
0.7
0.5
Final Boiling Point

Flash Point
Lower Explosive Limit
Identification of Major Hazard Installations Based on GOI Rules, 1989

Following accidents in the chemical industry in India over a few decades, a specific
legislation covering major hazard activities has been enforced by Govt. of India in
1989 in conjunction with Environment Protection Act, 1986. This is referred here as
GOI Rules 1989. For the purpose of identifying major hazard installations, the rules
employ certain criteria based on toxic, flammable and explosive properties of
chemicals.
A systematic analysis of the fuels/chemicals and their quantities of storage has been
carried out, to determine threshold quantities as notified by GOI Rules, 1989 and
the applicable rules are identified. Applicability of storage rules are summarized in
Table-7.4.
TABLE-7.4
APPLICABILITY OF GOI RULES TO FUEL/CHEMICAL STORAGE
Sr.
No.
1
2
7.5.4
Chemical/ Fuel
LDO
HFO
Listed in
Schedule
Total
Quantity
3(1)
3(1)
1x50 KL
2 x 460 KL
Threshold Quantity (T) for

Application of Rules
5,7-9,13-15
10-12
25 MT
200 MT
25 MT
200 MT
Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI) Approach

Fire, Explosion and Toxicity Indexing (FE & TI) is a rapid ranking method for
identifying the degree of hazard. The application of FE&TI would help to make a
quick assessment of the nature and quantification of the hazard in these areas.
C7-3

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
However, this does not provide precise information. Respective Material Factor
(RMF), General Hazard Factors (GHF), Special Process Hazard Factors (SPHF) are
computed using standard procedure of awarding penalties based on storage
handling and reaction parameters. For each separate plant process, which contains
flammable or toxic substances, a fire and explosion index 'F' and/or a toxicity index
'T' may be determined in a manner derived from the method for determining a fire
and explosion index developed by the Dow Chemical Company.
7.5.4.1 FE and TI Methodology
Dow's Fire and Explosion Index (F and E) is a product of material factor (MF) and
hazard factor (F3) while MF represents the flammability and reactivity of the
substances, the hazard factor (F3), is itself a product of general process hazards
(GPH) and special process hazards (SPH). An accurate plot plan of the plant, a
process flow sheet and Fire and Explosion Index and Hazard Classification Guide
published by Dow Chemical Company are required to estimate the FE & TI of any
process plant or a storage unit.
7.5.4.2 Computations and Evaluation of Fire and Explosion Index
The Fire and Explosion Index (F&EI) is calculated from:F&EI = MF x (GPH) x (SPH)
The degree of hazard potential is identified based on the numerical value of F&EI as
per the criteria given below:
F&EI Range
0-60
61-96
97-127
128-158
159-up
Degree of Hazard
Light
Moderate
Intermediate
Heavy
Severe
7.5.4.3 Toxicity Index (TI)

The toxicity index is primarily based on the index figures for health hazards
established by the NFPA in codes NFPA 704, NFPA 49 and NFPA 345 m.
7.5.4.4 Classification of Hazard Categories
By comparing the indices F&EI and TI, the unit in question is classified into one of
the following three categories established for the purpose as given in Table-7.5.
TABLE-7.5
FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX
Category
I
II
III
Fire and Explosion Index

(F&EI)
F&EI < 65
65 < or = F&EI < 95
F&EI > or = 95
Toxicity Index (TI)

TI < 6
6 < or = TI < 10
TI > or = 10
C7-4

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Certain basic minimum preventive and protective measures are recommended for
the three hazard categories.
7.5.4.5 Results of FE and TI for Storage/Process Units
Based on the amended GOI Rules 2000, the hazardous fuels/chemicals used by the
NMDC pellet plant were identified. Fire and Explosion are the likely hazards, which
may occur due to the fuel storage. Hence, Fire and Explosion index has been
calculated for in-plant storage. Detailed estimates of FE&TI are given in Table-7.6.
TABLE-7.6
FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX FOR STORAGE FACILITIES
7.5.5
Sr.
No.
Fuel
Total Quantity
F&EI
Category
TI
Category
1
2
HFO
LDO
2 x 460 KL
1 x 50 KL
33.03
33.03
I
I
15.26
9.55
III
II
Conclusion
Results of FE&TI analysis show that the storage of HFO and LDO falls in category of
Light to moderate category.
7.6
Hazard Assessment and Evaluation
7.6.1
Introduction
Preliminary hazards analysis is based on the philosophy "Prevention is better
than cure". How safe are the operations? Safety is relative and implies freedom
from danger or injury. But there is always some element of danger or risk in
anything we do or build. When a chemical process facility is considered safe? This
calls for identification of hazards, quantification of risk and further suggest hazard
mitigating measures, if necessary.
7.6.2
Methodology
An assessment of the conceptual design is conducted for the purpose of identifying
and examining hazards related to feed stock materials, major process components,
utility and support systems, environmental factors, proposed operations, facilities
and safeguards.
7.6.3
Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA)

A preliminary hazard analysis is carried out initially to identify the major hazards
associated with storages and the processes of the plant. This is followed by
consequence analysis to quantify these hazards. Finally the vulnerable zones are
plotted for which risk reducing measures are deduced and implemented. The major
aspects are described below:
C7-5

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
TABLE-7.7
PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR PROCESS AND STORAGE AREAS
Process
Potential Hazard
Provision
Converts
mechanical
energy
into
electrical energy.
Mechanical hazards and

fire hazards in
1. Lube oil system
2. Cable galleries
3. Short circuits
Fire and explosion
As above
Equipment
Generator
Power Transformers
Switch Yard
Switch
Yard
control room
7.6.4
220 KVA switch

yard
-
Fire
Fire in cable galleries
and switch
All electrical fittings and

cables are provided as per
the specified standards.
As above
As above
Maximum Credible Accident Analysis (MCAA)

Hazardous substances may be released as a result of failures or catastrophes,
causing possible damage to the surrounding area. This section deals with the
question of how the consequences of the release of such substances and the
damage to the surrounding area can be determined by means of models. Major
hazards posed by flammable storage can be identified taking recourse to MCA
analysis. MCA analysis encompasses certain techniques to identify the hazards and
calculate the consequent effects in terms of damage distances of heat radiation,
toxic releases, vapour cloud explosion, etc. A host of probable or potential accidents
of the major units in the complex arising due to use, storage and handling of the
hazardous materials are examined to establish their credibility. Depending upon the
effective hazardous attributes and their impact on the event, the maximum effect
on the surrounding environment and the respective damage caused can be
assessed.
Proposed NMDC pellet plant mainly pose flammable and explosion hazards due to
unwanted release or leakage of fuel. Consequence analysis is basically a study of
quantitative analysis of hazards due to various failure scenarios. It is that part of
risk analysis, which considers failure cases and the damage caused by these failure
cases. It is done in order to form an opinion on potentially serious hazardous
outcome of accidents and their possible consequences. The reason and purpose of
consequence analysis are many folds like:
-
Part of Risk Assessment;

Plant Layout/Code Requirements;
Protection of other plants;
Protection of the public;
Emergency Planning; and
Design Criteria (e.g. loading on Control Room).
The results of consequence analysis are useful for getting information about all
known and unknown effects that are of importance when some failure scenario
C7-6

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
occurs in the plant and also to get information as how to deal with the possible
catastrophic events. It also gives the workers in the plant and people living in the
vicinity of the area, an understanding of their personal situation.
Selected Failure Cases
The failure cases that are selected for study are indicated in Table-7.8. The
purpose of this listing is to examine consequences of such failure individually or in
combination. The frequency of occurrence of failure also varies widely. Guillotine
failure of a pipeline of higher sizes has a low frequency of occurrence.
7.6.4.1 Damage Criteria
The fuel storage and the supply pipelines may lead to fire and explosion hazards.
The damage criteria due to an accidental release of any hydrocarbon arise from fire
and explosion. Contamination of soil or water is not expected as these fuels will
vaporize slowly and would not leave any residue. The vapors of these fuels are not
toxic and hence no effects of toxicity are expected.
Fire Damage
A flammable liquid in a pool will burn with a large turbulent diffusion flame. This
releases heat based on the heat of combustion and the burning rate of the liquid. A
part of the heat is radiated while the rest is convected away by rising hot air and
combustion products. The radiation can heat the contents of a nearby storage or
process unit to above its ignition temperature and thus result in a spread of fire. The
radiation can also cause severe burns or fatalities of workers or fire fighters located
within a certain distance. Hence, it will be important to know before hand the
damage potential of a flammable liquid pool likely to be created due to leakage or
catastrophic failure of a storage or process vessel. This will help to decide the
location of other storage/process vessels, decide the type of protective clothing the
workers/fire fighters need, the duration of time for which they can be in the zone,
the fire extinguishing measures needed and the protection methods needed for the
nearby storage/process vessels. Tables-7.8 and Table-7.9. tabulate the damage
effect on equipment and people due to thermal radiation intensity.
TABLE-7.8
DAMAGE DUE TO INCIDENT RADIATION INTENSITIES
Sr.
No.
Incident
Radiation
(kW/m2)
37.5
25.0
19.0
12.5
Type of Damage Intensity
Damage to Equipment
Damage to process equipment
Minimum energy required to ignite wood
at indefinitely long exposure without a
flame
Maximum thermal radiation intensity
allowed on thermally unprotected
adjoining equipment
Minimum energy to ignite with a flame;
melts plastic tubing
Damage to People
100% lethality in 1 min. 1%
lethality in 10 sec.
50%
Lethality
in
1
min.
Significant injury in 10 sec.
-1% lethality in 1 min.

C7-7

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Sr.
No.
5
Incident
Radiation
(kW/m2)
4.5
1.6
Type of Damage Intensity
Causes pain if duration is longer

than 20 sec, however blistering is
un-likely (First degree burns)
Causes no discomfort on long
exposures
---
The effect of incident radiation intensity and exposure time on lethality is given in
Table- 7.9.
TABLE-7.9
RADIATION EXPOSURE AND LETHALITY
Radiation
Intensity
(kW/m2)
1.6
Exposure Time
(seconds)
Lethality (%)
Degree of Burns
--
4.5
4.5
8.0
8.0
8.0
12.0
12.0
12.5
25.0
37.5
20
50
20
50
60
20
50
----
0
0
0
<1
<1
<1
8
1
50
100
No Discomfort even
after long exposure
1 st
1 st
1 st
3 rd
3 rd
2 nd
3 rd
----
Damage Due to Explosion

Explosion is a sudden and violent release of energy accompanied by the
generation of pressure wave and a loud noise. The rate of energy release is very
large and has potential to cause injury to the people, damage the plant and
nearby property etc. The effect of over-pressure can directly result in deaths to
those working in the direct vicinity of the explosion. The pressure wave may be
caused by a Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapour Explosion (BLEVE) or Vapour Cloud
Explosion (VCE).
BLEVE - Fireball
BLEVE is sometimes referred to as a fireball, a BLEVE is a combination of fire and
explosion with an intense radiant heat emission within a relatively short time
interval. This phenomenon can occur as a result of overheating of a pressurized
vessel by a primary fire. If a pressure vessel fails as a result of a weakening of its
structure the contents are instantaneously released from the vessel as a turbulent
mixture of liquid and gas expanding rapidly and dispersing in air as a cloud. When
this cloud is ignited a fireball occurs causing an enormous heat radiation intensity
within a few seconds. This heat intensity is sufficient to cause severe skin burns and
deaths at several hundred meters from the vessel, depending on the quantity of gas
involved. A BLEVE can therefore be caused by a physical impact on a vessel or a
tank, which is already overstressed.
C7-8

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Vapour Cloud Explosion

Explosion can be confined and unconfined vapour cloud explosions. Confined
explosions are those which occur within some sort of containment such as a vessel
or pipeline. Explosions in buildings also come under this category. Explosions which
occur in the open air are referred to as unconfined explosions and produce peak
pressures of only a few kPa. The peak pressures of confined explosions are
generally higher and may reach hundreds of kPa. Tables-7.10 tabulates the
damage criteria as a result of peak over pressure of a pressure wave on structures
and people.
TABLE-7.10
DAMAGE DUE TO PEAK OVER PRESSURE
Human Injury
Peak Over
Type of Damage
Pressure - bar
5-8
100% lethality
3.5 - 5
50% lethality
2-3
Threshold lethality
1.33 - 2
Severe lung damage
1 - 11/3
50% Eardrum rupture
Structural Damage
Peak Over
Type of Damage
Pressure- bar
0.3
Heavy (90% damage)
0.1
Repairable (10% damage)
0.03
Damage of Glass
0.01
Crack of Windows
-
Source: Marshall, V.C. (1977) ' How lethal are explosives and toxic escapes'.
Effect Due to Toxic Gas Release
Slow and intermittent release of toxic substances due to failure of a large storage or
process vessel or uncontrollable chemical reaction and failure of safety systems may
lead to generation of toxic cloud which may disperse and would affect a wide area.
The effect of toxic chemicals is basically concerned with acute exposure.
7.6.5 Risk Assessment Summary
The preliminary risk assessment has been completed for the proposed plant and
associated facilities and the broad conclusions are as follows:
There will be no significant adverse community impacts or environmental
damage consequences; and
The hazardous event scenarios and risks in general at this facility can be
adequately managed to acceptable levels by performing the recommended
safety studies as part of detailed design, applying recommended control
strategies and implementing a safety management system.
7.6.6 Risk Reduction Opportunities
The following opportunities will be considered as a potential means of reducing
identified risks during the detailed design phase:
C7-9

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Buildings and plant structures designed for cyclone and seismic events (where
appropriate), to prevent structural collapse and integrity of weather (water)
proofing for storage of dangerous goods;
Provision for adequate water capacity to supply fire protection systems and
critical process water;
Isolate people from load carrying/mechanical handling systems, vehicle traffic
and storage and stacking locations;
Installation of fit-for-purpose access ways and fall protection systems to
facilitate safe access to fixed and mobile plant;
Provision and integrity of process tanks, waste holding tanks and bunded
areas as per relevant standards;
Containment of hazardous materials;
Security of facility to prevent unauthorized access to plant, introduction of
prohibited items, and control of onsite traffic; and
Development of emergency response management systems commensurate
with site specific hazards and risks (fire, explosion, rescue and first aid).
7.7
Disaster Management Plan
7.7.1 Disasters
A disaster is a catastrophic situation in which suddenly, people are plunged into
helplessness and suffering, as a result, need protection, clothing, shelter, medical
and social care and other necessities of life.
Disasters can be divided into two main groups. In the first, disasters resulting
from natural phenomena like earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, storm surges,
cyclones, tropical storms, floods, avalanches, landslides, forest fires etc. The
second group includes disastrous events occasioned by man, or mans impact
upon the environment. Examples are armed conflict, industrial accidents,
radiation accidents, factory fires, explosions and escape of toxic gases or
chemical substances, river pollution, mining or other structural collapses, air, sea,
rail and road transport accidents and can reach catastrophic dimensions in terms
of human loss.
There can be no set criteria for assessing the gravity of a disaster in the abstract
since this depends to a large extent on the physical, economic and social
environment in which it occurs. What would be considered a major disaster in a
developing country, ill equipped to cope with the problems involved, may not
mean more than a temporary emergency elsewhere. However, all disaster bring
in their wake similar consequences that call for immediate action, whether at the
local, national or international level, for the rescue and relief of the victims. This
includes the search for the dead and injured and removal of debris and social
C7-10

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
care, the provision of temporary shelter to the homeless food, clothing and
medical supplies, and the rapid re-establishment of essential services.
7.7.2 Objectives of Disaster Management Plan (DMP)
The disaster management plan is aimed to ensure safety of life, protection of
environment, protection of installation, restoration of production and salvage
operations in this same order of priorities. For effective implementation of the
disaster management plan, it will be widely circulated and personnel training
given through rehearsals/drills.
The disaster management plan would reflect the probable, consequential
severalties of the undesired event due to deteriorating conditions or through
Knock on effects. Further, the management should be able to demonstrate that
their assessment of the consequences uses good supporting evidence and is
based on currently available and reliable information, incident data from internal
and external sources and if necessary the reports of outside agencies.
To tackle the consequences of a major emergency inside the factory or immediate
vicinity of the factory, a disaster management plan has to be formulated and this
planned emergency document is called Disaster Management Plan.
The objective of the industrial disaster management plan is to make use of the
combined resources of the plant and the outside services to achieve the
following:
Effect the rescue and medical treatment of casualties;
Safeguard other people;
Minimize damage to property and the environment;
Initially contain and ultimately bring the incident under control;
Identify any dead;
Provide for needs of relatives;
Provide authoritative information to the news media;
Secure the safe rehabilitation of affected area; and
Preserve relevant records and equipment for the subsequent inquiry into the
cause and circumstances of the emergency.
In effect, it is to optimize operational efficiency to rescue, rehabilitation and
render medical help and to restore normalcy.
7.8
Emergencies
7.8.1
General, Industrial, Emergencies

The emergencies that could be envisaged in the plant and tank farm are as
follows:
A situation of fire at tank farm of storage;
Slow isolated fires;
Fast spreading fires;
Structural failures;
C7-11

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Contamination of food/water; and

Sabotage/social disorder.
7.8.2 Specific Emergencies Anticipated
Fire and Explosion
Fire consequences can be disastrous, since they involve quantities of fuel either
stored or in dynamic inventory in pipelines or in nearby areas. Toxic releases can
affect persons working around. Preliminary hazard analysis has provided a basis
for consequences estimation. Estimation can be made by using various pool fire,
tank fire consequence calculations. During the study of risk assessment, the
natures of damages are worked out and probability of occurrence of such hazards
is also drawn up.
7.9
Emergency Organization
It is recommended to setup an emergency organization. A senior executive who
has control over the affairs of the plant would be heading the emergency
organization. He would be designated as site controller. As per the general
organization chart, would be designated as the incident controller. In the case of
stores, utilities, open areas, which are not under the control of the production
heads, senior executive responsible for maintenance of utilities would be
designated as incident controller. All the incident controllers would be reporting to
the site controller.
Each incident controller, for himself, organize a team responsible for controlling
the incidence with the personnel under his control. Shift incharge would be the
reporting officer, who would bring the incidence to the notice of the incidence
controller and site controller.
Emergency coordinators would be appointed who would undertake the
responsibilities like fire fighting, rescue, rehabilitation, transport and provide
essential and support services. For this purposes, security incharge, personnel
department, essential services personnel would be engaged. All these personnel
would be designated as key personnel.
In each shift, electrical supervisor, electrical fitters, pump house incharge, and
other maintenance staff would be drafted for emergency operations. In the event
of power or communication system failure, some of the staff members in the
office/plant offices would be drafted and their services would be utilized as
messengers for quick passing of communications. All these personnel would be
declared as essential personnel.
7.9.1 Emergency Communication

Whoever notices an emergency situation such as fire, growth of fire, leakage etc.
would inform his immediate superior and emergency control center. The person
on duty in the emergency control center would appraise the site controller. Site
controller verifies the situation from the incident controller of that area or the
Shift incharge and takes a decision about an impending on site emergency. This
C7-12

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
would be communicated to all the incident controllers, emergency coordinators.

Simultaneously, the emergency warning system would be activated on the
instructions of the site controller.
7.9.2 Emergency Responsibilities
The responsibilities of the key personnel are appended below:
7.9.2.1Site Controller
On receiving information about emergency he would rush to emergency control
center and take charge of ECC and the situation:
Assesses the magnitude of the situation on the advice of incident controller
and decides;
Whether the affected area needs to be evacuated;
Whether personnel who are at assembly points need to be evacuated;
Declares emergency and orders for operation of emergency siren;
Organizes announcement by public address system about location of
emergency;
Assesses which areas are likely to be affected, or need to be evacuated or are
to be alerted;
Maintains a continuous review of possible development and assesses the
situation in consultation with incident controller and other key personnel as to
whether shutting down the plant or any section of the plant is required and if
evacuation of persons is needed;
Directs personnel for rescue, rehabilitation, transport, fire, brigade, medical
and other designated mutual support systems locally available, for meeting
emergencies;
Controls evacuation of affected areas, if the situation is likely to go out of
control or effects are likely to go beyond the premises of the factory, informs
to district emergency authority, police, hospital and seeks their intervention
and help;
Informs inspector of factories, deputy chief inspector of factories, PCB and
other statutory authorities;
Gives a public statement in necessary;
Keeps record of chronological events and prepares an investigation report and
preserves evidence; and
On completion of onsite emergency and restoration of normally, declares all
clear and orders for all clear warning.
7.9.2.2 Incident Controller
Assembles the incident control team;
Directs operations within the affected areas with the priorities for safety to
personnel, minimize damage to the plant, property and environment and
minimize the loss of materials;
Directs the shutting down and evacuation of plant and areas likely to be
adversely affected by the emergency;
Ensures that all key personnel help is sought;
C7-13

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Provides advice and information to the fire and security officer and the local
fire services as and when they arrive;
Ensures that all non-essential workers/staff of the affected areas evacuated to
the appropriate assembly points, and the areas are searched for causalities;
Has regard to the need for preservation of evidence so as to facilitate any
inquiry into the causes and circumstances, which caused or escalated the
emergency;
Co-ordinates with emergency services at the site;
Provides tools and safety equipment to the team members;
Keeps in touch with the team and advise them regarding the method of
control to be used; and
Keeps the site controller of emergency informed of the progress being made.
7.9.2.3 Emergency Coordinator - Rescue, Fire Fighting
On knowing about emergency, rushes to ECC;
Helps the incident controller in containment of the emergency;
Ensure fire pumps in operating conditions and instructs pump house operator
to ready for any emergency with standby arrangement;
Guides the firefighting crew i.e. firemen, trained plant personnel and security
staff;
Organizes shifting the firefighting facilities to the emergency site, if required;
Takes guidance of the incident controller for firefighting as well as assesses
the requirements of outside help;
Arranges to control the traffic at the gate and the incident area;
Directs the security staff to the incident site to take part in the emergency
operations under his guidance and supervision;
Evacuates the people in the plant or in the nearby areas as advised by site
controller;
Searches for casualties and arranges proper aid for them;
Assembles search and evacuation team;
Arranges for safety equipment for the members of this team;
Decides which paths the evacuated workers should follow; and
Maintains law and order in the area, and if necessary seeks the help of police.
7.9.2.4 Emergency Coordinator-Medical, Mutual Aid, Rehabilitation, Transport and
Communication
In the event of failure of electric supply and thereby internal telephone, sets
up communication point and establishes contact with the emergency control
center (ECC);
Organizes medical treatment to the injured and if necessary will shift the
injured to nearby hospitals;
Mobilizes extra medical help from outside, if necessary;
Keeps a list of qualified first aiders of the factory and seek their assistance;
Maintains first aid and medical emergency requirements;
Makes sure that all safety equipment are made available to the emergency
team;
Assists site controller with necessary data and coordinate the emergency
activities;
C7-14

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Assists site controller in updating emergency plan, organizing mock drills

verification of inventory of emergency facilities and furnishing report to the
site controller;
Maintains liaison with civil administration;
Ensure availability of canteen facilities and maintenance of rehabilitation
center;
He will be in liaison with site controller/incident controller;
Ensure transportation facility;
Ensures availability of necessary cash for rescue/rehabilitation and emergency
expenditure;
Controls rehabilitation of affected areas on discontinuation of emergency; and
Makes available diesel/petrol for transport vehicles engaged in emergency
operation.
7.9.2.5 Emergency Coordinator - Essential Services
He would assist site controller and incident controller;
Maintains essential services like diesel generator, water, fire water,
compressed air/instrument air, power supply for lighting;
He would plan alternate facilities in the event of power failure, to maintain
essential services such as lighting, refrigeration plant etc;
He would organize separate electrical connections for all utilities and
emergency services so that in the event of emergency or fires, essential
services and utilities are not affected;
Gives necessary instructions regarding emergency electrical supply, isolation
of certain sections etc. to shift incharge and electricians; and
Ensures availability of adequate quantities of protective equipment and other
emergency materials, spares etc.
7.9.2.6 General Responsibilities of Employees during an Emergency
During an emergency, especially it becomes more enhanced and pronounced
when an emergency warning is raised, the workers if they are incharge of process
equipment should adopt safe and emergency shut down and attend any
prescribed duty as essential employee. If no such responsibilities assigned, he
should adopt a safe course to assembly point and await instructions. He should
not resort to spread panic. On the other hand, he must assist emergency
personnel towards objectives of DMP.
7.10
Industrial Safety & Fire Fighting

General
In order to protect the working personnel, equipment and machinery from any
damage or loss and to ensure uninterrupted production, adequate safety and fire
fighting measures have been considered for the proposed plant. The facilities
provided will bear all relevant approvals, as required from concerned agencies
like TAC, etc.
C7-15

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Safety of Personnel
All workmen employed in hazardous working conditions will be provided with
adequate personnel safety appliances.
Safety Appliances
Following safety appliances will be provided for the personnel exposed to the
different types of hazards in various plant units.
Industrial safety boots
Industrial helmets
Hand gloves Ear muffs
Welders screens and aprons
Fire Fighting Facilities
Keeping in view the nature of fire and vulnerability of the equipment and the
premises, following fire protection facilities have been envisaged for the plant.
Hydrant System
Hydrants will be provided in all major plant units at suitable locations and in
different levels inside the plant buildings. Yard hydrants will be provided in the
vicinity of each plant unit, normally along the road to meet the additional
requirement of water to extinguish fire.
Medium & High Velocity Water Spray System
Medium velocity spray system is proposed for fuel oil tanks, coke conveyors,
cable cellars, cable tunnel etc. Automatic high velocity water spray (deluge)
system is proposed for the protection transformers having capacity 10MVA or oil
storage capacity more than 2000 litres.
Features of the Automatic H.V. Spray System
This system consists of heat sensing detectors of fusible type mounted on a water
network around the transformer. Water projectors will be mounted on another
pipe network covering detector network. Water supply to the projectors will be
through a deluge valve. In the event of fire, the heat detectors will fuse at a fixed
temperature resulting in a pressure drop in the detector pipe network. This drop
in pressure results in the opening of the deluge valve. As the deluge valve opens,
the electric motor driven pump will start automatically, due to the drop in line
pressure through an impulse from the pressure switch provided on the header. In
event of failure of the motor driven pump to start, the pressure in the main
further drops. Another pressure switch provided on the header will then give the
impulse for the diesel engine driven pump to start automatically. Pumps will be
operated in a sequential manner. Stopping of the pump will be manual. Once the
pump is started, the water is released through the projectors in the form of fine
fog covering the equipment protected to extinguish the fire. The emulsifier
system will be kept pressurised at 7 kg/cm2 by means of jockey pumps.
C7-16

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Automatic Fire Detection System

Unattended vulnerable premises like electrical control room, cable tunnels, oil
cellars, etc. will be provided with automatic fire detection and alarm systems. The
detection of fire will give audio visual indication in the vicinity as well as in the
room of fire station and main plant control room to enable the fire personnel to
take appropriate action in the incipient stage.
Automatic Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System
Automatic Clean agent fire extinguishing system (IG 541 Inergen /IG
55(Argonite)/IG01) shall cover computer rooms/PLC rooms/and main Control
rooms proper including false floor and false ceiling in the units of pellet plant.
Manual Call Point Systems
All major units and welfare/administrative buildings will be provided with manual
call points for summoning the fire station for necessary assistance.
Passive Fire Protection System
In order to control fire hazard in cable spreader room / cable vault in main plant
building, coating of fire resistant compound on the erected / laid cable of 500 mm
length of cable on either side of fire sealing will be provided. The fire ceiling and
fire resistant door will have 2 hrs. fire rating in line with CBIP recommendation.
Fire resistance doors in the above cable vault room / spread room will also be
provided.
Portable Fire Extinguishers
All plant units, office buildings, stores, laboratories, etc. will be provided with
adequate number of portable fire extinguishers to be used as first aid fire
appliances. The distribution and selection of extinguishers will be done in
accordance with the requirement of fire protection manual.
7.11
Off-Site Emergency Preparedness Plan

The task of preparing the Off-Site Emergency Plan lies with the district collector,
however the off-site plan will be prepared with the help of the local district
authorities. The proposed plan is shown in Figure-7.1.
7.11.1 Aspects Proposed to be Considered in the Off-Site Emergency Plan

The main aspects, which will be included in the emergency plan are:
Organization
Detail of command structure, warning systems, implementation procedures,
emergency control centers.
C7-17

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Names and appointments of incident controller, site main controller, their

deputies and other key personnel.
Communications
Identification of personnel involved, communication center, call signs, network,
lists of telephone numbers.
Specialized Knowledge
Details of specialist bodies, firms and people upon whom it may be necessary to
call i.e. those with specialized chemical knowledge, laboratories.
Voluntary Organizations
Details of organizers, telephone numbers, resources etc.
Chemical Information
Details of the hazardous substances stored or procedure on each site and a
summary of the risk associated with them.
Meteorological Information
Arrangements for obtaining details of whether conditions prevailing at the time
and weather forecasts.
Humanitarian Arrangements
Transport, evacuation centers, emergency feeding treatment of injured, first aid,
ambulances, temporary mortuaries.
Public Information
Arrangements for
(a) Dealing with the media press office;
(b) Informing relatives, etc.
Assessment of Emergency Plan
Arrangements for:
(a) Collecting information on the causes of the emergency;
(b) Reviewing the efficiency and effectiveness of all aspects of the emergency
plan.
C7-18

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
FIGURE-7.1
ACTION PLAN FOR HANDLING OFF SITE EMERGENCY
C7-19

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.11.2 Role of the Emergency Co-ordinating Officer

The various emergency services will be co-ordinated by an emergency
coordinating officer (ECO), who will be designated by the district collector. The
ECO will liase closely with the site main controller. Again depending on local
arrangements, for very severe incidents with major or prolonged off-site
consequences, the external control will be passed to a senior local authority
administrator or even an administrator appointed by the central or state
government.
7.11.3 Role of the Local Authority
The duty to prepare the off-site plan lies with the local authorities. The
emergency planning officer (EPO) appointed will carry out his duty in preparing
for a whole range of different emergencies within the local authority area. The
EPO will liase with the works, to obtain the information to provide the basis for
the plan. This liaison will ensure that the plan is continually kept up-to-date.
It will be the responsibility of the EPO to ensure that all those organizations which
will be involved off site in handling the emergency, know of their role and are
able to accept it by having for example, sufficient staff and appropriate
equipment to cover their particular responsibilities. Rehearsals for off-site plans
will be organized by the EPO.
7.11.4 Role of Police
Formal duties of the police during an emergency include protecting life and
property and controlling traffic movements.
Their functions will include controlling bystanders evacuating the public,
identifying the dead and dealing with casualties, and informing relatives of death
or injury.
7.11.5 Role of Fire Authorities
The control of a fire will be normally the responsibility of the senior fire brigade
officer who would take over the handling of the fire from the site incident
controller on arrival at the site. The senior fire brigade officer will also have a
similar responsibility for other events, such as explosions and toxic release. Fire
authorities in the region will be apprised about the location of all stores of
flammable materials, water and foam supply points, and fire-fighting equipment.
They will be involved in on-site emergency rehearsals both as participants and on
occasions, as observes of exercises involving only site personnel.
7.11.6 Role of Health Authorities
Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals, ambulances, and so on,
will have a vital part to play following a major accident, and they will form an
integral part of the emergency plan.
C7-20

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
For major fires, injuries will be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a
varying degree, and the knowledge and experience to handle this in all but
extreme cases may be generally available in most hospitals. For major toxic
releases, the effects vary according to the chemical in question, and the health
authorities will be apprised about the likely toxic releases from the plant which
will unable them in dealing with the aftermath of a toxic release with treatment
appropriate to such casualties.
Major off-site incidents are likely to require medical equipment and facilities
additional to those available locally, and a medical mutual aid scheme should
exist to enable the assistance of neighboring authorities to be obtained in the
event of an emergency.
7.11.7 Role of Government Safety Authority
This will be the factory inspectorate available in the region. Inspectors are likely
to want to satisfy themselves that the organization responsible for producing the
off-site plan has made adequate arrangements for handling emergencies of all
types including major emergencies. They may wish to see well documented
producers and evidence of exercise undertaken to test the plan.
In the event of an accident, local arrangements regarding the role of the factory
inspector will apply. These may vary from keeping a watching brief to a close
involvement in advising on operations. In cases where toxic gases may have been
released, the factory inspectorate may be the only external agency with
equipment and resources to carry out tests.
7.12
Occupational Health and Safety

Large industries, in general, and chemical plants in particular where multifarious
activities are involved during construction, erection, testing, commissioning,
operation & maintenance, the men, materials and machines are the basic inputs.
Along with the boons, the industrialization generally bring several problems like
occupational health and safety.
The occupational health and safety measures followed for the existing NISP will
be proposed for the expansion also.
7.12.1 Occupational Health

Occupational health needs attention both during construction & erection and
operation & maintenance phases. However, the problem varies both in magnitude
and variety in the above phases.
Construction & Erection
The occupational health problems envisaged at this stage can mainly be due to
constructional accident and noise.
To overcome these hazards, in addition to arrangements to reduce it within TLVs
personal protective devices should also be supplied to workers.
C7-21

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Operation and Maintenance

The problem of occupational health, in the operation and maintenance phase is
due to respirable dust and noise. With suitable engineering controls the exposures
can be reduced to less than TLV limits and proper personnel protective devices
should be given to employees.
The working personnel should be given the following appropriate personnel
protective devices.
Industrial safety helmet;
Crash helmets;
Face shield with replacement acrylic vision;
Zero power plain goggles with cut type filters on both ends;
Zero power goggles with cut type filters on both sides and blue colour glasses;
Chemical goggles;
Welders equipment for eye & face protection;
Cylindrical type earplug;
Ear muffs;
Dust masks;
Canister gas mask;
Self contained breathing apparatus;
Leather apron;
Aluminized fiber glass fix proximity suit with hood and gloves;
Boiler suit;
Safety belt/lime mans safety belt;
Leather hand gloves;
Asbestos hand gloves;
Acid/alkali proof rubberized hand gloves;
Canvas cum leather hand gloves with leather palm;
Lead hand glove;
Electrically tested electrical resistance hand gloves;
Industrial safety shoes with steel toe;
Rubber boots (alkali resistant); and
Electrical safety shoes without steel toe and gum boots.
Full fledged hospital facilities should be made available round the clock for
attending emergency arising out of accidents, if any. All working personnel should
be medically examined at least once in every year and at the end of his term of
employment. This is in addition to the pre-employment medical examination.
7.12.2 Safety Plan
Safety of both men and materials during construction and operation phases is of
concern. The preparedness of an industry for the occurrence of possible disasters
is known as emergency plan. The disaster in the plant is possible due to leakage
of hazardous chemicals, collapse of structures and fire/explosion etc. To ensure
safety, the following regulations to be followed in the proposed pellet plant.
To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions of
work;
C7-22

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account
in the design, construction, operation and maintenance of plants, machinery
and equipment;
To ensure that adequate safety instruction are given to all employees;
To provide wherever necessary protective equipment, safety appliances and
clothing, and to ensure their proper use;
To inform employees about materials equipment or processes used in their
work which are known to be potentially hazardous to health or safety;
To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making
necessary changes from the point of view of safety in the light of experience
and upto date knowledge;
To provide appropriate facilities for fist aid and prompt treatment of injuries
and illness at work;
To provide appropriate instruction, training, retraining and supervision to
employees in health and safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity
is given to these matters;
To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an
appropriate fire fighting service together with training facilities for personnel
involved in this service;
To organize collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident, sickness
and incident involving personnel injury or injury to health with a view to
taking corrective, remedial and preventive action;
To promote through the established machinery, joint consultation in health
and safety matters to ensure effective participation by all employees;
To publish/notify regulations, instruction and notices in the common language
of employees;
To prepare separate safety rules for each types of occupation/processes
involved in a project; and
To ensure regular safety inspection by a competent person at suitable
intervals of all buildings, equipment, work places and operations.
7.12.3 Safety Organization
Construction & Erection Phase
A qualified and experienced safety officer will be appointed. The responsibilities of
the safety officers include identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe
acts of workers and advice on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize
training programs and provide professional expert advice on various issues
C7-23

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
related to occupational safety and health. He is also responsible to ensure

compliance of works safety rules/statutory provisions.
In addition to employment of safety officer by proposed plant every contractor,
who employs more than 250 workers, should also employ one safety officer to
ensure safety of the worker, in accordance with the conditions of contract.
Operation & Maintenance Phase
When the construction is completed the posting of safety officers should be in
accordance with the requirement of factories act and their duties and
responsibilities should be as defined thereof.
7.12.4 Safety Circle
In order to fully develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of
hazardous processes and improving safety and health, safety circles would be
constituted in each area of work. The circle would consist of 5-6 employees from
that area. The circle normally should meet for about an hour every week.
7.12.5 Safety Training
A full fledged training center will be set up. Safety training will be provided by the
safety officer with the assistance of faculty members called from corporate
center, professional safety institutions and universities. In addition to regular
employees, limited contractor labors are also provided safety training.
To create safety awareness safety films will be shown to workers and leaflets etc.
will be distributed.
Some precautions and remedial measures proposed to be adopted to prevent
fires are:
Compartmentation of cable galleries, use of proper sealing techniques of cable
passages and crevices in all directions would help in localizing and identifying
the area of occurrence of fire as well as ensure effective automatic and
manual fire fighting operations;
Spread of fire in horizontal direction would be checked by providing fire stops
for cable shafts;
Reliable and dependable type of fire detection system with proper zoning and
interlocks for alarms are effective protection methods for conveyor galleries;
House keeping of high standard helps in eliminating the causes of fire and
regular fire watching system strengthens fire prevention and fire fighting; and
Proper fire watching by all concerned would be ensured.
C7-24

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.12.6 Health and Safety Monitoring Plan

All the potential occupational hazardous work places would be monitored regularly.
The health of employees working in these areas would be monitored once in a year
for early detection of any ailment due to exposure to hazardous chemicals. NMDC is
already practicing the Health and Safety Monitoring in other units. Based on that
Health and Safety Monitoring Plan has been prepared for the proposed expansion.
The plan is detailed as follows;
Occupational Health Surveillance
NMDC have established separate cell for Occupational Health and Safety in all
their existing plants. Regular health checkups are being conducted at their
existing mines. Under OHS scheme, a separate doctor is earmarked to look into
the problems faced by the mineworkers and regular medical checkups are
conducted with respect to lung function test and Noise induced Hearing Loss
(NIHL). Similar facilities are proposed in this project.
Corporate OHS Policy
Occupational health and Safety of employees is the prime concern of NMDC Ltd.
and it has been taking care of implementation of Safety, Health and Environment
at all projects and striving to make OHS as a part of the industrial life.
Prevailing practices of NMDC Ltd.
All OHCs are provided with computerized facilities to maintain all the medical
examination reports. The various equipment available with the Occupational
Health Centers (OHCs) at various production projects of NMDC are as follows;
1. Audiometer
2. Precision impulses integrating sound level meter
3. X-ray 300 MA
4. Portable MG X-ray unit
5. X-ray viewing box
6. ILO standard X-ray films of Pneumoconiosis
7. LYNX Respirable dust kit
8. Spirometer
9. PFT machine
10. Titmus 2A vision tester
11. Binocular Microscope
12. Urilux urine testing machine
13. Mini peak flow meter
14. Drum with reverse lettering
15. Weighing machine (electronic)
16. ECG machine
17. Area heat stress monitor
18. Ambulance with life saving equipment &
19. Ambulance for general purpose.
C7-25

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
All the above equipment will also be provided for the proposed expansion. During
construction stage, requisite First aid facilities and certain life saving equipment
will be provided at the make shift OHS center. Ambulance van will also be
provided at the proposed plant, which is expected to move injured persons on
emergency for treatment at the NMDC Apollo Hospital, Bacheli. Local hospital
facilities at Jagdalpur will also be utilized for certain primary medical examination
purposes.
7.13
R&R Plan
The Resettlement and rehabilitation (R&R) Policy for 74.19 ha land acquired in
Kasturi and Chowkawada village, which is presently in possession of NMDC is
enclosed as Annexure-XV.
C7-26

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
8.0
PROJECT BENEFITS
The growth of the industry significantly contributes to economic growth of a
nation as it generates employment both directly and also due to development of
ancillary industries. Peripheral development takes place due to need of
infrastructure facilities and due to more influx of money through the area, overall
importance of the area increases and overall the infrastructure and the living
conditions will improve.
8.1
Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure

The proposed site for 2.0 MTPA pellet plant is located near Nagarnar Village in
Bastar district of Chhattisgarh. The site is at about 16 km in NorthEast direction
from Jagadalpur town. The proposed pellet plant site is located on the western
side of the proposed 3 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant, Nagarnar of NMDC.
Amaguda railway station is located at about 3 km from the proposed site in its
SSW direction. The location map of the site is shown in the drawing enclosed.
Madpal, Nagarnar, Manganpur, Ambaguda, Dhanpunji villages are existing near
the proposed site.
8.2
Improvement in the Social Infrastructure

quarters, Community hall and shops for meeting the requirement of employees
of NMDC Iron and Steel Plant & Pellet plant and local population. NMDC is
already implementing CSR works in the areas of education, health, housing,
transport, civic utilities in nearby areas for meeting the social infrastructure
demand.
8.3
Employment Potential
The proposed expansion project implementation will generate employment both
directly and also due to development of ancillary industries. During the
construction period, the project is going to create substantial employment and
income. A large portion of these is likely to trickle down to the local people.
Besides this, many persons from the study area will get employment on
permanent basis for actual operation of the plant in the form of skilled or
semiskilled or unskilled labour. Thus, substantial amount of employment and
income are expected to be generated for the local people. Hence, it can be
ascertained that the project is going to have significant employment and income
effects. The estimated manpower requirement at the operational stage of the
integrated steel complex is 150.
In the case of indirect employment, the effect will be quite strong and
widespread. Besides direct employment, the project is expected to generate
substantial indirect employment in other sectors. So far as indirect employment is
concerned, the effect will be very strong and widespread specifically, in ancillary
industries, services and transport sectors. In view of the above, it can be
justifiably concluded that the proposed expansion of steel plant will have positive
employment and income effects. Overall assessment of the employment and
C8-1

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
income effects indicates that the creation of additional capacity will have strong
positive direct as well as indirect impact on employment and income generation.
8.4
Community Development Plan & CSR Activities

NMDC is one of the very few organizations which have overtly realized the linkage
of a business organization with the well-being of the society. It is a matter of
pride that several CSR initiatives have been in place right from the inception of
the Company and they have become an integral part of the business model of
NMDC.
Existing CSR Policy of NMDC and its Implementation
NMDC has formulated a comprehensive CSR Policy and has been approved by its
Board in September 2008. The following are the salient Highlights of the Policy:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
CSR Objectives have been specified.

Focus areas viz., Literacy/Education, Safe drinking water/Health care &
Sanitation, Skill development for sustainable income generation &
Livelihood, Agriculture & Infrastructure development have been specified.
Budgetary mechanism.
Organizational Mechanism.
Guidelines for the following have been clearly specified.
Consideration of proposals and allotment of funds for CSR projects &
activities
Implementation Strategy for CSR projects / Activities and
Monitoring Strategy for CSR projects / Activities.
NMDC has a Board level CSR & Sustainability Committee which not only
monitors the implementation of CSR programs but also guides the entire process
of inclusive implementation. As a part of the process, employees/employee
groups are also involved in various CSR initiatives, in the manner & to the extent
possible.
NMDC has undertaken various Projects in the focus areas of education, health &
hygiene, drinking water, rural development, infrastructure & sustainability &
income generation, etc
Some of the major CSR initiatives taken up at the upcoming NMDC Iron and Steel
Plant at Nagarnar are as under:
8.4.1 Literacy and Education
Recognizing Education as an integral and critical aspect of human development
and a powerful instrument for emancipation, NMDCs focus is increasingly on
improving the literacy rate & quality of education in the tribal belt of Bastar in
Chhattisgarh.
C8-2

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
8.4.1.1 Residential School at Nagarnar

A residential school, initially upto class III, has been established with 194 tribal
boys and girls mostly drawn from the interior and remotest villages of Bastar.
This school will be expanded gradually up to 10+2 level. Total strength of Class I
to V is 431.
An amount of Rs.1.32 crore has been incurred on construction of the building in
addition to a recurring expenditure of Rs.2.0 crore. This amount will gradually go
up with increase in the strength of students every year.
An amount of Rs.23.08 crore has been sanctioned for construction of a fullfledged school building and other residential complex.
8.4.1.2 Industrial Training Institutes
An ITI, initially with Welder and Mason trades, has started functioning from 201011 for the benefit of the tribal students of Bastar district mainly focussing on the
surrounding villages of Nagarnar, where NMDC is setting up an integrated steel
plant. In the first year, 28 tribal students are admitted in this ITI. The present
recurring expenditure is to the tune of Rs.38.0 lakh per annum.
An amount of Rs.9.17 crore has been sanctioned for the construction of a fullfledged ITI and related facilities.
NMDC has established one ITI at Bhansi in South Bastar district. There are 5
(Five) trades in this ITI and every year, 76 students are admitted to various
trades. The annual expenditure is to the tune of Rs.14.0 lakh towards the free
education of tribal students in this ITI.
An amount of Rs.2.0 crore has been sanctioned for improving the facilities in this
ITI.
8.4.1.3 Training Program
NMDC has launched Skill development program in Bamboo, Bell metal and Tumba
Art to provide livelihood generation training to 460 unemployed tribal youth in
Bastar District oin C.G at a cost of Rs.181.78 lakhs. So far 300 tribal youth have
been trained.
NMDC has launched another livelihood skill training program in installation,
repairs and maintenance of hand pumps for 1260 unemployed youth of Bastar
during the year 2013-14 at a cost of Rs.149.80 lakhs. During first phase 180
trainees has successfully completed the training.
8.4.1.4 Siksha Sahayog Yojana
NMDC Siksha Sahayog Yojana, a unique scheme granting scholarships to the poor
Tribal and SC students of 5 (Five) districts of Bastar region, Chhattisgarh has
been extended to about 11,000 students to continue academic pursuit beyond 8 th
class upto Graduation in Engineering/Medicine. Under this scheme, scholarship is
C8-3

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
granted from class IX onwards till they pursue their Graduation and the amount is
paid through their individual accounts in Pos/Banks.
A recent survey has brought out that this has been widely accepted and has
started positively impacting the students and also their families. During 2010-11,
the scheme has been enriched with innovative value added activities like debate
competitions, sports events, study tours, science exhibitions etc. relating to
personality development.
The annual expenditure on this initiative is to the tune of Rs.5.0 crore.
8.4.1.5 Special admission in ITI
The wards of the land owners, who had offered their land to NMDC for its
integrated steel plant at Nagarnar, were sponsored for admission in the ITI at
Jagdalpur to improve their knowledge and employability.
8.4.1.6 Balika Siksha Yojana
NMDC has introduced a focussed initiative called Balika Siksha Yojana for the
benefit of the tribal girl students of Bastar region. Under this Yojana, the girl
students will be sponsored for various academic and professional courses in
Engineering, Medicine, BDS, Management, Nursing, Diplomas etc. The entire
expenditure will be met by NMDC.
In the first year, 25 tribal girls from Bastar region have been admitted to nursing
courses in M/s Apollo Hospitals, Hyderabad @ Rs.1.35 crores.
8.4.1.7 Residential Public School for Tribal students at Kanker
NMDC is establishing a residential public school at Kanker for the tribal students
of Bastar region. The intake will be initially 400 students and will ultimately cater
to 2000 tribal students. For the construction and management of the residential
school, NMDC has signed an MOU with Kalinga Institute of Social Sciences,
Bhubaneswar.
An amount of Rs.38.22 crore has been sanctioned for constructing the school
building and other facilities.
8.4.1.8 Construction of Residential Hostels and Toilets
NMDC has contributed Rs.5.0 crore for the construction of 5 (Five)
residential
hostels in Bastar region by the Govt. of Chhattisgarh for the benefit of tribal
students.
Construction of 914 Toilet blocks at a cost of Rs.1014.86 lakh in various
Government Schools in Bastar District of C.G under Swachh Bharat Abhivan.
C8-4

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
8.4.1.9 Support for special schools under PRAYAS

NMDC has contributed an amount of Rs.2.0 crore to Chhattisgarh Govt. for
improving the capabilities of tribal students seeking admission in Engineering and
Medical courses through special schools at Raipur and Bhilai in an initiative called
Prayas.
Other Initiatives
NMDC has so far constructed 41 primary/middle/high schools and 8 ashrams
besides creation of additional capacity in 14 schools, renovation in 21 schools
apart from provision of other facilities like toilets, play grounds, boundary walls,
drinking water, electrification, furniture, uniform to 6000 students, note books,
computers, teaching aids, sports material etc. Three ashrams at Cholnar and
Dhurli have been provided with complete infrastructure also.
NMDC has agreed to sponsor poor tribal girl students for Dental and Nursing
courses in Chhattisgarh in association with the State Govt. by meeting all
expenditure.
8.4.2 Healthcare
8.4.2.1 Free medical treatment at Project Hospitals
NMDC is extending free medical facilities to the local tribal people in its Project
hospitals at Jagdalpur. Both indoor and outdoor treatment facilities, including xrays, pathological tests, medicines, diet to in-patients are provided free of cost.
Ambulance services are provided to interior villages to bring serious patients for
treatment in Project hospitals.
An expenditure of around Rs.6.0 crore is incurred every year for this facility to the
tribal patients.
8.4.2.2 Hospital on Wheels
In addition, NMDC is also operating Hospitals on Wheels, the mobile medical
vans with latest equipment, Doctors and para-medical staff, in 37 tribal villages
around its Projects in Bastar providing free medical treatment at the doorsteps of
more than 28,000 tribal people.
The annual expenditure on this initiative is about Rs.2.0 crore.
8.4.2.3 Financial support for establishing a Medical College at Jagdalpur
NMDC has contributed an amount of Rs. 50.0 crore to the Govt. of Chhattisgarh to
establish a Medical College at Jagdalpur in Bastar region.
8.4.2.4 Medical Camps
Every year, free Eye camps are organized for the benefit of the tribal people
suffering from cataract. Further, free Orthopedic, Gynecology, ENT, Dermatology
C8-5

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
etc. camps are also organized in different tribal villages in which Super Specialist
Doctors participate. Besides these camps, NMDC extends financial and material
assistance for conducting special camps on AIDS awareness, Family welfare, Pulse
Polio Immunization programs etc.
8.4.2.5 Contribution to Sanjivani Kosh
Every year, NMDC contributes an amount of Rs.22.0 lakh to the Sanjivani
Kosh of Chhattisgarh Govt. to refer tribal patients to higher medical centres
for specialist treatment.
8.4.2.6 Miscellaneous services
A number of ambulances, diagnostic & medical equipment, medicines, furniture
etc. are provided by NMDC to Govt. hospitals. In addition, NMDC has constructed
one hospital at Dornapal and 14 PHCs in rural Bastar. Quarters for the medical
staff have been constructed with financial assistance from NMDC.
8.4.3 Infrastructure
8.4.3.1 Roads and Bridges
The following works were completed in Bastar region under infrastructure.
Roads
Community centres
203 Km
31 No.s
Construction of by-pass road for Jagdalpur: NMDC is partnering with State

Government of C.G for construction of by-pass road for Jagdalpur from Marenga
to Adwal over a distance of19.4Km at a cost of Rs.3,586.20 lakhs during the year
2011-12.
Re-construction of by-pass road from Bhejapadar to Jagdalpur at a cost of
Rs.198.49 lakhs. MOU signed in December2011.
8.4.3.2 Electrification
Electrification works using solar energy and also conventional energy have been
undertaken in 99 villages, including Bijapur, Jagdalpur etc., providing home
lights, street lights and also lighting in public places/buildings, PHCs etc directly
and also through partnership with the State Govt. The total expenditure on
providing solar energy based lighting in Bastar region has been to the extent of
Rs.18.0 crore.
8.4.4 Drinking Water
In order to provide potable drinking water, NMDC has installed about 341 hand
pumps in Bastar region. In addition, regular repair and maintenance works are
carried out. A good number of water storage tanks were also constructed by
NMDC in different villages. Drinking water facility has been provided in 42
ashrams in Bailadila region.
C8-6

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
8.4.5 Skill Development for sustainable income generation

8.4.5.1 Employable skills in construction activities
64 tribal youth drawn from the villages around Nagarnar have been sponsored for
acquiring employable skills relating to construction industry, at the National
Institute of Building Construction, Hyderabad. It is contemplated to cover around
2000 youth from Bastar district for imparting various skills in NIBC.
The expenditure is to the tune of Rs.70.0 lakh per annum.
8.4.5.2 Women empowerment
As part of women empowerment, two special batches of tribal women were
imparted training in Terrakota and Sisal crafts. Some SC/ST women were
imparted specialized training in Papad and Mixture-making at M/s Haldiram
factory, Nagpur.
Local tribal women are imparted regular tailoring skills and sewing machines were
distributed among the beneficiaries. Similarly, tribal girl students of neighbouring
villages studying in Project-based schools were given bicycles to facilitate their
commuting.
8.4.5.3 Livelihood-linked Learning Programs
NMDC has recently launched two Livelihood-linked Learning Diploma programs
in Air Conditioning & Refrigeration and Automobile Repairs & Service at Raipur by
engaging a specialized NGO. All the expenditure on training, boarding & lodge
facilities for 80 tribal students of Bastar region is met by NMDC.
8.4.6 Natural Calamities
NMDC has been extending its helping hand to mitigate the hardships of the
affected people in times of Natural calamities.
8.4.7
CSR Expenditure
The annual CSR expenditure against the Annual CSR budget for the last four
years for entire organization is given in Table-8.1.
TABLE-8.1
CSR EXPENDITURE (RS. IN CRORE) OF NMDC DURING LAST 4 YEARS
Year
Allocation
for CSR
2011-12
2012-13
2013-14
2014-15
80.13
133.21
126.85
210.56
Allocation as
% of PAT of
prev. year
1.23
1.83
2.00
2.11
Actual
Expenditure
86.72
101.10
131.42
188.65
CSR Exp. as
% of PAT of
prev. year
1.33
1.39
2.07
1.89
In C.G.
State
73.06
91.56
88.69
13.51
C8-7

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
8.4.7.1 CSR expenditure at Nagarnar

The annual CSR expenditure incurred at NMDC iron and steel plant during last 4
years is given in Table-8.2.
TABLE-8.2
CSR EXPENDITURE NISP
Focus area
Education
Drinking water
Health & Hygiene (excluding
Free treatment)
Roads & Bridges
Sports orgs/ Events
Others
Skill development
Total
Note: Cost mentioned in lakhs
8.5
2011-12
105.10
14.5
19.59
2012-13
157.63
75.52
54.94
2013-14
347.35
393.79
76.68
2014-15
1112.73
264.00
53.17
549.28
0.2
29.35
0.00
718.02
1903.77
3.20
26.78
1.37
2223.21
970.29
5.00
40.99
91.52
1925.62
1747.16
164.46
85.93
129.92
3557.37
Proposed CSR activities

Most of the CSR activities undertaken by NMDC at NISP are of major nature and
are currently on-going and spread over. The CSR activities mentioned above are
to be continued for the current financial year. Further, various developmental
works are to be proposed and taken up in the affected villages during the current
financial year 2014-2015. Further, budget for the financial year 2015-2016 is
under finalization. The CSR activities to be proposed will also focus in the areas
such as Education drinking water, Health and hygiene, Roads and bridges, sports
and other events, skill development etc.
C8-8

Chapter-9
9.0
ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS
9.1
Organization Policy
The importance of environment management has been recognised by NMDC
management very early and NMDC has taken necessary steps to identify
environmental aspects and mitigate those aspects which generate pollution in
the plant, respond to impacts on its own captive population and also in the
peripheral areas.
Environment Management System as per ISO: 14001-2004 is one of the thrust
areas of operation. It has already adopted a two-pronged strategy to abate
pollution, as follows:
Provision of state of the state of art pollution control equipment at the
design stage itself through clean technology initiatives; and
By developing a very strong monitoring/analysis and inspection setup for
statutory compliances.
The above objective has been intended to be achieved through the following:
i) Improvement in the quality and appropriateness of raw materials as per
design philosophy;
ii) Using automation & computer control to have improvement on technology and
on working condition;
iii) Pollution monitoring and environmental management plan;
iv) Augmenting & implementation of occupational health set up including regular
medical monitoring of employees;
v) A well developed safety management system;
vi) Preparation of emergency/disaster management plan and a properly trained
group to meet the emergency situations;
vii) Green belt development inside the plant;
viii) Development of awareness among employees towards environmental
conservation; and
ix) R & D activities with respect to specific pollution problems.
NMDC management has given maximum importance for adopting latest clean
technologies for keeping the pollution to minimum levels. The EMD will be the
nodal agency within the plant to deal with all environmental issues arising out
operation of various plant units and for ensuring compliance with all the
statutory requirements, including:
C9-1

Chapter-9
Environmental clearance conditions;

Consent to operate conditions; and
Hazardous waste authorization.
9.2
Corporate Environmental Policy

NMDC has formulated environmental policy at corporate level with commitment to
protect the environment while operating industries. NMDC will put its sincere
efforts to control the pollution and comply all the statutory standards. The
corporate environmental policy of NMDC is given in Figure-9.1.
9.3
Institutional Arrangements for Environment Protection and Conservation

Executive Director of NISP will head the steel plant and the pellet plant. Officer,
of the rank of Project Manager for pellet plant and General Manager for steel
plant will assist the Executive Director (NISP). The Project manager will be
assisted by Senior Manager (Environment) and Assistant manager (Environment).
The General Manager (Steel Plant) will be assisted by Assistant General Manager
who will head the Environmental Control Department (ECD). In his day-to-day
work, Assistant General Manager (Environment) will be assisted by Assistant
manager (Environment). The organizational chart of ECD at NMDC is shown in
Figure-9.2.
C9-2

Chapter-9
FIGURE-9.1(A)
CORPORATE ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY OF NMDC
C9-3

Chapter-9
FIGURE-9.1(B)
CORPORATE ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY OF NMDC
C9-4

Chapter-9
FIGURE-9.2
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL DEPARTMENT
C9-5

& Steel Plant with addition of 2.0 MTPA Pellet Plant at Kasturi and Chowkawada
Village near Nagarnar, Jagdalpur, Bastar District, Chhattisgarh
Chapter-10
10.0
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
10.1
Introduction
M/s. NMDC Limited, intends to set up 2.0 MTPA Pellet Plant as a backward
integration to their upcoming Integrated Iron and Steel Plant at Nagarnar, Bastar
District, Jagdalpur, Chhattisgarh.
10.2

The nature of the Project is a pyro metallurgical industry involving making of iron
ore Pellets utilizing iron ore concentrate received through Slurry Pipeline. The iron
ore concentrate shall be obtained from the Beneficiation plants which will be set
up by NMDC. The process of pelletisation essentially involves the following steps:
Filtration of iron ore concentrate to produce filter cake which is in fine powder
of particle size of 40 microns;
This filter cake along with additives are fed to Disc pelletiser for producing
green pellets; and
The green pellets are then indurated @1200C producing hardened pellets.
Location of the Project
Bastar district of Chhattisgarh and is about 16 km in NorthEast direction from
Jagdalpur town. The proposed pellet plant site is located on the eastern side of
the proposed 3MTPA Integrated Steel Plant (NISP), Nagarnar, NMDC. The
proposed plant site is located at the coordinates Latitude 1904'52.19 N to
1905'17.0 N and Longitude 8211'8.67 E to 8211'55.41 E.
Project Requirements
Land Requirement
and Chowkawada village.
The Raw materials requirement for 2.0 MTPA Pellet Plant is shown in Table-10.1
with daily consumption including moisture and handling losses as envisaged.
TABLE-10.1
RAW MATERIAL REQUIREMENT
Sr.
No
1
2
3
Material
Iron ore Concentrate
(Filter cake)
Limestone/Dolomite
Coke Breeze
Annual
Requirement (LTPA)
20.06
Specific
Consumption/(kg/t)
1103
0.40
0.36
20
18
C10-1

Chapter-10
Sr.
No
4
Material
Bentonite
TOTAL
Annual
Requirement (LTPA)
0.14
20.96
Specific
Consumption/(kg/t)
7
1148
Power Requirement
Maximum Demand
: 20.58 (MVA)
Annual energy consumption : 96.98 (106 kWH)
Water Requirement
The water required for plant use shall be met from the water obtained after
filtering the slurry. However fresh drinking water/make up water if any will be
received water system of 3 MTPA NMDC Iron and Steel Plant project, Nagarnar
which will be drawing raw water from River Sabari. Indicative water requirement
is about 2533 KLPD (0.38 cu.m/ton).
10.3
Baseline Environment
The study area generally represents mostly flat and vacant land with winds
blowing predominantly from southwest. The nearest IMD station is at Jagdalpur at
a distance of about 15 km from the project site.
The baseline environment quality has been monitored during pre monsoon season
(summer) 2015. With regard to the air quality in the study area, the
concentrations of particulate matter (PM10 and PM2.5), sulphur dioxide (SO2) and
oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and other pollutants levels are within the stipulated
standards as per 16th November, 2009 Notification. The contributors to the air
quality in the region are predominantly rural, residential activities, domestic coal
burning, traffic and unpaved open surfaces in the region. There are no major
operating industries in the study area except NMDC steel plant.
The water quality in the area covering surface and ground water sources in the
region is in compliance with the stipulated standards of IS:10500. The baseline
water quality does not reflect any major industrial contamination in the region.
The soil in the project site is predominantly clayey and the NPK values are in
sufficient quantity as compared to soil classification given by Indian Council of
Agricultural Research, New Delhi. The soil quality does not appear to have any
visible contamination. However, the surfaces in the region appear to be dusty due
to traffic and windblown dust.
Ambient noise levels were measured at eight locations around the project site.
The day time and night time noise levels in all the rural/residential locations were
observed to be within the permissible limits.
C10-2

Chapter-10
The study area (10 km radius) has a total population of 100027 persons as per
2011 census data. Total male population is about 49.73% and total female
population is around 50.27%. The total literacy rate is 49.18% in the region.
Terrestrial ecology:
From the primary and secondary survey it can be concluded that there are quite
good number of endangered and protected animals in the study area. All the major
The following mitigation measures will be taken for protection of fauna in the
study area:

Formulate wildlife protection committees in nearby villages to check the
area;
movement; and
will attract the avi-fauna in the study area and increase the aesthetic value of
the area.
Aquatic Ecology
Basillariophycean, Chlorophyceaen, Myxophyceaen, Rotifers and Cladocerans are
predominant in the studied water bodies. Plankton diversity Index for phytoplankton
and zooplankton varies from 2.50 to 3.06 and 1.64 to 1.81. Physico-chemical,
biological parameters and diversity index reveals that the studied water bodies are
oligotrophic to slightly mesotrophic in nature.
Thus, the monitoring of environmental attributes like ambient air, water quality,
soil characteristics, noise levels, terrestrial and aquatic ecology etc. indicates that
the pollution concentrations are within the permissible limits. Based on the
baseline environmental data of the area, the proposed project is environmentally
feasible as it has sufficient buffer assimilative capacity.
10.4
Summary of Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

The summary of anticipated adverse environmental impacts due to the proposed
project during operation and mitigation measures are given below:
10.4.1 Air Environment

The air pollution control system proposed in the proposed expansion is given
below:
C10-3

Chapter-10
During the construction phase, the following mitigation measures will be
employed to reduce the pollution level to acceptable limits:
The construction sites will be adequately camouflaged from outside areas so
that pollution can be confined to the construction site only;
Construction materials will be stored in covered go down or enclosed spaces
to prevent the windblown fugitive emissions;
followed;
Truck carrying soil, sand, stone dust, stone will be duly covered to avoid
spilling and fugitive emissions;
vulnerable areas of construction sites will be undertaken to control fugitive
dust during material handling and hauling activities in dry seasons;
The construction material delivering vehicles will be covered in order to
reduce spills;
Low emission construction equipment, vehicles and generator sets will be
used;
confirm to standards of central pollution control board (CPCB);
Monitoring of air quality at regular intervals will be conducted during
construction phase; and
Construction workers will be provided with masks to protect them from
inhaling dust.
C10-4

Chapter-10
Dry fog type DS system for material handling junction points;

Dedusting system in lime & dolo plant;
Stack monitoring to ensure proper functioning of different major stacks;
Air monitoring in the work-zone to ensure proper functioning of fugitive
emission control facilities;
four locations; and
Workers will be provided with adequate protective measures to protect them
from inhaling dust.
10.4.2 Water Environment
requirement.
minimum;
C10-5

Chapter-10
10.4.3 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

waste materials will be reused / re-utilized in the plant process.
Used Oil/cotton wastes are the hazardous waste produced from the proposed
expansion project which will be disposed-off to registered recyclers.
10.4.4 Noise Environment
equipment will generate noise ranging between 85-90 dB (A) near the source at
ear-muffs etc.
10.4.5 Biological Environment & Greenbelt Development
will be minimized through paving and water sprinkling. There are not many existing
matured trees in the site. However, greenbelt will be developed surrounding the
plant facilities in the open areas. The existing trees will be preserved to the extent
possible.
The tree species selected for green belt include the native species, which will be
planted in several rows with adequate width around the plant boundary and
maintained as per CPCB guidelines. The inter-spaces will be planted with grasses,
bushes and hedges. Greenbelt is thus a set of rows of trees planted in such a way
that they form an effective barrier between the plant and the surroundings so
that community noise impact and air pollution will be reduced to a great extent.
10.4.6 Socio- Economics
The proposal implementation will generate employment both directly and also
due to development of ancillary industries. During the construction period, the
project is going to create substantial employment and income. A large portion of
these is likely to trickle down to the local people. Besides this, many persons
from the study area will get employment on permanent basis for actual operation
C10-6

Chapter-10
of the plant in the form of skilled or semiskilled or unskilled labour. Thus,

substantial amount of employment and income are expected to be generated for
the local people. Hence, it can be ascertained that the project is going to have
significant employment and income effects. The estimated manpower
requirement at the operational stage of the pellet plant is 150.
In the case of indirect employment, the effect is quite strong and widespread.
Besides direct employment, the project is expected to generate substantial
indirect employment in other sectors. So far as indirect employment is
concerned, the effect is very strong and widespread specifically, in ancillary
industries, services and transport sectors. In view of the above, it can be
justifiably concluded that the proposed of integrated steel plant will have
tremendous positive employment and income effects. Overall assessment of the
employment and income effects indicates that the creation of additional capacity
will have strong positive direct as well as indirect impact on employment and
income generation.
10.5
Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan

A detailed risk assessment and consequence analysis has been carried for all the
plant operations in the proposed expansion. A suitable disaster management plan
has been recommended. A qualified and experienced safety officer will be
appointed. The responsibilities of the safety officers include identification of the
hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and advice on corrective actions,
conduct safety audit, organize training programs and provide professional expert
advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health. He is also
responsible to ensure compliance of works safety rules/statutory provisions.
All the potential occupational hazardous work places will be monitored regularly.
The health of employees will be monitored once in a year for early detection of
any ailment due to exposure to noise, respirable dust and hazardous chemicals.
The audiometry and lung function tests will be included in this surveillance
program.
10.6
Budget Requirement for Environment Protection

The proposed activities would be undertaken in phased manner and the budget
has been categorised into:
One time capital expenditure; and

Recurring annual expenditure.
The project will help in improving the basic facilities like medical facilities,
educational, transport etc. The roads will be constructed and improved in the area
under community development program of the project. The EMP cost towards
environmental measures is given in Table-10.2.
C10-7

Chapter-10
TABLE-10.2
COST PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MEASURES
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
10.7
Description of Item
Process ESP
De-dusting bag filters
Green belt Development
STP & maintenance
Rain water harvesting
Environment Monitoring
Total
Capital Cost
(Rs in Lakhs)
800
400
230
100
2
-1532
Recurring Cost
(Rs in Lakhs)
40
20
25
5
5
10
105
CSR Activities
The ongoing CSR activities such as Literacy and Education, Residential School at
Nagarnar, Industrial Training Institutes, Siksha Sahayog Yojana, Balika Siksha
Yojana, Residential Public School for Tribal students at Kanker, Support for
special schools under PRAYAS, and health care related welfare such as Free
medical treatment at Project Hospitals, Financial support for establishing a
Medical College at Jagdalpur, Medical Camps, Contribution to Sanjivani Kosh,
Infrastructure facilities such as Roads and Bridges, Electrification, Drinking Water
etc., Skill Development for sustainable income generation such as Employable
skills in construction activities, Women empowerment, Livelihood-linked Learning
Programs, and NMDC has been extending its helping hand to mitigate the
hardships of the affected people in times of Natural calamities.
10.8
Conclusions
The proposed expansion will have certain level of adverse impacts on the local
environment. However, with the judicious implementation of the proposed
pollution control and environment management measures, even the adverse
impacts anticipated due to construction and operation of the proposed steel plant
will be mitigated / contained. Further, development of this project will have many
beneficial impacts/effects in terms of bridging the steel demand and supply gap
and providing employment opportunities that will be created during the course of
its setting up and as well as during the operational phase of the project.
Thus, in view of considerable benefits from the project and controllable adverse
environmental impacts, the proposed project will be most advantageous to the
region as well as to the nation.
C10-8

Chapter-11
Disclosure Of Consultants
11.0
DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS
11.1
Introduction
The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environment Management Plan
(EMP) report has been prepared by carrying out various scientific studies. Studies
have been carried out by engaging scientists/engineers/experts of Vimta Labs
Limited, India and its empanelled associates. The list of experts involved in
different studies is given below:
Sr. No.
1
2
Study
Environmental impact assessment study
including environment management plan
Remote sensing and land use/land cover
studies
Consultants
Vimta
Labs
Limited,
Hyderabad, India
Multi
Tech
Services,
Hyderabad, India
The profile of the consultants is given below:

11.2
Vimta Labs Limited - Environment Consultant

Vimta Labs Limited is a leading multi-disciplinary testing and research
laboratory in India. VIMTA provides contract research and testing services in the
areas of environmental assessment, analytical testing, clinical research, preclinical (animal) studies, clinical reference lab services, advanced molecular
biology services and research & development studies.
The Environment Division has been in the forefront of its vision to provide
better environment through guiding and assisting the industry for sustainable
development. A stalwart in the mission to protect and preserve the natural
resources on earth for future generations, it offers extensive research and
consultancy services in the field of environment. With its rich experience, multidisciplinary expertise and with the support of its state-of the-art analytical
equipment, the services offered by the division are wide ranging and
encompasses entire gamut of environment management and monitoring services.
With its emphasis on quality services over the years, it has evolved itself into a
single reference point in India for comprehensive environmental services.
11.2.1 The Quality Policy

VIMTA is committed to good professional practices and quality of operations in
its testing, validation and research services;
VIMTA shall ensure customer satisfaction by maintaining independence,
impartiality and integrity in its operations;
VIMTA shall provide the services in accordance with national and international
norms;
VIMTA shall implement quality systems as per ISO/IEC 17025 and applicable
Good Laboratory Practices (GLPs) & Good Clinical Practices (GCPs), to
generate technically valid results/data; and
C11-1

Chapter-11
VIMTA shall ensure that all its personnel familiarize with the policies and
procedures of the quality system and implement the same in their work.
11.2.2 Services Offered
Spread over 70,000 sq.ft lush green garden premises at Cherlapally, Hyderabad
(India), the scientifically designed and meticulously groomed infrastructural
facility of the central laboratory of VIMTA has the most sophisticated instruments
backed by an excellent team of professionals.
Over 150,000 sq. ft. of world class research laboratory is also under operation at
Biotech Park-Genome Valley, Hyderabad (India). Having all the facilities under
one roof is perhaps the only one of its kind in South Asia in the contract testing
and research sector.
VIMTA Central Laboratory, Cherlapally, Hyderabad
VIMTA Life Sciences, Genome Valley, Hyderabad
Vimta offers services under the following specializations:

Environment;
Analytical;
Clinical Reference Lab;
Clinical Research;
Preclinical;
Molecular Biology; and
Research and Development.
The environment division of VIMTA Labs Limited (VLL) has its presence all over
India and other countries including a strong association with international
consultants like Japan Bank for International Cooperation (JBIC), Kennametal Inc.
- USA, Rudal Blanchard UK, E&E Solutions Japan, NAPESCO & Kuwait National
Petroleum Corporation Kuwait, Marafiq and Haif Consultants Saudi Arabia and
others. Vimta Labs Limited has the following credentials:
Recognition by BIS, India;
Recognition by Ministry of Environment and Forests, Govt. of India and
various State Pollution Control Boards (wherever applicable);
Recognition by Department of Science & Technology, Govt. of India (NABL);
Accreditation by QCI/NABET;
C11-2

Chapter-11
Recognition by Ministry of Defence, Govt. of India;

Recognition by APEDA, Ministry of Commerce, Govt. of India;
Recognition by Saudi Arabia Standard Organization (SASO), Saudi Arabia;
Recognition from NEMC, Tanzania;
Accreditation by NCTCF;
Certification from Standard Australia;
Recognition from ANVISA Brazil;
Recognition from USFDA;
Quality Assurance Services as per ISO/IEC 17025;
Quality Assurance Services as per ICH Guidelines; and
Recognition by World Health Organization (WHO).
11.2.3 Environment Division
Environment essentially being a multi-disciplinary science, the range of services
offered by the division are also comprehensive and caters to the needs of
industry, pollution control agencies, regulatory authorities and in a larger pursuit
of a green globe. The services under environment include:
Site selection and liability studies;
Environmental impact assessments;
Environment management plans;
Carrying capacity based regional studies;
Environmental audits;
Solid and hazardous waste management;
Risk assessment (MCA,HAZON,HAZOP) & disaster management plans;
Occupational health and safety, industrial hygiene;
Environmental monitoring for air, meteorology, water, soil, noise, ecology and
socio-economics;
Industrial emission source monitoring;
Offshore sampling and analysis of marine water and sediments;
Marine ecological studies;
Marine impact assessment;
Rehabilitation and resettlement studies;
Forestry and ecological studies;
Geological and hydro-geological studies;
Land use /land cover studies based on remote sensing;
Socio-economic studies;
Due diligence studies;
Industrial epidemiological studies;
Wasteland management studies; and
Study on bio-indicators.
C11-3

Chapter-11
C11-4

Chapter-11
The services under environmental chemistry include:
Analysis of water, wastewater, soil, solid waste, hazardous waste as per

international codes;
Source emissions and work zone air/noise quality monitoring;
Analysis of dioxins and furans;
Analysis of SVOCs, VOCs, PAH, BTEX, AOX, PCBs, TCLP metals, TOC etc.;
Categorization of hazardous waste; and
Pesticide residue analysis.
11.2.4 Facilities of Environment Division

Vimta-Environment division is located in scientifically designed central laboratory
with the state-of the-art modern facilities to offer vide range of services in indoor
and outdoor monitoring and analytical characterization in the field of
environment. Further, it is ably supported by highly skilled and experienced team
of professionals in the fields of science, engineering, ecology, meteorology, social
planning, geology & hydro-geology and environmental planning.
Besides the regular monitoring equipment such as fine dust samplers, respirable
dust samplers (RDS), automatic weather monitoring stations, stack monitoring
kits, personal samplers, noise meters, portable water kits etc, the other major
specialized equipment include:
Monostatic sodardesigned by National Physical Laboratory, GOI;
Integrated noise level metersQuest, U.S.A;
Flue gas analyzersTesto, Germany;
113-A Gravimetric dust sampler-Casella, London;
ICP AES Varian, USA;
Gas liquid chromatographs with FID, ECD & pFPDVarian, USA;
Gas chromatograph with mass detectorVarian, USA;
Atomic Absorption Spectrometer [AAS]Varian, USA;
PAS-AFC-123 instrument;
High Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC);
Laser particle size analyzer;
Bomb calorimeter;
Polarographs;
X-ray fluorescent spectrometer;
Flame photometer;
Carbon sulphur analyzer;
Computerized fatigue testing machine;
Electronic universal testing machine;
Fourier transmission infrared spectroscope; and
Water flow current meter make Lawrence & Mayo.
11.2.5 Quality Systems
The basic fact that environment division and its supporting site laboratories are
accredited by NABL (IS0-17025) and Ministry of Environment and Forests, India
and by other international bodies stand testimony to its emphasis on quality
systems.
C11-5
Chapter-11
The details of the persons involved in the preparation of present EIA/EMP report is presented below:
DETAILS OF PERSONNEL INVOLVED IN CURRENT EIA/EMP STUDY VIMTA LABS LTD
Sr. No.
1
Name
Mr. M. Janardhan
Dr. B. Chandra Sekhar
Qualification
M.Tech (Env.
Engg)
M.Sc., Ph.D
Mr. G. V. Raghava Rao
M.Tech (Env)
Mr. S. Srinivas Goud
M.S.W
Group Leader
Expert
Ms. Durga Bhavani
Group Leader
Expert
Mr. S.Kishore Kumar
M. Sc., M.Tech
(Env)
M.Tech (Env)
Group Leader
Expert
Dr. Mandar Nanajkar
Env Scientist
Expert
Dr. M. Subba Reddy
Sr. Scientist
Expert
Mr. M. Raja Manohar
M. Sc., Ph.D
(Ecology)
Ph.D (Env.
Chem)
M.Tech (Env )
Env Engineer
Expert
10
Mr. P. Rama Krishna
M.Tech (env)
Env Engineer
Expert
11
Mr. Ch. Narendra
M.S.W
Scientist
Expert
12
13
14
15
M.E (Env)
M.Tech (Env)
M.Sc (Geo)
M.Sc. (Env.
Science)
B.Sc
B.Com
Engineer
Engineer
Scientist
Scientist
Expert
Expert
Expert
Expert
16
17
Mr. M. Praveen Kumar

Mr. J. Sunil Kumar
Mr. K.Rajeswar
Mr. Chavan Sanjay
Kumar Laxman
Ms. T. Ramya Devi
Mr. P. Niranjan Babu
Quality Auditor
Dy Manager
Quality Check
Secretarial Support
18
Mr. P. Krishna
I.T.I (Civil)
Jr. Engineer
Cartography
Position
Vice President &
Head (Env)
Sr. Manager
Contribution
Co-ordination
Manager
Expert
Co-ordination
Experience
About 24 years of experience in the field of environmental
management and environmental engineering
management and modeling
management and environmental engineering
About 23 years of experience in the field of social impact assessment
studies.
About 11 years of experience in the field of Environmental
Management and Environmental Chemistry
About 4 years of experience in the field of environment management
and engineering
About 11 years of experience in ecological and biodiversity studies
About 4 years of experience in the field of environment management
and engineering
About 3 years of experience in the field of Environment Management
and engineering
About 2 years of experience in the field of Social Impact Assessment
Studies
About 1 year of experience in the field of environment management
About 1 year of experience in the field of environment management
About 5 years of experience in the field of geology and hydrogeology
About 5 years of experience in quality assurance
About 25 years of experience in the field of environmental monitoring
and secretarial support
About 15 years experience in the field of environmental management
C11-6
Chapter-11
Sr. No.
19
Name
Mr. J. Rama Krishna
Qualification
Position
Contribution
I.T.I (Civil)
Jr. Engineer
Cartography
Experience
and civil drawings
About 14 years experience in the field of environmental management
and civil drawings
Empanelled Experts
20
Mr. V.K.Bhatnagar
B.Sc. (Mining
Engineering)
Empanelled
Consultant
Expert
About 40 years of experience in the field of mining engineering,

geology and soil
21
Mr. J. Rajendra Prasad
M.Sc. (Applied
Geology)
Empanelled
Consultant
Expert
About 20 years of experience in the field of landuse and landcover,

satellite data interpretation and detailed hydrology & hydrogeology
(representing multi-tech services)
22
Mr. Rajgopal Krishnan
M.Tech
(Chemical
Engineering)
Empanelled
Consultant
Expert
About 42 years of experience in the field of risk assessment and

hazardous management
C11-7

EIA NMDC Pellet Plant

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EIA NMDC Pellet Plant

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

THE PROPOSED EXPANSION OF NMDC INTEGRATED IRON &

Vimta Labs Limited

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

THE PROPOSED EXPANSION OF NMDC INTEGRATED IRON &

For and on behalf of VIMTA Labs Limited

: Head & Vice President (Env)

: 20th August, 2015

Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron

Baseline Environmental Status

Purpose of the Report

Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures

Identification of Impacts and Mitigation Measures

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron

Table of Contents (Contd.)

Analysis of Alternative Sites

Environmental Monitoring Program

Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Operation

Analysis of Alternatives for Technology and Site

Improvement in Physical Infrastructure

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron

Table of Contents (Contd.)

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron

List of Tables (contd..)

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

The proposed pellet plant falls at the intersection of Latitude 1904'52.19 N

The project site is located at about 15 km (aerial) from Jagdalpur in W

There are no ecological sensitive locations, archaeological monuments, places of

Four reserve forest block exists within 10 km radius;

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Infrastructural Facilities and Raw Material Requirement

BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Educate the local people to develop awareness to protect the animals;

IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATION MEASURES

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

supports needed for construction will be ensured to shorten the construction

Dry fog type DS system for material handling junction points;

Recirculating water in the process whereby the discharge volume is

Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAMME

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron

Purpose of the Report

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron

Identification of Project and Project Proponent

1.2.1 Identification of the Project

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed Expansion of NMDC Integrated Iron

Brief Description of the Project

Nature of the Project